diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:49:04 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:49:04 -0700 |
| commit | cb93bf7ce54da7f3d1c82374152df235726073d8 (patch) | |
| tree | 75358255243890a5a3609f40a65ee6ab4fcc8c6c | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1690729 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/16534-h.htm | 5818 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image01.jpg | bin | 0 -> 40711 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image01a.jpg | bin | 0 -> 58856 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image12.jpg | bin | 0 -> 57829 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image17.jpg | bin | 0 -> 38043 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image21.jpg | bin | 0 -> 59834 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image26.jpg | bin | 0 -> 43788 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image32.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42648 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image37.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48748 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image38.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53611 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image39.jpg | bin | 0 -> 51373 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image44.jpg | bin | 0 -> 117020 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image51.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53462 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image52.jpg | bin | 0 -> 70740 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image56.jpg | bin | 0 -> 60854 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image63.jpg | bin | 0 -> 78422 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image67.jpg | bin | 0 -> 70204 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image69.jpg | bin | 0 -> 64185 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image70.jpg | bin | 0 -> 69971 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image79.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48592 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image80.jpg | bin | 0 -> 54206 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image81.jpg | bin | 0 -> 48767 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image83.jpg | bin | 0 -> 32281 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image85.jpg | bin | 0 -> 46402 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image87.jpg | bin | 0 -> 58845 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image89.jpg | bin | 0 -> 42388 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image92.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50419 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image94.jpg | bin | 0 -> 59764 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534-h/images/image95.jpg | bin | 0 -> 60877 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534.txt | 5623 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16534.zip | bin | 0 -> 104313 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
35 files changed, 11457 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/16534-h.zip b/16534-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..43064e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h.zip diff --git a/16534-h/16534-h.htm b/16534-h/16534-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cadf77a --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/16534-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,5818 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of A Young Folks' History of the Church Of Jesus Christ Of Latter-day Saints , by Nephi Anderson. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .linenum {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */ + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */ + .sidenote {width: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; margin-left: 1em; + float: right; clear: right; margin-top: 1em; + font-size: smaller; background: #eeeeee; border: dashed 1px;} + + .bb {border-bottom: solid 2px;} + .bl {border-left: solid 2px;} + .bt {border-top: solid 2px;} + .br {border-right: solid 2px;} + .bbox {border: solid 2px;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;} + + .poem {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; text-align: left;} + .poem br {display: none;} + .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;} + .poem span.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em;} + .poem span.i2 {display: block; margin-left: 2em;} + .poem span.i4 {display: block; margin-left: 4em;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Young Folks' History of the Church of +Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, by Nephi Anderson + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: A Young Folks' History of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints + +Author: Nephi Anderson + +Release Date: August 16, 2005 [EBook #16534] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY *** + + + + +Produced by Kevin Handy, Josephine Paolucci and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<p><a name="Joseph_smith" id="Joseph_smith"></a></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 298px;"> +<img src="images/image01.jpg" width="298" height="410" alt="JOSEPH SMITH, THE PROPHET." title="" /> +<span class="caption">JOSEPH SMITH, THE PROPHET.</span> +</div><p><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1"></a></p> +<p><a name="hyrum_smith" id="hyrum_smith"></a></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 290px;"> +<img src="images/image01a.jpg" width="290" height="420" alt="HYRUM SMITH, THE PATRIARCH." title="" /> +<span class="caption">HYRUM SMITH, THE PATRIARCH.</span> +</div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4"></a></p> +<h1><b>A Young Folks' History</b></h1> + +<h3>OF THE</h3> + +<h2>CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS</h2> + +<h2>By NEPHI ANDERSON</h2> + + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"<i>We have heard with our ears, O God, our fathers have told us, +what Work thou didst in their days, in the time of old</i>"—<i>Psalm +xliv:1</i>.</p></div> + +<p> +Published by the<br /> +DESERET SUNDAY SCHOOL UNION<br /> +Salt Lake City. Utah<br /> +1916<br /> +</p> + +<p><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5"></a></p><p> +<i>Copyright, 1889,<br /> +By Nephi Anderson<br /> +<br /> +Copyright, 1916,<br /> +By Joseph F. Smith,<br /> +For the Deseret Sunday School Union</i>.<br /> +</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p>[Transcriber's note: Minor typos in text corrected and footnotes moved to +end of text.]</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6"></a></p> +<h2><a name="To_Parents_and_Teachers" id="To_Parents_and_Teachers"></a><b>To Parents and Teachers.</b></h2> + + +<p>Studying the history of our country creates patriotism and engenders +loyalty. For the same reason, a study of the history of the Church of Jesus +Christ of Latter-day Saints will implant in our boys and girls a love for +its heroes, a loyalty to its principles, and an appreciation of its +achievements. By a knowledge of the history of the Church, our young people +will prize more highly that heritage given them of God and preserved for +them by the sweat and blood of their fathers.</p> + +<p>The teacher using this little book will understand that it is not +exhaustive, but rather suggestive. The teacher should be in possession of +much more history than is given here. He should fill in much of the +undercurrent of heroism, faith, and devotion exhibited by the characters of +the history, very little of which can be given in the text. The importance +of this larger knowledge on the part of the teacher will be understood by +an examination of the review and questions at the end of each chapter. The +aim in these questions is not only to review the facts of the lesson, but +by suggestions and reference to bring out more fully deductions and +principles.</p> + +<p>It is believed that by combining the topical and the question methods the +best results may be obtained. The topics are to be assigned certain pupils +for treatment. Questions <a name="Page_7" id="Page_7"></a>should not be limited to those in the book. The +teacher should find many more to ask.</p> + +<p>Special attention is called to the maps. Have pupils locate each important +place. Quite a number of dates are found in the text. It is not intended +that the pupils should memorize them all. Most of them should be used +merely in fixing the relative time between events. It is suggested that the +pupils be encouraged to refer to the Church works and other books mentioned +in the text.</p> + +<p>For further preparation the teacher is referred to "The History of the +Church," "Cannon's Life of Joseph Smith," "Whitney's History of Utah." The +"Faith Promoting Series," Evan's "Hundred Years of Mormonism," etc., will +give much interesting and valuable information.</p> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8"></a></p> +<h2>CONTENTS<br /> +<br /> +<br /></h2> + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='left'>To Parents and Teachers</td><td align='left'><a href="#To_Parents_and_Teachers"><b>1</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER I.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>A Parable</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>9</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER II.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The First Vision</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>12</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER III.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Angel Moroni</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>16</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER IV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Sacred Plates</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>18</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER V.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Book of Mormon</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>23</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER VI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Three Witnesses</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>27</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER VII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Priesthood Restored</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>32</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER VIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Organization of the Church</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>34</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER IX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Persecution of Joseph</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><b>38</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER X.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Mission to the Indians</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><b>41</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Removal to Ohio</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><b>45</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Land of Zion</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><b>49</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Persecution in Jackson County</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><b>52</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XIV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Expulsion from Jackson County</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><b>56</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Zion's Camp</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><b>60</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XVI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Church at Kirtland</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><b>65</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XVII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Twelve Apostles—The Seventies—Kirtland Temple</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><b>68</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XVIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Mission to England</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><b>72</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XIX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Far West</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><b>77</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Haun's Mill Massacre</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XX"><b>82</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Driven from Missouri</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI"><b>86</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>In Missouri Prisons</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII"><b>92</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Nauvoo</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII"><b>96</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXIV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Martyrdom</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV"><b>103</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Expulsion from Illinois</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV"><b>109</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXVI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Battle of Nauvoo</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI"><b>114</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXVII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Westward</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII"><b>118</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXVIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Mormon Battalion</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII"><b>123</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXIX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Pioneers</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX"><b>127</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Great Salt Lake City</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX"><b>132</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Growth of Utah and the Church</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI"><b>187</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The "Utah War"</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII"><b>141</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The "Utah War" (Concluded)</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIII"><b>145</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXIV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Prosperity</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIV"><b>148</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXV.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The "Crusade"</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXV"><b>152</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXVI.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Presidency of Wilford Woodruff</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXVI"><b>157</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXVII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Temple Building</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXVII"><b>163</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXVIII.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Presidency of Lorenzo Snow</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXVIII"><b>167</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER XXXIX.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Presidency of Joseph F. Smith</td><td align='left'><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIX"><b>171</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><b>APPENDIX</b>.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>First Presidencies of the Church</td><td align='left'><a href="#FIRST_PRESIDENCIES_OF_THE_CHURCH"><b>182</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>List of Twelve Apostles</td><td align='left'><a href="#NAMES_OF_THE_TWELVE_APOSTLES"><b>183</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><b>MAPS</b>.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Fayette and Kirtland</td><td align='left'><a href="#map_1"><b>36</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Missouri and Illinois</td><td align='left'><a href="#map_2"><b>59</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Routes of Mormon Battalion and Pioneers</td><td align='left'><a href="#map_3"><b>128</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><b>ILLUSTRATIONS</b>.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Joseph Smith, the Prophet</td><td align='left'><a href="#Joseph_smith"><b>FRONTISPIECE</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Hyrum Smith the Patriarch</td><td align='left'><a href="#hyrum_smith"><b>2</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Brigham Young</td><td align='left'><a href="#president_young"><b>68</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Hill Cumorah</td><td align='left'><a href="#cumorah"><b>19</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Three Witnesses</td><td align='left'><a href="#three_witnesses"><b>28</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Sidney Rigdon</td><td align='left'><a href="#sydney_rigdon"><b>47</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>President Brigham Young</td><td align='left'><a href="#president_young"><b>68</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Kirtland Temple</td><td align='left'><a href="#kirtland_temple"><b>70</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>President Heber C. Kimball</td><td align='left'><a href="#Heber"><b>73</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Haun's Mill</td><td align='left'><a href="#Haun"><b>83</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Nauvoo House</td><td align='left'><a href="#navoo_house"><b>97</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Nauvoo Mansion</td><td align='left'><a href="#navoo_mansion"><b>99</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Carthage Jail</td><td align='left'><a href="#jail"><b>106</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>A Pioneer Train</td><td align='left'><a href="#train"><b>120</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Salt Lake Valley in 1847</td><td align='left'><a href="#valley"><b>133</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Old Fort</td><td align='left'><a href="#fort"><b>135</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Salt Lake Tabernacle (Interior)</td><td align='left'><a href="#interior"><b>149</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Salt Lake Tabernacle (Exterior)</td><td align='left'><a href="#exterior"><b>150</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>President John Taylor</td><td align='left'><a href="#taylor"><b>153</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>President Wilford Woodruff</td><td align='left'><a href="#woodruff"><b>157</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The Pioneer Monument</td><td align='left'><a href="#monument"><b>161</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Salt Lake Temple and Grounds</td><td align='left'><a href="#temple_block"><b>164</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>President Lorenzo Snow</td><td align='left'><a href="#snow"><b>168</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>The First Presidency, 1916</td><td align='left'><a href="#first_presidency"><b>174</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Joseph Smith Monument and Memorial Cottage</td><td align='left'><a href="#smith_monument"><b>178</b></a></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Church Office Building</td><td align='left'><a href="#office"><b>180</b></a></td></tr> +</table></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14"></a></p> +<h2><b>A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY</b></h2> + +<h3>OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS.</h3> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<h3>A PARABLE.</h3> + + +<p>Once upon a time the owner of a very large garden planted therein a tree, +the fruit of which was very precious and of great value to all who ate of +it. For a time, the tree grew and bore much good fruit. But the owner of +the garden had an enemy who went about secretly sowing seeds of weeds and +all manner of briers and brush, that they might spread all over the garden +and kill out the good tree which the master had planted. The enemy also +persuaded many of the workmen in the garden to neglect the good tree, and +let the briers and weeds grow up around it and so prevent its growth. Thus +in time the once precious fruit of the good tree became wild and scrubby, +no better than the enemy's trees which grew around it.</p> + +<p>Years passed, and the master, grieving that the precious fruit should have +become so worthless, determined to plant the good tree once more in the +garden. He did not try to clear away a spot for it amid the old, overgrown +parts of the land, but he called upon certain workers to go to a distant +<a name="Page_15" id="Page_15"></a>part of the garden where nothing had been planted for a long time, and +there prepare the ground for the planting of the tree.</p> + +<p>These workers were faithful to their master and did as they were told. Very +few of the enemy's noxious weeds were growing in the new soil, so it was +not such hard work to clear the ground and prepare a place for the master +to plant his tree.</p> + +<p>To be better protected against the enemy, the master told his workmen to +build a high, strong wall about that part of the garden. This was all done; +and then one beautiful spring day the owner came with his servants. They +had with them the precious tree taken from some other garden where it had +grown without hindrance from weeds. The tree was planted and put in charge +of other servants to tend it. The warm sun shone on it, the rains came from +heaven to water it, and the tree took firm root and grew.</p> + +<p>Now all the boys and girls who read this book will understand that the +little story I have just told is what is called a <i>Parable</i>, meant to make +plainer some facts and truths. I can not tell you all about that tree here, +how it grew and bore fruit, and how many people came and ate of its +delicious fruit, notwithstanding the enemy came again and tried to check +its growth. I say, I cannot tell it to you in the form of a parable, but +will tell it as it actually happened. You may, if you like, imagine in your +own minds the rest of the parable, but the real story you will find more +interesting than any made-up tale can be.</p> + +<p>First, let me explain to you the meaning of the parable.</p> + +<p>The garden means the earth, and the owner is the Lord, who came to the +earth about nineteen hundred years ago to die for the sins of the world. He +also planted the good tree, <a name="Page_16" id="Page_16"></a>that is, He brought the gospel and taught it +to his followers. The enemy is the evil one, the devil, who stirred up men +to work against the gospel and to kill those who obeyed it. He also mixed +his lies with Christ's truths, until in time the pure gospel was not to be +found on the earth.</p> + +<p>This was the condition of the world for hundreds of years. Then the Lord +wished to restore the true gospel and again establish his Church on the +earth. He therefore chose a place where all would have the right to believe +the truth and be protected in that liberty. The Lord, therefore, moved upon +Columbus to discover this land of America.</p> + +<p>The servants spoken of, whom the Lord sent to prepare the land for the +planting, were all those great and good men whom you have read about in +your American history: Washington, Jefferson, Franklin, and many others. +You will remember how these men loved right and liberty, and how they +worked so hard for it; and in reading the history of these men we can +plainly see that the Lord was with them and helped them. These men built +the high wall, which means that they made just laws that would protect the +people and let them worship God in any way they thought right.</p> + +<p>Thus was the way prepared for the gospel to be restored again to the earth; +and the Lord himself came from heaven, also his servants Moroni, Peter, +James, and John to bring the glad tidings to all who live on the earth.</p> + +<p>Then the Lord called some more servants to preach the gospel to the world +and build up his Church. The first and greatest of these servants is known +by the name of Joseph Smith, the Prophet. How the Lord called him to this +great work and delivered to him the gospel will be told you in the next +chapter.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The Parable. 2. Explanation.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17"></a><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Name some of Christ's first disciples. 2: Tell +how some of them were killed. 3. How long was the world without the gospel? +4. Tell how Columbus discovered America. 5. Who were the Pilgrims? 6. What +was the Revolutionary war about? 7. What is the Constitution of the United +States? 8. Find out what it says about religious liberty. 9. Why is America +the "Land of liberty?"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<h3>THE FIRST VISION.</h3> + + +<p>At the time when Thomas Jefferson was president of the United States, there +was born among the Green Mountains of Vermont a boy who was to become the +great prophet of the last days. The hills and valleys of Vermont look +beautiful in the summer, but at the time here spoken of they were no doubt +covered with snow, for it was the 23rd of December, 1805, in the town of +Sharon, Windsor county, that Joseph Smith first saw the light of the world.</p> + +<p>Joseph was named after his father, whose name was Joseph. His mother's +maiden name was Lucy Mack. Joseph had five brothers and three sisters whose +names were Alvin, Hyrum, (then Joseph), Samuel, William, Don Carlos, +Sophronia, Catherine and Lucy; so you see that there was a large family for +the father and mother to take care of. Joseph's parents were poor and had +to work hard for a living, so when the boys were old enough they had to +help on the farm; this they willingly, did. For this reason Joseph did not +go to school much, but he learned to read, to write fairly well, and to +work some examples in arithmetic.<a name="Page_18" id="Page_18"></a> Though Joseph did not get much of an +education at school, yet he was a great student; and then God became his +teacher, so that before he died, as you will see, he became one of the most +learned men in the world.</p> + +<p>When Joseph was ten years old they all moved from Vermont to Palmyra, in +the western part of the state of New York. Four years later they moved +again to the small town of Manchester, in Ontario, now Wayne County, New +York.</p> + +<p>While the family was living at Manchester there arose a great religious +excitement all through the country. The different religious sects held many +meetings and tried to get people to join them. Joseph was now in his +fifteenth year and he also became interested, as his parents had always +taught him to believe in God and the Bible. Joseph thought he would like to +join the true church of Christ, but what troubled him was to know which of +all these sects was the true church. He could see that all of them could +not be true, as God surely would not have a great many churches, one +striving against the other; also, no doubt, he had read in the Bible that +there was but "one Lord, one faith, one baptism," etc., which the Lord +accepted. Joseph went first to one meeting, then to another. His mother and +some of his brothers and sisters had joined the Presbyterians, but Joseph +could not make up his mind what to do.</p> + +<p>But there is a way by which anyone may find out which is the true church +and therefore which to join, and every boy and girl that reads this book +should remember it. It is this: Ask God. Joseph did not know this until one +day while reading in his Testament he came to the fifth verse in the first +chapter of James, which reads as follows:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God, that giveth to all +men liberally and upbraideth not; and it shall be given him."</p></div> + +<p><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19"></a>This was just the thing. God had surely led him to read that verse. Joseph +certainly lacked wisdom, and here was a way to find out what he wanted to +know about the sects. The Lord would tell him. All he had to do was to ask. +How simple it was!</p> + +<p>On a beautiful morning in the spring of the year 1820, Joseph decided to +ask the Lord for wisdom. He went out into a grove near his father's house, +and after looking around to make sure that he was alone, he kneeled down on +the grass under the trees and began to pray. No sooner had he begun than +some awful power which he could not see took hold of him and made it nearly +impossible for him to speak. It soon became dark around the boy, and Joseph +thought the unseen power would kill him; but he struggled hard and tried to +pray to God for help.</p> + +<p>Just at that moment Joseph saw a great light coming down from above, and +then the evil power left him. The light was brighter than the sun, and as +it came down and touched the tops of the trees, Joseph wondered why it did +not burn them. Then it shone all around him, and in the light, standing in +the air above him, he saw two persons who looked like men, only they were +shining with a glory that can not be described. One of them, pointing to +the other, said to the boy:</p> + +<p>"<i>Joseph, this is my Beloved Son; hear him</i>."</p> + +<p>Joseph then asked which of all the religions was right, and great was his +surprise when he was told that none was right; that they all had gone +astray from the truth; and that he must join none of them. Joseph was told +many other things, among which was that some day the true gospel would be +made known to him. Then they left him alone in the woods.</p> + +<p>What a wonderful thing! God the Father and his Son<a name="Page_20" id="Page_20"></a> Jesus Christ had +actually come to Joseph. He had seen them and they had spoken to him. That +same Jesus of whom he had read in his Bible had come from heaven and his +Father had come with him to introduce him to the boy praying in the woods!</p> + +<p>This was the first vision and the beginning of the gospel in our day; and +by thinking carefully about this vision, we may see that it teaches us many +things. First, that God has a body like unto man's. Second, that the Father +and the Son are two persons, not one, as many in the world believe. Third, +that the many religions which man has made are not accepted by God. Fourth, +that God has not ceased to give revelations to men on the earth.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Joseph's Boyhood. 2. The Vision. 3. What may be learned from +the vision.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. When and where was Joseph Smith born? 2. To +what places did Joseph move? 3. What led Joseph to ask God for wisdom? 4. +Repeat James I:5. 5. Why can not all the sects in the world be right? 6. +Did the Father and the Son come to Joseph solely because of this prayer?<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> +7. Why did the evil one try to destroy Joseph? 8. What may we learn from +this vision?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<h3>THE ANGEL MORONI.</h3> + + +<p>When Joseph told of his vision to some of his friends he was surprised to +find that they did not believe him, but made fun of what he said. The +strangest thing to the boy was that the preachers of religion, instead of +being glad at such glorious news, told him it was from the devil, and that +God did not give any more revelations from heaven. All such things had +ceased with the apostles of old, they said. Another strange thing was that +these preachers began to tell untruths about him, and seemed to hate him +for what he told. Still Joseph would not deny his story. "I have actually +seen a vision," he said again and again. "I know it, and I know that God +knows it, and I dare not deny it."</p> + +<p>So three years went by.</p> + +<p>On the evening of September 21, 1823, after Joseph had retired to his room, +he prayed earnestly that the Lord would forgive him his sins and show him +if he was yet accepted of him. While he was yet praying a very bright light +came into the room, and immediately a person stood in the air by his +bedside. As this person was an angel—a being who had died and had been +resurrected with an immortal body—it is interesting to know how he looked.</p> + +<p>Joseph describes him as a man having on a robe whiter than anything he had +ever seen. His hands were naked, and his arms also, a little above the +wrists. His feet were also bare a little above the ankles. His head and +neck were also bare. Not only was his robe very white but his whole person +<a name="Page_22" id="Page_22"></a>shone with great glory. The room was very light, but not so bright as +close around the angel's person.</p> + +<p>The angel called Joseph by name, and said that he was a messenger sent from +God to him, and that his name was Moroni. He told Joseph that God had a +work for him to do, and because of this work, good and evil would be spoken +about his name in all nations. The angel then told him of a record written +on gold plates which were hidden in a hill not far away. This record was a +history of the peoples who had lived on this continent, of whom the Indians +were a part. With the plates was an instrument called the Urim and Thummim, +which God had prepared for the translating of the records. After a time +these things would be given to Joseph, but he must take great care of them +and show them to no one except those to whom the Lord would direct. Then +Moroni showed Joseph, by a vision, the place, where the plates were hidden.</p> + +<p>After giving much other instruction, the light in the room began to gather +in towards the person of the angel, leaving the room again in darkness, +except just around the heavenly visitor, who soon disappeared in a shining +path into heaven.</p> + +<p>Three times that same night Moroni visited Joseph and told him nearly the +same things over again. About the plates Joseph was further told that he +would be tempted to get them for the purpose of getting rich, as the plates +were of great value; but he must not yield to that spirit as they were +sacred, and he must have no other purpose in view than to do the will of +God and build up his kingdom; otherwise he would not get them. At the close +of the third visit it was morning, and then Joseph knew that he had been +talking with the angel nearly all the night.</p> + +<p>That morning Joseph went as usual with his father to <a name="Page_23" id="Page_23"></a>work in the field, +but he was so weak that he could do but little. His father, seeing this, +told him to go home.</p> + +<p>On the way, as he was climbing over a fence, Joseph fell helpless to the +ground. After that the first thing he knew was that some one was calling +him by name. Looking up he again saw the angel Moroni, who once more told +him all that he had related the night before. He then told Joseph to go +back to the field and tell his father of the vision and the commandments +which he had received.</p> + +<p>Joseph obeyed at once, and went back and told all he had seen and heard. +His father believed all he said, and told Joseph to obey the angel, as the +teachings and commandments were surely from the Lord.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Beginning of persecution. 2. Visit of the angel Moroni. 3. +What Moroni told Joseph.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What did people say of Joseph's first vision? +2. Why did people persecute a young boy like Joseph? 3. Name the date of +Moroni's visit. 4. What is an angel? (See Doc. and Cov. Sec. 129, also Key +to Theology, Chap. 12.) 5. Describe the Angel Moroni. 6. Why did the angel +repeat so often his instructions to Joseph? 7. How old was Joseph at this +time?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<h3>THE SACRED PLATES.</h3> + + +<p>About two miles south of Joseph's home, in Manchester, is a large hill, the +highest in that part of the country. To this place Joseph went on the +morning after the angel's visit, as this was the spot he had seen in his +vision. On the west <a name="Page_24" id="Page_24"></a>side of this hill, not far from the top, Joseph found +a large, rounded stone, nearly covered with earth. Prying this up, he found +it to be the lid of a stone box which was buried in the earth. Raising the +lid, he looked in, and there indeed were the sacred treasures about which +the angel had told him. As he stood looking at them in wonder, the angel +Moroni came to his side, and Joseph was taught many things about the +future. He was shown in a vision the glory of the good and the darkness of +the evil.</p> +<p><a name="cumorah" id="cumorah"></a></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 403px;"> +<img src="images/image12.jpg" width="403" height="300" alt="THE HILL CUMORAH." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE HILL CUMORAH.</span> +</div> + +<p>Joseph was about to take the plates from the box, when the angel forbade +him, telling him the time had not yet arrived, but that he should come to +the hill in one year from that date when the angel would meet him. This he +must do <a name="Page_25" id="Page_25"></a>for four years, at the end of which time, if Joseph was faithful, +the plates would be given to him to translate and publish to the world.</p> + +<p>True to the angel's instructions, Joseph went to the hill Cumorah on the +22nd day of September of each year, at which time Moroni appeared to him +and gave him many teachings about the word of God.</p> + +<p>During all this time Joseph had to labor hard on the farm, sometimes hiring +out to work for others. In October, 1825, he worked for a man by the name +of Josiah Stoal, who took Joseph to the State of Pennsylvania, and set him +with other men, digging for a silver mine which he thought he could find. +After working at it for some time, Joseph persuaded his employer to give it +up. It was from this incident that Joseph's enemies sometimes called him a +"money digger."</p> + +<p>While working for Mr. Stoal, Joseph boarded for some time with the family +of Isaac Hale. Here he met Emma Hale who became his wife, they being +married in the year 1827.</p> + +<p>The four years were now passed. On the 22nd of September, 1827, Joseph went +on his fifth visit to the sacred hill, and on that day the angel Moroni +delivered to him the plates and the Urim and Thummim. He was told to take +good care of them as evil men would try to take them from him; but if he, +Joseph, would do all he could to preserve them, the Lord would come to his +assistance when it would be needed.</p> + +<p>The records which Joseph received consisted of a great many gold plates +nearly as thick as common tin. They were about seven by eight inches in +size, and were bound together by three rings running through holes, in the +edges of the plates. This made the plates like a book, so that they might +be turned as the leaves of a book are turned. On each side <a name="Page_26" id="Page_26"></a>of every plate +were engraved beautiful letters, in a language which Joseph could not read. +The book was about six inches thick. A part of it was sealed, and Joseph +was told not to open it, as the time had not yet come for that part to be +made known to the world.</p> + +<p>The Urim and Thummim consisted of two transparent stones, clear as crystal, +set in two rims of a bow. It was used in ancient times by the seers, and +through it they received revelations of things past and future. You may +read about this instrument in the Bible, in Exodus, 28: 30; and Ezra 2: 63.</p> + +<p>As soon as it was known that Joseph had the plates, many evil-minded +persons tried to get them from him, and he had to hide them in different +places to keep them safe. Mobs began to surround his house, men tried to +catch him on the roads or in the fields, and he was even shot at a number +of times. Joseph now saw how timely the angel's warning was.</p> + +<p>Living thus in constant fear, Joseph could not do anything towards +translating the records; so he moved, with his wife, to her old home in +Pennsylvania. While on the way an officer overtook him and searched his +wagon for the plates, but could not find them. They were there, however, +safely hidden in a barrel of beans.</p> + +<p>Arriving in Harmony, where his father-in-law lived, Joseph began to +translate some of the writings on the plates. As Joseph was a slow writer +he did not make much progress, and so he asked the Lord to send someone to +help him. In answer to this request a man by the name of Martin Harris came +to him from Palmyra, New York. Now the work went better. Martin wrote while +Joseph translated.</p> + +<p>They had translated one hundred and sixteen written pages, when Martin +asked Joseph to let him take the writings <a name="Page_27" id="Page_27"></a>and show them to some of his +friends. Joseph asked the Lord about it, and the answer was that he must +not; but Martin kept on teasing Joseph till at last the Lord permitted him +to show them to certain persons. But Martin showed them to others, and the +writings were lost. The Lord was displeased at this, and told Joseph not to +translate the same over again, but to write from another part of the plates +which told about the same events. However, the Urim and Thummim was taken +from Joseph for a short time, and when he received it again, his wife Emma +wrote a little for him.</p> + +<p>Now the Lord sent another helper to Joseph. He was a young school teacher, +named Oliver Cowdery, and these two men worked hard at the translation. You +will remember that Joseph was poor, and it seemed they would have to stop +translating and find other work whereby to earn means to live. They were +now also again annoyed by evil men and mobs.</p> + +<p>In the midst of this trouble the Lord sent aid again. A man named Joseph +Knight came to them with provisions, and soon after Joseph was visited by a +young man named David Whitmer, who came to invite them to his father's +house in Fayette, Seneca county, New York. This invitation was gladly +accepted, and Joseph and Oliver went back with him.</p> + +<p>At the Whitmers' they lived and labored in peace until the work was +completed. David, John, and Peter, sons of Peter Whitmer, Sen., helped all +they could, and soon the book was ready to be printed. Martin Harris also +helped Joseph in getting out the work. The first edition of five thousand +copies was printed in Palmyra, in 1830. Since then the book has been +printed in many languages and read by many thousands of people. It is +called THE BOOK OF<a name="Page_28" id="Page_28"></a> MORMON. The next chapter will tell you why it is so +called, and a little of what it contains.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Joseph's visits to Cumorah. 2. Joseph in Pennsylvania. 3. +Description of the plates and Urim and Thummim. 4. The translation.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where is the hill Cumorah? 2. What did Joseph +find there? 3. Why did not Joseph carry away the plates the first time? 4. +How many visits did he make to Cumorah? 5. Where did Joseph go to work? 6. +Whom did he marry? 7. When did Joseph get the plates? 8. Describe the +plates. 9. What was the Urim and Thummim? 10. Who first helped Joseph to +translate? 11. Who was Oliver Cowdery? 12. What help did the Whitmers give +Joseph? 13. When was the Book of Mormon published?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<h3>THE BOOK OF MORMON.</h3> + + +<p>You will all be interested in knowing what was written on the plates which +the prophet Joseph Smith received from the angel Moroni, so in this chapter +I will tell you very briefly. Some time you will want to read the whole +book, which of course is the better way.</p> + +<p>You have read in your histories and geographies that ruins of great cities +have been found in many places in America, showing that at one time there +were people here more civilized than the Indians. The writings on these +plates told the history of these peoples.</p> + +<p>Six hundred years before Christ was born, there lived in the city of +Jerusalem a prophet by the name of Lehi. He had at that time four sons, +Laman, Lemuel, Sam, and Nephi.<a name="Page_29" id="Page_29"></a> The Lord told Lehi that because of the +wickedness of the city, it would soon be destroyed, and if he wished to be +saved he must take his family and travel into the wilderness. This Lehi +did. They went south-eastward until they got to the sea where they built a +ship in which to cross to a promised land. While camping in the wilderness +Lehi sent his sons back to Jerusalem to get some records of their +forefathers, and it was through the faithfulness of Nephi that this was +done.</p> + +<p>After many days of sailing, they at last landed on the west coast of South +America in what is now called Chili.</p> + +<p>The two older boys, Laman and Lemuel were often disobedient to their +father, and many times they brought trouble to the little company. They +also treated their younger brother, Nephi, badly because he would not agree +with them but tried to do as his father told him.</p> + +<p>When Lehi died, Nephi was chosen their leader, but soon Laman and Lemuel +became dissatisfied and again began making trouble. The Lord then told +Nephi to take all who would listen to him and leave the other brothers and +those who upheld them in their evil deeds.</p> + +<p>In this way there became two peoples in the land. Those who went with Nephi +were called Nephites, and those who remained with Laman became Lamanites. +The Nephites built houses, planted fields, and lived as civilized people, +and the Lord often revealed his will to them through prophets and holy men. +The Lamanites became lazy, lived in tents in the forests, and killed wild +animals for their food. Their skins also became dark.</p> + +<p>The greater part of the Book of Mormon is about these two peoples, their +wars with each other, etc. The Nephites ought to have remained a good +people, because the Lord blessed them so much: yet they often did wrong. +The Lord <a name="Page_30" id="Page_30"></a>would prosper them until they became rich; then they would become +proud and at last wicked. Then the Lord would allow the Lamanites to come +upon them, and there would be bloody wars. So the story goes for hundreds +of years.</p> + +<p>Both nations became very large and occupied the greater part of North and +South America.</p> + +<p>At times the Lord would raise up prophets who would preach to the wicked. +Usually these teachers were Nephites, but sometimes they were Lamanites. +Sometimes great numbers of Lamanites were converted to the Lord, and when +they once accepted the truth, they did not fall away so easily as their +Nephite brethren. At one time two thousand young men whose parents were +converted Lamanites did valiant service for their country and their +religion. There isn't room to tell you about the story here; but you may +read about it in the Book of Mormon, beginning with the 53rd chapter of +Alma.</p> + +<p>When Nephi separated from his brethren, he went north and settled in a +place they called the Land of Nephi; but after a time the Lamanites again +annoyed them so much that the Lord told Mosiah, who was their leader then +to take the more faithful part of the people and again go northward. This +they did, and found a city called Zarahemla which had been built by a +people who had also come from Jerusalem at the time that city was +destroyed. The Nephites joined with the people of Zarahemla, and for a long +time this city was the capital of the Nephite people.</p> + +<p>In time the Lamanites occupied all of South America except a small part in +the north, on which the Nephites lived. The Nephites' land also extended +far up into North America.</p> + +<p>A little over six hundred years after Lehi landed on this continent, Jesus +appeared unto some of the righteous. Before this, however, there had been a +great storm all over the <a name="Page_31" id="Page_31"></a>land, and many of the wicked had been destroyed. +Jesus had been crucified at Jerusalem, had risen from the dead, and now he +came to the Nephites with his resurrected body. He taught them the same +gospel that he had taught in Palestine and chose twelve disciples to preach +and build up his church. For nearly two hundred years the people all +belonged to the Church of Christ, and peace was over all the land. Then +they became wicked again. The Lamanites kept driving the Nephites further +north, until they reached what is now the United States. Around a hill in +the western part of the State of New York, then called Cumorah, what was +left of the Nephites gathered for the last struggle. The Lamanites met +them, and there was a great battle in which all but a very few of the +Nephites were killed. Thus ended the Nephite nation, not quite four hundred +years after Christ, and the Lamanites or Indians have lived here ever +since.</p> + +<p>During all this time the Lord had some good men keep a record of what +happened among the people. In those days they did not write on paper, so +these histories were recorded on plates of metal. These plates were handed +from one man to another, until about the time of the last great battle, a +prophet by the name of Mormon had all the records. He wrote a short account +from them called an abridgment. What he took from each man's record he +called after the writer's name, as the Book of Alma, Book of Helaman, etc., +which we might call names of chapters in Mormon's book. Mormon gave all his +writings to his son Moroni, who wrote a little more on the plates. Moroni +also made a short account of another people who had lived in America before +the Nephites. They were called the Jaredites. Their history is told in the +Book of Ether.</p> + +<p>After Moroni had seen his people destroyed he hid all the records in the +hill Cumorah.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32"></a><b>Topics.</b>—1. What history and geography prove regarding the Book of +Mormon. 2. The Lamanites. 3. The Nephites. 4. Mormon. 5. Moroni.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who was Lehi? 2. Name his sons. (Jacob and +Joseph were born after he left Jerusalem.) 3. Tell about Laman and Lemuel. +4. What kind of boy was Nephi? 5. Why did they leave Jerusalem? 6. Why did +Lehi want the records of his forefathers? 7. Who were the Lamanites? 8. +Describe them. 9. Tell about the Nephites. 10. In what land did these +people live? 11. Why were the Nephites destroyed? 12. What is the Book of +Mormon? 13. Who wrote it? 14. Who had charge of the plates? 15. Where were +they hidden? 16. Who translated them into the English language?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<h3>THE THREE WITNESSES.</h3> + + +<p>All who read this book ought to turn to one of the first pages of the Book +of Moromon and read a paragraph signed by three men whose names are Oliver +Cowdery, David Whitmer, and Martin Harris. You will notice in that +paragraph that these men bear a most solemn witness that the book is true; +that an angel of God came to them with the plates and laid them before +their eyes; and that they were translated by the gift and power of God.</p> + +<p>The three names signed to this testimony are so important that I wish to +tell you something about these men. You have learned a little about them +already, but here is a good place to tell you something more about their +lives.</p> + +<p><a name="three_witnesses" id="three_witnesses"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image17.jpg" width="300" height="400" alt="THE THREE WITNESSES." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE THREE WITNESSES.</span> +</div> + +<p>Martin Harris was a farmer who became acquainted with Joseph about the time +he received the plates. You will <a name="Page_34" id="Page_34"></a>remember that Martin visited Joseph in +Pennsylvania and did some writing for him. Martin Harris was the man who +took some of the writings copied from the plates, with their translation, +to the city of New York, and showed them to a learned man named Professor +Anthon. The professor seemed pleased with what was shown him, and gave +Martin a certificate that the writings were true characters. He also +offered to assist in translating the plates, but when Martin told him that +an angel had given Joseph the plates, and that part of the book was sealed, +he took back the certificate and tore it up, saying "I can not read a +sealed book."</p> + +<p>If you wish to read something in the Bible that will remind you of this +incident you may find it in Isaiah, 29th chapter, beginning at the 10th +verse.</p> + +<p>Oliver Cowdery became acquainted with Joseph's family, while he boarded +with them one winter when he was teaching school. Hearing of Joseph in +Pennsylvania and the work he was there doing, Oliver prayed to the Lord for +light regarding the matter. Receiving a testimony that it was true, Oliver +went to visit Joseph, and there, as we have seen, he wrote for him.</p> + +<p>David Whitmer was a friend of Oliver's, and the latter told David many +things regarding Joseph. While he was in Pennsylvania, Oliver wrote to +David telling him to come down and see them. David came, found everything +as had been told him, and took the two young men back to his father's home.</p> + +<p>While translating the plates, Joseph came to the passage where it says that +there should be three witnesses to these things. (Book of Mormon, II Nephi +11:3; also 27:12.) On learning this Oliver, David, and Martin asked Joseph +to enquire of the Lord if they might be these witnesses. Joseph did so, and +their request was granted. They, with Joseph <a name="Page_35" id="Page_35"></a>then went out into the woods +and prayed so earnestly that an angel came and showed them the sacred +treasure exactly as they have testified.</p> + +<p>For some years these three men continued to take a prominent part in the +affairs of the Church as you will see in future chapters.</p> + +<p>In April, 1838, Oliver Cowdery was cut off from the Church for a number of +things that a Latter-day Saint should not do. He became a lawyer, and went +to Michigan. For ten years he remained away from the Church; but during all +that time he never once denied his testimony that the Book of Mormon is +true. Often men tried to have him deny it, but he stood firm to that truth.</p> + +<p>At a meeting held in Kanesville, Iowa, October 21, 1848, Oliver Cowdery +spoke and bore a strong testimony to the truth of the Book of Mormon and +the work of God. Shortly after he asked to be baptized into the Church +again. He did not ask for position or honor, he wanted simply to be a +member of the Church. His wish was granted and he was baptized.</p> + +<p>While on his way to Utah, Oliver stopped at Richmond, Missouri, to visit +his friends, the Whitmers. While here he died. David Whitmer said of the +event:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"Oliver died the happiest man I ever saw. After shaking hands with +the family, and kissing his wife and daughter, he said, 'Now I lay +me down for the last time; I am going to my Savior;' and he died +immediately with a smile on his face."</p></div> + +<p>Martin Harris also left the Church. He was rejected at Kirtland, in 1837, +and remained away from the Church for over thirty years; but all this time +he testified to the truth of the Book of Mormon. In 1870, through the +labors of Elder Edward Stevenson, Martin Harris came to Utah and was <a name="Page_36" id="Page_36"></a>again +baptized into the Church of Christ. For five years he continued to tell of +the truth of the work of God in the meetings of the Saints in Utah. He died +July 10th, 1875, at Clarkston, Cache county, Utah. On the afternoon of his +death, he sat propped up in his bed with a Book of Mormon in his hand +bearing his testimony to its truth to those around him.</p> + +<p>David Whitmer, after being with the Saints until 1838, apostatized in +Missouri. He moved to Richmond, Ray county, and lived there to the day of +his death, January 25, 1888. He never rejoined the Church; but he always +bore a strong testimony that the Book of Mormon is true. On his death bed +he said to those around him:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"I want to say to you all that the Bible and the record of the +Nephites (Book of Mormon) are true, so that you can say that you +heard me bear my testimony on my death-bed. God bless you all. My +trust is in Christ forever, worlds without end. Amen."</p></div> + +<p>The world can not deny these three men's testimony. Though they left the +Church and in their darkness they opposed the prophet of the Lord, yet +never did they deny what the angel had shown them. On the same page that +the testimony of the three witnesses is recorded, you will also find the +names of eight others who testify to having seen the plates from which the +Book of Mormon was translated.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The testimony of the three witnesses. 2. Martin Harris. 3. +Oliver Cowdery. 4. David Whitmer. 5. The eight witnesses.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where is the testimony of the three witnesses +found? 2. What does that testimony say? 3. What other testimony is found in +the Book of Mormon? 4. How did the three get their testimony? 5. Tell of +Martin<a name="Page_37" id="Page_37"></a> Harris. 6. Of Oliver Cowdery. 7. Of David Whitmer. 8. Name some +things that make their testimony strong. 9. Name the eight witnesses.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<h3>THE PRIESTHOOD RESTORED.</h3> + + +<p>When Joseph and Oliver were engaged in translating the Book of Mormon they +came to a passage which told of baptism in water for the remission of sins. +This was not quite plain to them. They knew, of course, something of the +many kinds of baptism practiced by the various sects of the day, but if the +religions on the earth at that time were not accepted of the Lord as Joseph +had been told, none of the ministers would have a right to baptize; +besides, the passage in the Book of Mormon said that baptism was for the +remission of sins. The preachers did not teach it this way, though they +could read that it was taught in the same manner by the apostles in +Christ's time. (Acts 2:38.)</p> + +<p>This right or authority to do things in the name of the Lord is called +Priesthood. The apostles and prophets of old had it, but where were they to +look for this power now?</p> + +<p>So Joseph and Oliver on the 15th day of May, 1829, went into the woods to +ask the Lord about it. Their prayer was answered by an angel who told them +that his name was John, called John the Baptist, who had baptized Jesus in +the river Jordan. He said he had come to restore a portion of the holy +Priesthood, even that part which would give them power to baptize for the +remission of sins, but not to lay on hands for the gift of the Holy Ghost. +He promised them <a name="Page_38" id="Page_38"></a>that if they were faithful this other power would be +given them later.</p> + +<p>The angel then laid his hands on their heads and ordained them to the +Aaronic Priesthood. He told Joseph to baptize Oliver, after which Oliver +was to baptize Joseph. Then Joseph was to ordain Oliver and Oliver to do +the same to Joseph. All this they gladly did, and immediately they were +filled with great joy.</p> + +<p>Thus was the power to baptize for the remission of sins again given to the +earth. Think what a great event it was! None in all the world had this +power, save two unknown young men in the woods of Pennsylvania. Great +things often have small beginnings. Now there are thousands who have this +blessed power, and no doubt the elder that baptized each of you can trace +his ordination which gave him the authority to do so back to Joseph or +Oliver and from them to John the baptist.</p> + +<p>Sometime in June, 1829, the promise which John made to the young men was +fulfilled. The ancient apostles Peter, James, and John, who held the keys +of this higher power came to Joseph and Oliver and ordained them to the +Melchizedek Priesthood. This gave them the power to lay on hands for the +gift of the Holy Ghost, and also to go forth and administer in the +ordinances of the gospel.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Priesthood. 2. Visit of John the Baptist. 3. Visit of Peter, +James, and John.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What led Joseph and Oliver to ask the Lord +about baptism? 2. What is baptism for? 3. How is it performed? 4. How did +Joseph and Oliver get the authority to baptize? 5. Who was John the +Baptist? 6. What is Priesthood? 7. Name the two grades of Priesthood. 8. +Who baptized you? 9. How did he get the authority to baptize? 10. Who were +Peter, James, and John? 11. What did they do? 12. Give the date of John's +visit.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<h3>ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH.</h3> + + +<p>By this time many people came to Joseph, some out of curiosity, some to be +taught of the wonderful truths which he had received, and some, I am sorry +to say, came to do him harm. As Joseph and Oliver now had power to baptize, +a number of those who believed were baptized by them.</p> + +<p>The time had now come to organize the Church and the Lord revealed to +Joseph that it should be done on the 6th day of April, 1830. Accordingly on +that day six men who had been baptized met at the house of Peter Whitmer, +Sen., at Fayette, Seneca county, state of New York. Their names were Joseph +Smith, Oliver Cowdery, Hyrum Smith, Peter Whitmer, Jr., Samuel H. Smith, +and David Whitmer.</p> + +<p>Joseph tells us what was done at this meeting as follows:</p> + +<p>"Having opened the meeting by solemn prayer to our Heavenly Father, we +proceeded to call on our brethren to know whether they accepted us as their +teachers in the things of the kingdom of God and whether they were +satisfied that we should proceed and be organized as a Church according to +the commandments we had received. To this they all consented. I then laid +my hands upon Oliver Cowdery and ordained him an elder of the Church of +Jesus Christ; after which he ordained me also to the office of an elder of +said Church. We then took bread, blessed it, and broke it with them; also +wine, blessed it, and drank it with them. We then laid our hands on each +member of the Church present, that they might receive the gift of the Holy +Ghost and be <a name="Page_40" id="Page_40"></a>confirmed members of the Church of Christ. The Holy Ghost was +poured out upon us to a very great degree—some prophesied, whilst we all +praised the Lord and rejoiced exceedingly."</p> + +<p>Thus was the true Church of Christ again on the earth. During the hundreds +of years when the world had lain in darkness, not a man could have been +found who had the authority to confirm a member of the church; but now +there was a beginning, a very small beginning it is true, but the promise +is that it will grow and increase until it shall fill the whole earth.</p> + +<p>The first public meeting after the Church was organized was held five days +later at the same place. At this meeting Oliver Cowdery preached the first +public discourse. He explained the principles of the gospel, and quite a +number believed and were baptized.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this time Joseph went to a town called Colesville, in Broome +county, N.Y., not far from Pennsylvania to visit his friend Joseph Knight +who had aided him when he was at work on the Book of Mormon. Joseph held a +number of meetings in this place and made some friends. Among those who +attended these meetings was Newel Knight, son of Joseph Knight. This young +man had many talks with Joseph about the gospel, but still he kept putting +off doing his duty in being baptized. Because of this the evil one got +power over him and treated him so badly that the prophet was sent for. When +Joseph arrived he found his friend Newel acting strangely. His face and +body twisted in an awful manner and at last he was actually caught up from +the floor and tossed about. Many of the neighbors now came in, but they +could do nothing to help the suffering man.</p> + +<p><a name="map_1" id="map_1"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 477px;"> +<img src="images/image21.jpg" width="477" height="295" alt="Map of Fayette and Kirtland" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Map of Fayette and Kirtland</span> +</div> + + +<p>When Joseph managed to get hold of Newel's hand, he <a name="Page_42" id="Page_42"></a>became still and spoke +to Joseph, asking him to cast the devil from him.</p> + +<p>"If you know that I can, it shall be done," replied Joseph, whereupon he +commanded the evil one in the name of Jesus Christ to depart. Newel became +all right again at once, and was greatly blessed by the Spirit of God. The +people present wondered greatly at what they had seen, and many of them +afterwards joined the Church.</p> + +<p>This was the first miracle performed in the Church. Jesus had said to his +apostles in his day: "He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved. * * +* And these signs shall follow them that believe: in my name shall they +cast out devils," etc. Thus we see the same signs following the believer in +our day the same as in the days of the first apostles.</p> + +<p>On the first of June, 1830, the first conference, of the Church was held in +Fayette. There were about thirty members present besides many others who +came to hear. The Spirit of God was greatly enjoyed at this meeting. Many +prophesied, while others had beautiful visions of the heavens opened to +their eyes.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Organization of the Church. 2. First meeting, sermon and +conference. 3. First miracle.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. When and where was the Church of Jesus Christ +of Latter-day Saints organized? 2. Name the first six members. 3. What was +done at that meeting? 4. How many members are there in the Church today? 5. +How did you become a member of the Church? 6. Describe the first miracle. +7. How was the evil one cast out in former days? (See Acts 16: 16, 18.) 8. +What proof was given that Joseph and his brethren were true believers. (See +Mark 16: 16, 17.) 9. When was the first conference of the Church held?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<h3>PERSECUTION OF JOSEPH.</h3> + + +<p>By this time you will see that when the Lord set his hand to begin the +great latter-day work, the evil one was also present, trying to hinder its +progress. At the very beginning there were only Joseph and a few friends to +work against, but now the Church was fast becoming established in the land, +and if it were to be stopped some strong effort would have to be made. So +the evil one inspired men to gather in large crowds or mobs to annoy and do +harm to the members of the Church and their friends.</p> + +<p>Shortly after the conference mentioned in the last chapter, Joseph and a +number of other elders went to Colesville to hold meetings and baptize some +believers. The brethren built a dam in a creek on Saturday where they were +to baptize on Sunday, but during the night a mob tore the dam away. +However, meeting was held on Sunday, and early on Monday morning the dam +was repaired and the baptisms were attended to; but before they were +through, the mob gathered and followed the Saints to their homes, making +all kinds of threats. That evening as they were going to hold a meeting, a +constable arrested Joseph Smith on the charge of making disorder, setting +the country in an uproar by preaching the Book of Mormon, etc.</p> + +<p>The constable was a good man, and told Joseph that the mob was going to try +to take him and perhaps kill him; but he would protect Joseph. In driving +to another town where the court was to be held, the mob lay in waiting by +the road, but the constable whipped up his horse and they got away.</p> + +<p>The next day when Joseph was called to be tried, there <a name="Page_44" id="Page_44"></a>was a large crowd +and much excitement as many wished to see and hear the young prophet. The +trial commenced and many persons who knew Joseph were called to tell +something about him. Among the number was Mr. Stoal, for whom Joseph had +worked.</p> + +<p>"Did not the prisoner, Joseph Smith, have a horse of you?" was asked of Mr. +Stoal.</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," was the answer.</p> + +<p>"Did not he go to you and tell you that an angel had appeared unto him and +told him to get the horse from you?"</p> + +<p>"No; he told me no such story."</p> + +<p>"Well, how had he the horse of you?"</p> + +<p>"He bought him of me as another man would do?"</p> + +<p>"Have you had your pay?"</p> + +<p>"That is not your business."</p> + +<p>The same question was asked again.</p> + +<p>"I hold his note for the price of the horse," replied Mr. Stoal, "which I +consider as good as the pay, for I am well acquainted with Joseph Smith, +Jr., and know him to be an honest man, and if he wishes, I am ready to let +him have another horse on the same terms."</p> + +<p>Many other witnesses were called, but the above is a fair sample of the +questions and the answers received. Nothing wrong was proved against Joseph +and he was discharged.</p> + +<p>But no sooner was Joseph released than another constable appeared and +arrested him again. This officer mistreated Joseph shamefully. He would +give him nothing to eat, and he allowed a crowd of men to spit upon him and +otherwise abuse him.</p> + +<p>The next day Joseph was tried again, this time at Colesville. His friends +again gathered around to protect him while his enemies tried harder than +ever to have him convicted <a name="Page_45" id="Page_45"></a>of some crime. Many witnesses were called who +told untrue stories of Joseph, but when they were questioned they +contradicted each other so that everybody, including the court, could see +they were not telling the truth.</p> + +<p>Newel Knight was called as a witness.</p> + +<p>"Did the prisoner, Joseph Smith, Jr., cast the devil out of you?" asked the +lawyer who was against Joseph.</p> + +<p>"No, sir," was the reply.</p> + +<p>"Why, have you not had the devil cast out of you?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir."</p> + +<p>"And had not Joe Smith some hand in its being done"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir."</p> + +<p>"And did he not cast him out of you?"</p> + +<p>"No, sir; it was done by the power of God, and Joseph Smith was the +instrument in the hands of God to do it. He commanded him out of me in the +name of Jesus Christ."</p> + +<p>The lawyer could make nothing out of him or the others who were called to +tell of some supposed wrong Joseph had done. Nothing could be found against +him that would send him to prison, and I suppose the judge thought that +even casting the devil out of a man was not such a great crime. So Joseph +was once more released and a free man.</p> + +<p>But of course the mob was not satisfied, so they laid a plan to capture +Joseph and tar and feather him; but now the constable who had treated him +so badly, saw by the trial that he was innocent, and came to Joseph and +asked his forgiveness. He told the prophet of the mob's intentions and +helped Joseph to get safely away home.</p> + +<p>So the Lord was with his servants and helped them out of the hands of those +who would harm them. The Lord was also kind to the Saints and gave the +Church many revelations which you may find in the book called "Doctrine and +Covenants,"<a name="Page_46" id="Page_46"></a> which contains the revelations given to the Church through +Joseph the Prophet.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Persecution of the Saints. 2. The arrests and trials of +Joseph. 3. The Doctrine and Covenants.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What did Jesus say about persecution? (See St. +Matthew 5:10, 12.) 2. Where is Colesville? 3. What was Joseph's errand in +Colesville? 4. What did the mob do? 5. For what was Joseph arrested? 6. +Tell about his first trial. 7. Who testified at the second trial? 8. After +his discharge what did the mob intend to do to Joseph? 9. Who helped him to +escape? 10. What is the Doctrine and Covenants?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<h3>THE MISSION TO THE INDIANS.</h3> + + +<p>In the month of September, 1830, a young man came to the house of Joseph +Smith, at Fayette, and asked to see the prophet. As Joseph was absent, he +was referred to his brother Hyrum who explained to him what he wanted to +know about the Book of Mormon, the revelations of the Lord to his brother, +and the establishing of the Church. The young man was a preacher of the +sect called Campbellites, and his name was Parley P. Pratt. On his journey +from his home in Ohio to New York he had obtained a copy of the Book of +Mormon, had read it, and had been deeply impressed with its beautiful +truths. Wishing to know more about this new revelation of God, he had +sought out Joseph.</p> + +<p>Parley P. Pratt joined the Church and soon became one of its leading men, +working with Joseph and his brethren with great energy. He became one of +the Twelve Apostles, traveled in many parts of the earth preaching the +gospel, <a name="Page_47" id="Page_47"></a>wrote many fine books, and at last was killed by a wicked man in +the state of Arkansas.</p> + +<p>Some day you will want to read a full account of this great man's history +as he wrote it himself, but here I will give you but a few of these +interesting events, because they have much to do with the Church at this +point of our history.</p> + +<p>You will remember that the Book of Mormon tells about the early history of +the Indians. In this book it is predicted that some day the gospel should +be preached to them, and the record of their forefathers should also be +brought to their knowledge. At the second conference of the Church held in +Fayette, September 1st, Oliver Cowdery, Parley P. Pratt, Ziba Peterson and +Peter Whitmer, Jr., were called to go on a mission to the Indians. They +were to go into the wilderness through the western states and into the +Indian Territory, preaching by the way whenever a chance afforded.</p> + +<p>It was late in October when these four elders started on this the first +important mission of the Church. They preached to some Indians near the +city of Buffalo, presented them with the Book of Mormon, and proceeded on +their journey into the state of Ohio. In the northeastern part of this +state is the town of Kirtland where Elder Pratt had some friends. They +stopped here for some time and preached the gospel to the people. Great +interest was aroused, many believed and were baptized. Among these was +Elder Pratt's former teacher, Sidney Rigdon, who also became one of the +Church's leading men. Others who joined the Church at this time were Edward +Partridge who became the first bishop in the Church, Newel K. Whitney who +became the second, Lyman Wight who became an apostle, and many others. In a +few weeks the missionaries had raised up a large branch of the Church at +Kirtland.</p> + +<p>Having done this good work, the elders went on their <a name="Page_48" id="Page_48"></a>way westward. One +evening they were stopping at the house of one Simeon Carter not far from +Brother Pratt's old home. They were just about to read to him from the Book +of Mormon when an officer entered and arrested Elder Pratt. The elders left +their book with Mr. Carter and went with the officer to a sort of court, +where Brother Pratt was ordered to pay a large sum of money or go to +prison. The prisoner paid no attention to these demands, which made his +persecutors very angry. It was now about midnight, but the elders took it +quietly and sang a hymn or two. Then Elder Pratt said that if the witnesses +who had told false things about them and the judge who had abused and +insulted them, would repent of their evil words and acts and would all +kneel down together he would pray that God might forgive them.</p> + +<p>"My big bull-dog pray for me!" said the judge.</p> + +<p>"The devil help us!" cried another.</p> + +<p>Next morning as Elder Pratt and the man placed to guard him were walking in +the road, the elder asked the officer if he was good at a race.</p> + +<p>"No!" was the reply, "but my big dog is. I have trained him and he will +take any man down at my bidding."</p> + +<p>"Well," continued Bro. Pratt, "you have given me a chance to preach and +have given me lodging and breakfast. I thank you for your kindness, but I +must be going. Good-day, sir."</p> + +<p>With that Elder Pratt left the man and his dog, and had got quite a +distance before the officer had recovered from his surprise. Then he came +running after him, clapping his hands and shouting to his dog.</p> + +<p>"Stu—boy, stu—boy, take him Watch, lay hold of him! Down with him!" At +the same time pointing in the direction of the fleeing elder. Just as the +fierce animal was about to overtake him, Elder Pratt began clapping his +hands and <a name="Page_49" id="Page_49"></a>shouting like the officer, pointing into the woods just ahead. +The dog bounded past him and was soon lost to sight in the forest, while +the missionary got safely away.</p> + +<p>Mr. Carter read the Book of Mormon the elders had left. He believed, went +fifty miles to Kirtland, was baptized, returned home, began to preach, and +soon there was a branch of sixty members in that place.</p> + +<p>In western Ohio the missionaries found another tribe of Indians with whom +they stayed a few days. They then went to Cincinnati and from that city to +the mouth of the Ohio river by boat. It was now very cold, and the river +was so blocked with ice that the boat could go no farther. The missionaries +therefore walked the rest of the distance to St. Louis and from there +across the state of Missouri to its western boundary.</p> + +<p>The snow was deep, there were no beaten roads, the houses were few and far +between, and the wind blew fierce and cold. For days they had nothing to +eat but corn bread and frozen pork; but at last they reached the town of +Independence, in Jackson county, Missouri, which was then near to the +Indian country.</p> + +<p>The elders now took up their labors among the Indians. They were kindly +received, and the chief called a council which Oliver Cowdery addressed. +The Book of Mormon was presented to them and explained, and they became +very much interested. The sectarian preachers heard about this and +complained to the Indian agent, who ordered the elders off the Indian +lands. So after but a few days of preaching the elders had to leave. They +went back to Jackson county and preached to the white settlers, some of +whom believed the word of God and were added to the Church. Four of the +elders remained at Independence, while Bro. Pratt was sent back to Kirtland +to report their labors.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50"></a><b>Topics.</b>—1. Parley P. Pratt. 2. The first mission to the Indians. 3. At +Kirtland. 4. Journey to Independence and preaching to Indians.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who was Parley P. Pratt? 2. Name some of the +books he wrote. 3. Give a brief sketch of his life. 4. Name those who went +on the first mission for the Church. 5. What was the special object of this +mission? 6. About how far is it from Fayette to Independence, Mo.? 7. Where +is Kirtland? 8. What leading men were converted there? 9. How did Bro. +Pratt escape from the officer? 10. How did people travel in those days? 11. +Why were the missionaries forbidden to preach among the Indians?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<h3>REMOVAL TO OHIO.</h3> + + +<p>The scriptures often speak of a time in the latter days when the people of +God shall be gathered together to build up the Lord's kingdom and prepare +for his second coming. The gospel should be preached to all the world, and +those who would believe should go out from Babylon, or the wicked world, +and came together with the people of the Lord. Every elder who has been on +a mission will tell you that as soon as persons accept the gospel, a desire +comes to them to gather with the main body of the Saints. Thus the Lord +puts the spirit of gathering into the hearts of the believers, and his +purposes are fulfilled.</p> + +<p>The Lord told the prophet Joseph that the time for this gathering had come, +and that the central gathering place for the Saints on this land was +somewhere in the West, though at first the exact location was not told him.</p> + +<p>In December, 1830, the word of the Lord came to Joseph <a name="Page_51" id="Page_51"></a>that the Saints +should gather to Ohio. This was westward and in the proper direction. The +western missionaries had raised up large branches in Ohio, so it was not +like going into a new place. The Church was growing steadily, and many +revelations were given to the Saints. We might say the Lord was assigning +lessons for us, which we have not yet learned very well.</p> + +<p>Preparations were made for this removal by holding the third conference of +the Church at Fayette and setting its affairs in order.</p> + +<p>One day, about the 1st of February, 1831, a sleigh containing two men and +two women, drove through the streets of Kirtland, Ohio, and stopped at the +door of Gilbert and Whitney's store. One of the men alighted, and springing +up the steps, walked into the store where one of the owners was standing.</p> + +<p>"Newel K. Whitney, thou art the man!" exclaimed the visitor, extending his +hand as to an old friend.</p> + +<p>"You have the advantage of me," replied the storekeeper, "I could not call +you by name as you have me."</p> + +<p>"I am Joseph, the prophet," said the stranger, smiling. "You've prayed me +here; now what do you want of me?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Whitney, you will remember, had joined the Church sometime before, and +of course he was delighted to see the prophet. Joseph and his wife, Emma, +stayed at Brother Whitney's house for some time. Shortly after this, Newel +K. Whitney was called to be bishop at Kirtland, and later he became the +second presiding bishop of the Church.</p> + +<p>Early next spring, 1831, the Saints from New York began to come to Ohio, +buying land in and around the town of Kirtland.</p> + +<p>Before leaving Fayette, Joseph had been visited by a young man who had +walked two hundred miles to see him <a name="Page_52" id="Page_52"></a>and have the prophet tell him what his +duty was. This young man was Orson Pratt, brother of Parley P. Pratt. +Joseph received a revelation in which Orson was called to preach the gospel +to the world; and this duty Orson Pratt did all his life.</p> + +<p><a name="sydney_rigdon" id="sydney_rigdon"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image26.jpg" width="300" height="364" alt="SIDNEY RIGDON." title="" /> +<span class="caption">SIDNEY RIGDON.</span> +</div> + +<p>Elder Pratt became one of the Twelve Apostles. He went on a great many +missions in this country and to Europe, <a name="Page_53" id="Page_53"></a>during which time he crossed the +ocean sixteen times. He became one of the most learned men in the Church, +and wrote many books on gospel subjects. Read the title, or first page of +the Book of Mormon and the book of Doctrine and Covenants and see what they +say of Orson Pratt. Elder Pratt was one of the pioneers, he and Erastus +Snow being the first two men of that company to enter Salt Lake Valley.</p> + +<p>Another man who came to see Joseph while yet at Fayette was Sidney Rigdon, +a former Campbellite preacher whom Parley P. Pratt had baptized at +Kirtland. Elder Rigdon also became a prominent man in the Church, being +first counselor to President Joseph Smith during the life time of the +prophet. He took an active part in all the affairs of the Church up to +within a few months of the prophet's death. He was greatly disappointed +because he was not chosen to succeed Joseph as the leader of the Church, +and soon after apostatized. He died outside the Church.</p> + +<p>Thomas B. Marsh was the name of a man who came to Kirtland with the Church. +He became a leader among the Saints and was president of the first quorum +of Twelve Apostles. Elder Marsh did much missionary work and suffered with +the Saints in their persecution; but in 1838 he became dissatisfied and did +some wicked things against his brethren. He was therefore cut off from the +Church. Nineteen years after he came back and was baptized again. He came +to Utah and lived at Ogden, where he died, a poor, broken-down man.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The gathering. 2. The move to Ohio. 3. Orson Pratt. 4. Sidney +Rigdon. 5. Thomas B. Marsh.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What is meant by the gathering? 2. Quote some +scriptural passage on the gathering. 3. Where was the first gathering +place? 4. Locate Kirtland. 5. Tell about<a name="Page_54" id="Page_54"></a> Joseph's first visit to Kirtland. +6. Who was Newel K. Whitney? 7. When did most of the Saints move to +Kirtland? 8. Tell what you can about Orson Pratt? 9. Name some of his +books. 10. What high position did Sidney Rigdon hold? 11. Why did he leave +the Church? 12. Tell about Thomas B. Marsh.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<h3>THE LAND OF ZION.</h3> + + +<p>The Book of Mormon (13th chapter of Ether) tells us that this land of +America is a "choice land above all other lands;" and the Lord has said +that the people who lived here must serve him or in time be destroyed. This +you will remember was proved so often in the history of the Nephites.</p> + +<p>Strictly speaking, the whole of America is the land of Zion, but the Lord +revealed to Joseph that there should be a "center place," where a great +city should be build which should be called the city of Zion, or the New +Jerusalem. This city will be the capital or in the center of a large +district of country full of people who serve the Lord. A grand temple will +be built in the central city, and the glory of the Lord will rest upon it +by day and by night. Then shall there be peace in the earth for a thousand +years, and the Saints will be busy working to save all the people who live +or have ever lived on the earth. Jesus with his angels will no doubt visit +the earth from time to time to look after his work at this glorious period.</p> + +<p>Now all this was to have a beginning, one of these small beginnings we have +spoken about.</p> + +<p>June 7th, 1831, the Prophet Joseph received a revelation instructing him +and twenty-eight other elders to go on missions. They were to travel two +and two by different routes <a name="Page_55" id="Page_55"></a>through the Western states, preaching the +gospel and building up the Church on the way. They were to meet in the +state of Missouri about a thousand miles from Kirtland and there hold a +conference. At this time, if they were faithful, the Lord would reveal to +them the location of the central place and the spot where the temple should +sometime stand.</p> + +<p>The brethren went on their missions as they had been instructed, and Joseph +and his party arrived at Independence, Missouri, about the middle of July, +1831. Oliver Cowdery and the other brethren who had been sent on the +mission to the Indians, you will recollect, stopped at Independence. They +were very glad to meet Joseph and his companions again.</p> + +<p>Shortly after the prophet's arrival, the Lord made known the exact spot for +the city of Zion. It is where the town of Independence is located, in +Jackson County, Missouri, and the site for the temple was pointed out as +lying westward on a lot not far from the court house.</p> + +<p>Some of the Saints now moved to Jackson county, the first to arrive being +what was called the Colesville Branch of the Church. These Saints had come +from Colesville, State of New York, having stopped but a short time near +Kirtland.</p> + +<p>The first step towards the founding of Zion was taken on the 2nd day of +August, 1831. On that day twelve men, of which Joseph was one, carried and +placed the first log for the first house. This was in Kaw township, twelve +miles west of Independence, where the Colesville branch was locating. +Sidney Rigdon then dedicated the land. The next day eight of the brethren +went to the temple lot, and Joseph dedicated that sacred spot.</p> + +<p>Shortly after, Joseph with some of the other brethren went to Kirtland.</p> + +<p>The Saints were now instructed to buy land in the region <a name="Page_56" id="Page_56"></a>around that they +might possess it for an inheritance. At that time Missouri was not thickly +settled. There was much government land which could be bought for one +dollar and twenty-five cents per acre. Sidney Gilbert was appointed an +agent to receive money and purchase land, and Bishop Edward Partridge was +chosen to divide the land among the Saints. The rich were told to divide +with the poor that all might have land.</p> + +<p>The Saints were especially warned that they must keep all the commandments +which the Lord gave to them or they would not be allowed to remain and +build up Zion at that time, but they first would have to go through much +tribulation, and be "scourged from city to city." You will see presently +how this prediction was fulfilled.</p> + +<p>The first winter the Saints were not very comfortably housed, as they had +arrived too late to raise crops or build good houses. The next spring, +however, many Saints arrived, and they soon had growing fields and gardens. +The Prophet visited them again early in the spring, held meetings, and +greatly encouraged the Saints. In June, 1832, the first paper published by +the Latter-day Saints was begun at Independence. It was called <i>The Evening +and Morning Star</i>, and was the only paper in that part of the country.</p> + +<p>Thus the Saints prospered; but a time of persecution, long and fierce, was +before them.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The center place of Zion. 2. Gathering to Missouri.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where is the land of Zion? 2. What is said in +the Book of Mormon about this land? 3. Where is Jackson county? 4. What +place is now nearly the center of the United States? 5. What river flows by +Jackson county? 6. Where will the New Jerusalem be built? 7. What <a name="Page_57" id="Page_57"></a>kind of +city will it be? 8. When, where, and how was the foundation of Zion laid? +9. Where is the temple lot? 10. Who dedicated it? 11. What was the +Colesville Branch? 12. How were the Saints to obtain the land of Zion? 13. +What were the duties of Sidney Gilbert and Edward Partridge? 14. When did +Joseph visit Jackson county the second time?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<h3>PERSECUTION IN JACKSON COUNTY.</h3> + + +<p>A great many of the old settlers of Jackson county, meaning those who were +there before the Saints, were of a shiftless, ignorant class from the +Southern States. They made but little improvement in their homes, being +content to live in small, log huts, many of them without windows or board +floors. They all believed it right to have negro slaves. They were also +eager to hold public office.</p> + +<p>At that time there were also many persons in western Missouri who had fled +from the east on account of crimes which they had committed. Being near the +boundary line of the United States, these persons would need only to cross +the line into Mexico to be safe if an officer should come after them.</p> + +<p>You will readily see by this what kind of neighbors the new settlers had. +Of course the Saints could not join with these wicked people in their horse +racing, Sabbath breaking, idleness, drunkenness, and other things which the +Missourians took delight in. Most of the Saints were from the Eastern and +Northern States and did not believe in slavery. They worked hard, and as +the land produced good crops, they were soon prospering, while their idle +neighbors remained in poverty.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58"></a>All this naturally led the Missourians to hate the "Mormons," and as early +as the spring of 1832 they began to molest them by throwing stones into +their houses, etc. That same fall mobs began to come against the Saints, +burning some of their hay and shooting into their houses.</p> + +<p>In April, 1833, the mobbers held a meeting at Independence to discuss plans +whereby they could rid the county of the "Mormons." However, the meeting +broke up in a row. July 20th, they held another meeting which was more +successful. An address was read to the people wherein the Saints were +falsely accused of all manner of wrong doings. It also set forth that no +more "Mormons" must settle in Jackson county; that the "Mormons" already +there should be given a reasonable time to sell their property and then +remove; that the printing of their paper must cease; that the stores of the +Saints must close up their business as soon as possible; and that the +leading brethren should use their influence to have the Saints comply with +these requests. The meeting agreed to all this and a committee was +appointed to wait on the leaders of the Saints to see what they would do +about it. When the committee called, the brethren asked for time to +consider the matter, but fifteen minutes only were given them. Nothing +could be done in that short time, so the committee went back to the meeting +and reported.</p> + +<p>The mob then broke loose, yelling like a band of wild Indians. They went to +the house and printing office of W.W. Phelps, forced Mrs. Phelps and the +children, one of whom was sick, out of the house and threw the furniture +out in the street. They then destroyed the printing press and tore the +office down. Then they went through the town hunting for the leading +brethren. They caught Bishop Edward Partridge and Charles Allen, dragged +them to the public square, stripped most of their clothes off, and then +<a name="Page_59" id="Page_59"></a>smeared tar all over their bodies. This ended that day's work, and the +frightened women and children who had fled to the woods came back to their +homes.</p> + +<p>The third day after this a mob of five hundred men came into Independence. +They were armed with guns, knives, and whips, and they swore they would +kill or whip all who would not agree to leave. The leading brethren, seeing +that it was no longer of any use to plead or resist, made an agreement with +the mob that they with their families would leave the county by the first +of January, and that they would use their influence in trying to induce the +rest of the Saints to leave, one-half by January 1st, the rest by April +1st, 1834. They were also to use all the means they could to prevent more +of the Saints from settling in the county. The mob for their part agreed +not to persecute the Saints while this was being done.</p> + +<p>The mob, however, did not keep this promise, but daily broke into houses +and abused the inmates.</p> + +<p>The Saints now appealed to the highest officer of the state, Governor +Dunklin, for protection. He told them that the laws were able to protect +everybody in their rights, and advised the Saints to have those arrested +who threatened them, and have them tried in court for their misdeeds.</p> + +<p>This, seemingly, was very good advice, and would have worked all right +under other circumstances; but when it is remembered that the very +officers—the constable who would have to do the arresting, the judge who +would try the cases, and in fact all concerned—were men who were +themselves leaders of the mob, you will see how useless such a course would +be. However, the Saints engaged four lawyers to protect them in the courts.</p> + +<p>This made the mobbers more angry than ever, and they made preparation for +further action against the Saints.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60"></a>"We will rid Jackson county of the "Mormons"," they said, "peaceably if we +can, forcibly if we must. If they will not go without, we will whip and +kill the men; we will destroy the children, and abuse their women."</p> + +<p>The Saints now resolved to defend themselves, and the men gathered in small +bodies, armed with guns.</p> + +<p>On the night of October 31, 1833, a mob marched to the Whitmer settlement +of the Saints where they whipped several of the brethren to death, drove +the women and children into the woods, and tore the roofs from about a +dozen houses.</p> + +<p>The next night an attack was made upon the Saints living at Independence. A +party of brethren went to the aid of the Saints, and found a mob tearing +down the store of Gilbert, Whitney & Co. The mobbers fled, but the brethren +captured one of them in the act of throwing brick-bats through the window. +They brought him to a justice of the peace to have papers made out for the +mobber's arrest. The justice would not do it, so the man was released. +Three days after, this same mobber had the brethren arrested. It was no +trouble for him to get papers from the same justice. As one of the brethren +remarked at the time, "Although we could not obtain a warrant against him +for breaking open the store, he had gotten one for us for catching him at +it!"</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The character of the early Missourians. 2. Mobbers' meetings +in Independence. 3. Work of the mob.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. From what sections did most of the early +settlers of Missouri come? 2. From what section did the Saints come? 3. +What difference of opinion existed between the people of the north and the +people of the south? 4. Why did the Missourians hate the "Mormons?" 5. Why +did many outlaws come to Missouri? 6. What did the mobbers <a name="Page_61" id="Page_61"></a>want the Saints +to promise? 7. What advice did Governor Dunklin give? 8. Why did the law +not protect the Saints? 9. How was Bishop Partridge abused? 10. Tell about +the arrest of the four brethren.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<h3>EXPULSION FROM JACKSON COUNTY.</h3> + + +<p>In this small history, an account of all that happened in Missouri during +those cruel times can not be given; but enough can be told to show you what +the Saints had to endure in the early days of the Church. If you will but +think of the sufferings the boys and girls must have gone through when the +mobs tore the roofs from their houses, drove them out on the prairies to go +hungry and cold, and killed or whipped their fathers, you may then +appreciate God's blessings to you who live in peace and comfort.</p> + +<p>The persecutions, which began in earnest October 31st, 1833, continued day +after day. On November 2nd a mob attacked a settlement on Big Blue River. +They unroofed one house and were beating a brother by the name of Bennett, +who was sick in bed, when a party of brethren came to the rescue. There was +some firing of guns between them, and a mobber was wounded in the leg.</p> + +<p>On November 4th as a band of mobbers started out to make a raid on the +Saints, word was sent to the brethren, and thirty of them soon gathered to +withstand the mob. A battle ensued in which two of the mobbers were killed. +One of the brethren was so badly wounded that he died the next day. Brother +Philo Dibble was shot and severely wounded, but he was administered to and +soon got well.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62"></a>The whole country was now aroused. Word was sent broadcast that the +"Mormons" had got the Indians to help them, and that they had taken the +town of Independence.</p> + +<p>Next morning people flocked into the town and there was great excitement.</p> + +<p>And now we must name one of the most cruel and wicked men of that time, +Lilburn W. Boggs. He was lieutenant-governor, which is next to the +governor, the highest officer in the state. Boggs permitted the mob to +organize themselves into a militia and thereby become regular soldiers of +the state. The mob leaders seeing that the Saints had decided to protect +themselves and fight if necessary, raised this militia so that if the +Saints opposed them that they could be classed as law breakers.</p> + +<p>The branches of the Church west of Independence having heard that the mob +was going to kill some of the brethren in that town, raised about one +hundred men to go to their rescue. While on the way they heard that there +was no immediate danger, and that the militia had been called out. At this +they were going back to their homes; but just then the militia came up, led +by Colonel Pitcher. He demanded that the "Mormons" give up their arms, but +they would not unless the mob, or militia as it was called, would do the +same. This Colonel Pitcher agreed to have done, and then the brethren gave +up their arms, consisting of fifty-nine guns and one pistol.</p> + +<p>No sooner was this done than the most awful scene took place. The mob did +not give up a gun, but bands of them roamed over the country searching for +the Saints. Houses were torn down and burned, men were tied up and whipped, +women and children were driven out into the fields and forests. Many of the +county's leading men took part in these crimes, and even ministers, +preachers of the gospel as they <a name="Page_63" id="Page_63"></a>called themselves, were seen leading mobs +from place to place.</p> + +<p>The cold winter was now coming on, it being the month of November. At one +place a company of one hundred and ninety—all being women and children +excepting three old men—was driven thirty miles across a burnt prairie, +the ground being coated with sleet. Their trail could be easily followed by +the blood which flowed from their feet.</p> + +<p>You will see by the map that Clay county lies north of Jackson, just across +the Missouri river. As the Saints were driven from their homes, most of +them made their way to Clay county whose people received them kindly. Soon +the shores of the river were lined with men, women and children, goods, +boxes, wagons, etc; The ferrymen were kept busy taking them over the river. +At night the place had a strange appearance. Hundreds of people could be +seen in every direction; some in tents and some in the open air around the +fires. The rain descended in torrents. Husbands were asking for their wives +and wives for their husbands, parents for children and children for +parents. Some had managed to escape with a little provisions; many had lost +all their goods.</p> + +<p>There were at this time about twelve hundred Saints in Jackson county, so +it took many days for them all to get away. Some of the poorest of the +Saints who could not get away at first were driven out during the cold +storms of that winter.</p> + +<p>Early next spring when nearly all the Saints had left, the mob set fire to +the deserted homes. One of the brethren reported that two hundred and three +dwellings and one grist mill were destroyed.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Contrast between present conditions and past. 2. Mobbing +continued. 3. Saints driven from Jackson county.</p> + +<p><a name="map_2" id="map_2"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 515px;"> +<img src="images/image32.jpg" width="515" height="300" alt="Map of Missouri and Illinois" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Map of Missouri and Illinois</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65"></a><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What experiences did the Latter-day Saint boys +and girls of Jackson county pass through? (Read the story, "Grandmother's +Rocking Chair," in the Contributor, Vol. 11, page 242.) 2. What happened in +November, 1833? 3. What is the state militia? 4. Why was the Jackson county +militia raised? 5. What happened after the brethren had given up their +arms? 6. Tell about the scene on the banks of the Missouri river. 7. Where +is Clay county? 8. What happened in the spring of 1834?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<h3>ZION'S CAMP.</h3> + + +<p>In the spring of 1834 Parley P. Pratt and Lyman Wight were sent as +messengers from the Saints in Clay county to Kirtland to tell the Prophet +what had happened and to ask for further advice. Joseph, you may be sure, +was very grieved to hear about the sufferings of the Saints, and he +enquired of the Lord what should be done. In answer, a revelation was given +instructing Joseph to gather the young and middle aged men of the Church +and organize them into a company which was to march to Missouri to bring +aid to the Saints and to assist them to again get possession of their +homes. Five hundred men were to be obtained, but one hundred would do if no +more could be raised.</p> + +<p>Accordingly, Joseph and seven other brethren went two and two through the +various branches in the east asking for means and volunteers for this +mission.</p> + +<p>New Portage, a village about sixty miles south-west from Kirtland was +selected as a gathering place, and from this point on the 8th of May, 1834, +one hundred and fifty men started for Missouri. They were organized in +regular army <a name="Page_66" id="Page_66"></a>order, having officers to see that everything on the march +was done properly. Joseph was the leader.</p> + +<p>The distance from Kirtland to Missouri is one thousand miles. That long +journey was not an easy one. The wagons were heavily loaded, and as the +roads were poor there was very little riding. Often the men would have to +help drag the loads over the bad places. Every Sunday the camp rested and +held meetings. Sometimes the people, suspecting they were "Mormons" would +annoy them, so that guards had to be placed around the camp. People were +also curious to know what this strange company of men was and where it was +going. Spies followed the company for many miles. There were some boys in +camp, and the inquisitive people thought it an easy matter to find out +everything from the boys.</p> + +<p>"My boy, where are you from?" they would ask.</p> + +<p>"From the east," was the answer.</p> + +<p>"Where are you going?"</p> + +<p>"To the west."</p> + +<p>"What for?"</p> + +<p>"To see where we can get land cheapest and best."</p> + +<p>"Who leads the camp?"</p> + +<p>"Sometimes one, sometimes another."</p> + +<p>"What name?"</p> + +<p>"Captain Wallace, Major Bruce," etc.</p> + +<p>The Prophet Joseph believed in being kind to all animals, and he instructed +his brethren in Zion's camp to kill none except for food. Man must first +become peaceful, before animals will lose their fierceness. Not long after +this instruction had been given, a brother became very tired by traveling +and lay down on the ground to sleep. When he awoke, what should he see but +a rattlesnake coiled up not more than a foot away from his head. Just then +some of <a name="Page_67" id="Page_67"></a>the brethren came up and wanted to kill the snake; but the brother +said, "No, I'll protect him, for he and I have had a good nap together." He +remembered what Joseph had said.</p> + +<p>On June 7th the company having crossed the Mississippi river, camped on +Salt river in Missouri. More of the brethren had joined the company on the +way, and now it numbered two hundred and five men. From this point Parley +P. Pratt and Orson Hyde were sent to Governor Dunklin at Jefferson city, +asking him to use his power as the highest officer in the state to have the +Saints brought back to their homes in Jackson county. The governor said he +thought it right that the Saints should get back their lands, yet he was +afraid if they tried to go back or if he called out soldiers to help them +get their homes, there would be a terrible war and many people killed. So +the governor would do nothing to help them.</p> + +<p>While Zion's camp was making its way to the Saints in Clay county, a +meeting was held in Liberty where some mobbers from Jackson county tried to +arouse the people against the Saints. Nothing being done at this meeting, a +party of fifteen men started for Independence to raise an army large enough +to destroy Joseph and the camp.</p> + +<p>One of the leaders of this band was James Campbell. As he pushed his +pistols into the holsters before starting, he said with an oath: "The +eagles and turkey buzzards shall eat my flesh if I do not fix Joe Smith and +his army so that their skins will not hold shucks before two days are +passed!" As he and his companions were crossing the Missouri river their +boat sank. Seven of them were drowned and among them was Campbell. What was +left of his body was found three weeks after lodged on a pile of drift +wood. The "eagles and turkey buzzards" had eaten the flesh from his bones.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68"></a>On the 19th the camp passed through Richmond. They expected to reach Clay +county that night, but were so greatly hindered by accidents that they +camped for the night between two forks of Fishing river. A large mob had +gathered, bent on destroying the camp. A boat containing forty mobbers had +been sent over the river, when a storm arose. The rain fell in torrents, +the lightning flashed, the thunder shook the earth. Great hail stones +destroyed the corn in the fields and stripped the trees of leaves. The mob +scattered in confusion. The river rose nearly forty feet, which made it +impossible for anyone to cross. The brethren took shelter in a schoolhouse +and escaped the storm. Thus again the Lord preserved his people from their +enemies.</p> + +<p>The next day the camp moved five miles out on the prairie. While here, some +of the leading men of Ray county called on the brethren to learn what their +intentions were. Joseph told them how the Saints had been persecuted in +Jackson county; and that they had come one thousand miles with clothing and +provisions for their brethren; that they had no intentions of harming any +one, but their mission was to do good, and if possible help their brethren +to get their lands back again. At the close of their talk, the visitors +promised to do what they could to prevent the mobs from disturbing them, +which promise they kept.</p> + +<p>The next day, June 22nd, Sheriff Gillium of Clay county came into camp. He +also wanted to know what the camp was going to do. Joseph explained to him. +In order to get back their lands and live in peace, the Saints proposed to +buy the lands from those who could not live with them in Jackson county, +but nothing came of this and other offers that were made to settle the +trouble.</p> + +<p>This same day an important revelation was given through the prophet. The +brethren were told that the Lord <a name="Page_69" id="Page_69"></a>did not want them to fight, and that they +must wait for a time before Zion should be redeemed.</p> + +<p>During the march of the camp, some of the brethren had found fault and had +not listened to the counsels of the prophet. Joseph had told them that if +they did not repent, sickness would come into the camp and many would die. +This was now fulfilled. On June 22nd, that dread disease called the cholera +appeared in the camp. When you are told that during the next four or five +days sixty-eight of the brethren took the disease and thirteen died, you +may perhaps imagine what a terrible time they had.</p> + +<p>On June 23rd they marched into Clay county and camped on Rush creek, where +two days later the camp was disbanded. For two weeks Joseph labored among +the Saints and then he returned to Kirtland. Most of the others also went +back to their homes in the east about the same time.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Organizing Zion's camp. 2. March of Zion's camp. 3. The camp +on Fishing river. 4. The scourge.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What was Parley P. Pratt and Lyman Wight's +mission to Kirtland? 2. What instruction did the Lord give them? (See Doc. +and Cov., sec. 103.) 3. How was Zion's camp organized? 4. What was its +object? 5. Through what states did it march? 6. What were Joseph's +teachings about kindness to animals? 7. What was the fate of James +Campbell? 8. How were the brethren saved from their enemies on Fishing +river? 9. What did the brethren propose to the citizens of Jackson? 10. Why +did the scourge come upon the camp? 11. What revelation was given on +Fishing river? 12. Where and when was Zion's camp disbanded?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<h3>THE CHURCH AT KIRTLAND.</h3> + + +<p>During the time that the Saints were having such a hard time in Missouri, +the Church in and around Kirtland was growing in numbers and strength. +Joseph with many of the elders went on missionary trips to various parts of +the United States and Canada, and many new branches of the Church were +organized.</p> + +<p>In September, 1831, Joseph moved to the town of Hiram, about thirty miles +from Kirtland. While living here, he was busy translating the scriptures, +preaching the gospel, and holding meetings. Thirteen of the revelations +found in the Doctrine and Covenants were given at Hiram. One of these +revelations, called the Vision, tells of the three glories which are in +store for the children of God, besides many other grand teachings which +some day you will want to read. (Section 76.)</p> + +<p>But wicked men continued to tell false things about Joseph and the Church. +Many people believed these stories, and the result was that the brethren +were often annoyed and badly treated. On the night of March 25th, 1832, +Joseph and Sidney Rigdon were dragged from their homes by an angry mob into +the woods. Sidney was so misused that he was left for dead. Joseph was +beaten and stripped of his clothes, and his body was covered with tar. The +mob also tried to force poison from a bottle into his mouth, but in this +they failed. Notwithstanding this ill treatment, Joseph was able the next +day, it being Sunday, to preach to a large meeting and to baptize three new +converts.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this, Joseph made his second visit to Missouri. After his +return, he settled again at Kirtland, where <a name="Page_71" id="Page_71"></a>he continued to receive many +revelations and to do much for the building up of the Church.</p> + +<p>On December 25, 1832, Joseph received a revelation wherein it was stated +that the time would come when there would be a great war between the +Northern States and the Southern States. Even the place of its beginning +was told, namely, South Carolina.</p> + +<p>In February, 1833, a school was opened in Kirtland for the elders of the +Church. It was called the "School of the Prophets," and there the brethren +met and were instructed in the principles of the gospel.</p> + +<p>A revelation called the Word of Wisdom was given on the 27th of the same +month. You will find it in the Doctrine and Covenants, section 89, and +every one of you should read it.</p> + +<p>On March 18th a very important meeting was held in Kirtland. On that date +Joseph ordained Sidney Rigdon to be his first counselor, and Frederick G. +Williams to be his second counselor, and these three now became the First +Presidency, which is the highest authority in the Church. You have been +told something of Sidney Rigdon. Elder Williams held his position nearly +five years, when he apostatized, and Hyrum Smith was chosen in his stead. +At the death of Joseph Smith, Sen., who was patriarch of the Church, Hyrum +was chosen to fill his position and William Law was called to the office of +second counselor to Joseph. Law held this position until about two months +before the Prophet's death when he was cut off from the Church.</p> + +<p>February 17, 1834, the first high council of the Church was organized. This +body consists of twelve men who must be high priests, over which the stake +presidency presides. It is a kind of court. When members of the Church have +trouble one with another which neither they, nor the <a name="Page_72" id="Page_72"></a>teachers, nor the +bishop can settle, it is brought before the high council to be adjusted.</p> + +<p>Each stake of Zion now has a high council. Here are the names of the first +one organized: besides the First Presidency, Joseph Smith, Sen., John +Smith, Joseph Coe, John Johnson, Martin Harris, John S. Carter, Jared +Carter, Oliver Cowdery, Samuel H. Smith, Orson Hyde, Sylvester Smith and +Luke Johnson.</p> + +<p>It was shortly after this that Zion's Camp was organized and made the trip +to Missouri, of which you were told in the last chapter.</p> + +<p>After his return Joseph was again busy performing his many duties as +president of the Church.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Joseph at Hiram. 2. Prophecy on War. 3. Word of Wisdom. 4. +The first presidency. 5. The high council.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. To what two places were the Saints now +gathering? 2. Where is Hiram? 3. What did Joseph do there? 4. Tell about +the mobbing at Hiram. 5. When was the prophecy on war given? 6. How long +after was it fulfilled? 7. What led to the war between the North and the +South? 8. What was the "School of the Prophets?" 9. In the Word of Wisdom, +what does the Lord say is not good for the body? 10. What does He say is +good? 11. What promise is made to those who keep the Word of Wisdom? 12. +What is the First Presidency? 13. Who were the first to fill this position? +14. Who are the present First Presidency? 15. What is the duty of the high +council? 16. Name some members of the high council of your stake.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<h3>THE TWELVE APOSTLES—THE SEVENTIES—THE KIRTLAND TEMPLE.</h3> + +<p><a name="president_young" id="president_young"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image37.jpg" width="300" height="396" alt="PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG." title="" /> +<span class="caption">PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG.</span> +</div> + +<p>On the 14th of February, 1835, Joseph called together the brethren who had +gone with him to Missouri in Zion's<a name="Page_74" id="Page_74"></a> Camp. He spoke to the meeting and told +the brethren the Lord had not forgotten them, but had remembered their +faithfulness in answering the call of duty, and now he had a blessing for +them.</p> + +<p>Joseph then said the time had come when twelve apostles should be called. +It was the duty of the three witnesses to the Book of Mormon to select +twelve men for this high calling, and these three brethren were then +blessed for this purpose by the First Presidency. The following were then +selected to be the first quorum of Twelve Apostles in the Church: Thomas B. +Marsh, David W. Patten, Brigham Young, Heber C. Kimball, Orson Hyde, Wm. E. +McLellin, Parley P. Pratt, Luke Johnson, William Smith, Orson Pratt, John +F. Boynton and Lyman E. Johnson.</p> + +<p>It is the duty of the Twelve Apostles to build up the Church and regulate +its affairs in all the world under the direction of the First Presidency; +also to open the door of the gospel to all nations.</p> + +<p>On the 28th of February there was another meeting held, at which the first +quorum of seventy was organized. You will remember that the Savior, after +He had chosen Twelve Apostles to preach the gospel, chose also seventy to +aid the Twelve in their work. So in our day, twelve men could not do all +the work of spreading the gospel, so it was necessary to call other men. In +this body of men seventy form a quorum. The first quorum was organized from +the brethren who were members of Zion's Camp.</p> + +<p>It is the special duty of the Seventies to travel and preach the gospel +under the direction of the Twelve.</p> + +<p>As early as May, 1833, the Lord told Joseph that the Saints should build a +house to his name. July 23, the foundation was laid. The Saints in Kirtland +were not many, neither were they rich, and it was therefore a great task +for <a name="Page_75" id="Page_75"></a>them to build such a house as the temple. However, they gave donations +of what they had and worked willingly with all their might, until at last +it was finished and dedicated to the Lord on Sunday, March 27, 1836.</p> + +<p><a name="kirtland_temple" id="kirtland_temple"></a></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 386px;"> +<img src="images/image38.jpg" width="386" height="300" alt="THE KIRTLAND TEMPLE." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE KIRTLAND TEMPLE.</span> +</div> + +<p>During the meetings many glorious blessings were received. Angels were seen +by many of the Saints, Brigham Young spoke in tongues, others prophesied, +and many saw glorious visions. At the evening meeting George A. Smith arose +and prophesied, when a noise was heard like the sound of a mighty wind +which filled the temple. All the people arose at once and the Prophet +Joseph told the Saints that the temple was filled with angels, as he could +see them. The people living near the temple, seeing a bright light resting +on the building and hearing a strange sound within, came rushing up to see +what was the matter.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76"></a>Nearly every day there were meetings held in the temple. The next Sunday +after the dedication, Joseph and Oliver were praying in the sacred house +when the Lord Jesus Christ appeared unto them. He stood on the breastwork +of the pulpit, and Joseph describes Him as a most glorious personage. Jesus +told them that He had accepted the temple and promised them great blessings +if they would continue to keep his commandments.</p> + +<p>After this vision had closed, Moses, Elias, and Elijah appeared unto them +and each of them gave to Joseph and Oliver many blessings concerning the +gospel.</p> + +<p>You would think that after all these blessings from the Lord the Saints +would never turn away from the truth; but sad to say this was not the case. +During the years 1837 and 1838 many of the brethren in Kirtland began to +buy and sell land and set up stores and banks for the purpose of making +money. Now, there would have been nothing wrong in all this if they had +done all their business honestly; but the trouble was that many wanted to +get rich so fast that oftimes they would cheat each other. This of course +was inspired by the evil one, who did his best to stop the progress of the +Church. It was a very hard trial for Joseph and those of his brethren who +stood by him to see so many leading men fall away into wickedness.</p> + +<p>Again, you may also wonder how men who have been in the company of the +Prophet and who have seen angels and heavenly visions can deny the faith, +but the fact is they sometimes do. The whole secret is this:</p> + +<p>No matter how much a person has seen or how much he knows, if he sins and +does not repent, the Spirit of God will leave him, and he will be in the +dark. It then becomes an easy matter for him to fall away from the Church.</p> + +<p>During the two years named above, four of the Twelve<a name="Page_77" id="Page_77"></a> Apostles and many of +the leading men apostatized; and then, not satisfied with so doing, they +began to join the mobs who persecuted Joseph and the Saints. This led the +Church leaders to remove to Missouri, and soon after nearly all the Saints +followed them to the land of Zion.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The calling of the Twelve Apostles. 2. Calling of the +Seventy. 3. The Kirtland Temple. 4. The apostasy at Kirtland.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. From what body were the first Twelve Apostles +called? 2. Who chose the names? 3. Name the first Twelve Apostles? 4. Name +the present Twelve. 5. What is the duty of the Twelve? 6. What is the duty +of the Seventies? 7. How many Seventies' quorums are there in the Church? +8. Tell about the dedication of the Kirtland Temple. 9. Who appeared to +Joseph and Oliver in the temple? 10. What causes many to fall from the +Church? 11. What is the only safe way to remain faithful.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE MISSION TO ENGLAND.</h3> + + +<p>In the year 1837, when the evil one was trying with all his might to +overthrow the Church both at Kirtland and in Missouri, the Lord told Joseph +that the time had come for "something new" to be done. This was to send +missionaries to England and open the gospel door to that people.</p> + +<p>Elder Heber C. Kimball was chosen to take the lead of this mission, and +with him went Orson Hyde, Willard Richards, Joseph Fielding, John Goodson, +Isaac Russell, and John Snider.</p> + +<p>This was the first mission to any foreign country, and <a name="Page_78" id="Page_78"></a>in those days of +slow travel, a trip to Europe was no small matter. The brethren set out on +their journey without purse or scrip, but the Lord opened up their way, and +at last they landed in Liverpool, England, July 20, 1837.</p> + +<p>They were in a strange country, had no money, no friends.</p> + +<p><a name="Heber" id="Heber"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image39.jpg" width="300" height="407" alt="PRESIDENT HEBER C. KIMBALL" title="" /> +<span class="caption">PRESIDENT HEBER C. KIMBALL</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79"></a>"Go to Preston," said the Spirit of the Lord to them. Preston is a city +thirty miles from Liverpool, and there they went. Joseph Fielding had a +brother living in the city, who was a preacher, and on his invitation the +missionaries held their first meeting in his chapel. This was the first +Sunday after their arrival. The people listened eagerly to what the elders +said, for it seems that a great many honest souls had been waiting for just +such a message.</p> + +<p>After the third meeting, the Rev. Mr. Fielding would not let the elders use +his church, as he was afraid they would take away his congregation. From +that time he opposed the missionaries, and was soon joined in this by other +preachers.</p> + +<p>However, the people had received a taste of the gospel and they wanted +more, so meetings were held in private houses. On the eighth day after the +arrival of the elders in England, nine persons were baptized into the +Church by Elder Kimball.</p> + +<p>Thus was the door opened, and the gospel soon spread in a wonderful manner. +The elders now separated and went to different towns, preaching, baptizing, +and organizing branches of the Church. Great crowds came out to hear them, +especially in and around the city of Preston. It was a most glorious time +and full of interesting events which this little book cannot tell you +about; but here is a sample:</p> + +<p>One day Elder Kimball told some of the brethren that he thought of going to +a place called Chatburn, to hold meetings. He was told that it would do no +good, as it was a very wicked place, and the people there would have +nothing to do with preachers. Elder Kimball went, however, and large crowds +came out to hear him. While teaching the people the need of repenting of +their evil doings and being baptized <a name="Page_80" id="Page_80"></a>for the remission of their sins, +Brother Kimball felt someone pulling at his coat:</p> + +<p>"Please sir, will you baptize me?" asked one.</p> + +<p>"And me, and me!" exclaimed a dozen voices.</p> + +<p>So Elder Kimball went down into the water and baptized twenty-five persons. +As the elders were walking out of the village, the young folks of the place +ran to meet them, the older people stood in their doors to greet and bless +them, while the children ran ahead, hand in hand, singing their songs of +gladness.</p> + +<p>At a conference held in Preston, April 8, 1838, there were reports from +twenty-six branches of the Church. The total number of souls in the Church +was reported to be about two thousand; and all this was done in the short +space of eight months.</p> + +<p>The next day Elders Kimball, Hyde, and Russell left for home, leaving +Willard Richards to preside over the mission. Many were the sad partings +these brethren had with the Saints, for a great love grows up between the +Saints in the world and the elders who have brought them the gospel.</p> + +<p>January 11, 1840, Elders John Taylor and Wilford Woodruff landed in +England. Brother Woodruff was led by the Spirit to go into a part of +England called Herefordshire. Here he found a religious body of people +called United Brethren. They had withdrawn from the Church of England, and +were now praying that the Lord would send them more light. These people +heard Elder Woodruff gladly, and with joy they received the gospel. Within +one month he baptized all their preachers, forty-five in number, and one +hundred and sixty of their members. In eight months time Elder Woodruff +brought eighteen hundred souls into the Church, including all the six +hundred United Brethren, save one.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81"></a>At one time just as Elder Woodruff was about to begin a meeting, a +constable came to arrest him for preaching. The officer was asked to take a +seat, and was told that after the meeting Elder Woodruff would be at his +service. The constable was very much interested in the sermon. At the close +of the meeting seven persons asked for baptism, and the constable was one +of the number. After this, two clerks of the Church of England were sent as +spies to find out what the Mormon elders preached. Both of these men +believed and joined the Church.</p> + +<p>Now came others of the Apostles to England to roll on the work. Brigham +Young, Heber C. Kimball, Parley P. Pratt, Orson Pratt, and George A. Smith +arrived on April 6, 1840. At a conference held in Preston on the 14th, +Willard Richards was ordained an Apostle, so that now there were eight of +the Twelve together. At this meeting it was decided to print a paper to be +called <i>The Latter-day Saints' Millennial Star</i>. This paper has been +published from that day to this, it being the oldest publication in the +Church.</p> + +<p>The Church now grew rapidly. Branches were organized in Scotland, Ireland, +Wales, and in many of the large cities in England. At a conference held in +the city of Manchester, April 6, 1841, it was found that there were about +six thousand members of the Church in Great Britain. Eight hundred Saints +had emigrated to America during the year. At this conference, nine of the +Twelve were present, Orson Hyde having arrived on his way to Palestine, +where he was going to dedicate that land for the gathering of the Jews.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this conference, the apostles left England to return home, +leaving Parley P. Pratt in charge of the mission. From that time the work +has continued in Great Britain, and many honest souls have come to the +knowledge of the gospel.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82"></a><b>Topics.</b>—1. The first mission to England. 2. Wilford Woodruff's +experience. 3. Mission of the eight Apostles.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. When were the first missionaries sent to +England? 2. Who were they? 3. Where was the first sermon preached? 4. How +did the people receive the elders? 5. What happened at Chatburn? 6. What +was accomplished in eight months? 7. Who were the second missionaries to +England? 8. Who were the United Brethren? 9. Tell of President Woodruff's +work among them. 10. Who composed the third party of missionaries? 11. What +was done at the conference held April 14, 1840. 12. What is the Millennial +Star? 13. What was Orson Hyde's mission to Palestine?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<h3>FAR WEST.</h3> + + +<p>We must now leave the pleasant scenes of preaching the gospel in England, +and go back to the more troubled times among the main body of the Saints in +the State of Missouri.</p> + +<p>You will remember that when the Saints were driven from Jackson county, +they found a place to rest in Clay county just north across the river. The +people of Clay received them kindly, and the Saints stayed for about three +years in that county. During this period, they tried many times to regain +their homes by asking the governor and even the president of the United +States to enforce the laws and see that their lands and homes were given +back to them. Governor Dunklin talked very pleasantly about the rights of +the Saints, but in the end he did nothing to protect the people or help +them to gain possession of their property.</p> + +<p>At a large meeting held in Liberty, the county seat of Clay county, on the +16th of June, 1834, in order to try to settle <a name="Page_83" id="Page_83"></a>the trouble between the +Saints and the Jackson county people, the following offer was made by the +Jackson men to the Saints:</p> + +<p>The Jackson people offered to buy all the land of the "Mormons" in Jackson +county, paying them a high price for it within thirty days, or the people +of Jackson offered to sell all their lands to the "Mormons" at the same +high price to be paid for in thirty days. This offer may seem to be fair, +but when it is remembered that the Lord had revealed to them that the city +of Zion should be built in Jackson county, and had told the Saints to buy +and not sell, it will be seen that this offer was not meant in good faith. +Again, the Saints could not buy out all the mobbers' land in Jackson, much +as they would have liked so to do, as there was so much of it, and they had +no money to pay for it in thirty days. The Saints therefore could not agree +to this, but they made an offer to buy out the lands of those who could not +live in peace with them, and pay them in one year.</p> + +<p>Nothing came of these offers.</p> + +<p>And now the people of Clay county asked the Saints to remove from their +midst. The country was again getting excited about the "Mormons," and the +Clay county people were afraid that the mobs would come to disturb them; so +in order to be on good terms with the people who had been friends to them, +the Saints again left their homes and traveled north-east, away out into +the country where there were hardly any settlers. Here they began to build +a city which they called Far West, and after a time they had a county laid +off which was named Caldwell.</p> + +<p>This movement began in September, 1836, and by the next summer nearly all +the Saints had left Clay county.</p> + +<p>You will call to mind that the Prophet Joseph, with the brethren in Zion's +Camp had visited the Saints while in Clay <a name="Page_84" id="Page_84"></a>county. In the spring of 1838 +Joseph arrived at Far West from Kirtland, and from that time on the Prophet +remained with the main body of the Saints in Missouri and Illinois.</p> + +<p>The Saints now had peace again for a season. They gathered to Far West and +surrounding places from Kirtland and other eastern localities. Farms were +made, houses built, towns laid out, and it seemed as if the Saints could at +last live and enjoy their rights as Americans.</p> + +<p>Joseph was busy setting the Church in order and in receiving the word of +the Lord for the guidance of the Saints.</p> + +<p>One of the most important revelations given at this time was regarding the +law of tithing. This law says that the Saints should first put all their +surplus property into the hands of the bishop to be used for the benefit of +the Church, and then after that, they should pay one tenth of all they +made, as a tithing to the Lord; and the Lord further said that if the +Saints did not keep this law, the land whereon they dwelt should not be a +land of Zion unto them.</p> + +<p>In the year 1838 the Saints in and around Far West numbered about twelve +thousand. Thus you see they began to be a power in the land, especially +when it came to voting for officers of the state and county. At these times +the Saints would of course vote for good men, men who were their friends, +and this often made the Missourians angry.</p> + +<p>At an election in Gallatin, the county seat of Daviess county, August 6, +1838, a mob of Missourians tried to prevent the brethren from voting. A +general fight was the result, in which the "Mormons" defended themselves +with umbrellas, sticks, whips, and their stout fists.</p> + +<p>Reports came to Joseph and the people in Far West that some of the brethren +had been killed and that the mobbers would not let their bodies be buried. +At this, Joseph, with about twenty armed men, rode towards the scene of +trouble.<a name="Page_85" id="Page_85"></a> On the way he learned that the report was not true. They then +called on a justice of the peace, named Adam Black. Mr. Black promised +Joseph that he would not aid the mob, but would enforce the laws justly. +Next day Joseph and his party held a meeting with some leading men of the +county, wherein both parties promised to keep the peace, and if any person +broke the law in this respect he was to be given up to the officers of the +law and punished.</p> + +<p>Some twenty days after Mr. Black had made such good promises, he and some +others had papers made out for the arrest of Joseph Smith and Lyman Wight +for coming into Daviess co., and doing all kinds of wicked deeds. When the +constable called on Joseph at Far West, Joseph said he was willing to stand +trial, but he wanted it to be in Caldwell, instead of Daviess county, as in +the latter there existed too much excitement and ill-feeling. The officer +did not arrest the Prophet at this time, but the report spread that Joseph +had resisted the officer and would not be arrested. To prove how false this +was, Joseph with his brother Hyrum and some others, went to Daviess county +for trial. At this trial Mr. Black swore to some wicked falsehoods, and +although four witnesses told the truth of the matter, Joseph and Lyman were +bound over, that is, they were to be ready to stand trial when the regular +court should meet.</p> + +<p>False reports now flew far and wide again, and the mobs began to gather +from other counties to "help drive the Mormons from the State." Some of the +mob painted and dressed themselves up as Indians. The Saints, especially in +the smaller settlements, were attacked, until they had to flee to Far West +for protection. The Saints now thought it time to protect themselves from +the mobs, so they organized a company of state militia. Lyman Wight was an +officer in this militia and he commanded the men. He succeeded in <a name="Page_86" id="Page_86"></a>driving +the mob from Daviess county, but this of course, only made the excitement +the greater.</p> + +<p>On the evening of October 24, 1838, news reached Far West that a Methodist +preacher by the name of Bogart was leading a mob to destroy the property of +the Saints on Log Creek. That same evening a company of about seventy-five +men led by Captain David W. Patten mounted their horses and rode to the +scene of trouble. Early the next morning, just as it was getting daylight +the mob was found encamped on Crooked River. The Far West Militia +dismounted and marched on to the enemy. A battle took place. The mob took +refuge behind the river bank, while the brethren charged them sword in +hand. The enemy was soon put to flight across the river. As they were +fleeing, one of the mobbers wheeled around from behind a tree and shot +Captain Patten, who instantly fell. A number of brethren were badly +wounded, and two died the next night. One was Patterson O'Banion, and the +other Captain Patten.</p> + +<p>Brother Patten was a member of the first quorum of Twelve Apostles. He had +taken an active part in the affairs of the Church up to the time of his +death, having filled many missions and done many great works in the name of +Jesus Christ. Apostle Patten was one of the first martyrs of the Church. Of +him Joseph the Prophet said at his funeral:</p> + +<p>"There lies a man who has done just as he said he would; he has laid down +his life for his friends."</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The Saints in Clay county. 2. Removed to Caldwell county. 3. +The beginning of trouble. 4. The Crooked River battle. 5. Apostle David W. +Patten.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. From Jackson county where did the Saints go? 2. +How did they try to get their homes again? 3. What did Governor Dunklin do? +4. What offer did the Jackson <a name="Page_87" id="Page_87"></a>people make to the Saints? 5. Why did not +the Saints accept this offer? 6. What did the Saints offer to do? 7. Why +did the people of Clay county wish the Saints to leave them? 8. When and +where did the Saints then go? 9. What is the law of tithing? 10. What was +the case of the new trouble between the Saints and the Missourians? 11. +What came of Joseph's trip to Daviess county? 12. Describe the Crooked +River battle. 13. Tell about David W. Patten.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<h3>THE HAUN'S MILL MASSACRE.</h3> + + +<p>In this chapter I wish to tell you about one of the saddest events that +happened in all that sad time of persecution in Missouri.</p> + +<p>It occurred on October 30, 1838, during the time of great excitement, when +bands of armed men roamed over the country doing what damage they could to +the homes of the Saints.</p> + +<p>At a point on Shoal Creek, about sixteen miles from Fat West, a brother by +the name of Haun had built a flour mill. Besides the mill there were a +blacksmith shop and half a dozen houses. About thirty families lived here, +some of which had just arrived from the Eastern States and were yet camping +in their tents.</p> + +<p>This little body of Saints had been threatened by mobs a number of times, +but on the 28th, a treaty of peace was made in which each party agreed not +to molest the other. Before this, however, Joseph had advised the Saints at +Haun's Mill to move into Far West, which advice they had not taken.</p> + +<p>October 30th was a beautiful autumn day. The air was <a name="Page_88" id="Page_88"></a>warm, and the breeze +stirred the fields of wheat and rustled the corn. The children were playing +on the banks of the creek, and their merry laugh was echoed by the birds in +the forest close at hand. All seemed peaceful and lovely.</p> + +<p><a name="Haun" id="Haun"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 522px;"> +<img src="images/image44.jpg" width="522" height="300" alt="HAUN'S MILL." title="" /> +<span class="caption">HAUN'S MILL.</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89"></a>About four o'clock in the afternoon, a company of two hundred and forty +men dashed up to the clearing. Brother David Evans who had command of the +few brethren, ran out to meet them, swinging his hat and crying, "Peace, +peace." The leader of the mob told all who desired to save their lives and +make peace to run into the blacksmith shop. Some of the brethren did this, +but in a few seconds after, a volley was fired into the shop. The bullets +went between the logs, which were far apart, and in at the open door, +killing and wounding the brethren within. Some few shots were fired back, +but the brethren soon saw it was useless to resist, so they tried to save +themselves as best they could. Men, women and children scattered in every +direction taking refuge in the woods, while the bullets of the mobbers flew +thick and fast among them, wounding and killing.</p> + +<p>The mob kept on firing at the shop until they thought all within were +killed; then they went about the place killing all they could find alive, +and robbing the houses of everything they could carry off. They even +stripped the dead and dying of their clothes. They went into the blacksmith +shop for this purpose, and there they saw dead men lying in piles, and +wounded men groaning in pain, while pools of blood stood on the floor. A +little ten year old boy named Sardius Smith had crawled under the bellows, +trying to hide from the wicked mobbers; but one of them saw him and dragged +him out. Then putting the muzzle of his gun to the boy's head he killed him +instantly. Sardius' little brother, Alma, seven years old had a great hole +shot in his hip; but he lay still, fearing that if he moved they would +shoot him again. Another boy by the name of Charles Merrick was discovered. +He pleaded with the mobbers not to kill him: "I am an American boy," he +said "O! don't kill me!" The mobber heeded not, but blew out his brains.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90"></a>Thomas McBride, an old, gray-haired man who had fought in the +Revolutionary War under Washington, gave up his gun to a mobber, and then +pleaded for his life. The cruel mobber took the gun and shot the old man +dead, and then another mobber cut him to pieces with an old corn cutter.</p> + +<p>Thus it continued. I cannot tell you half of the horrible things which +happened. At last the mobbers departed, and night came on. Then, lowly and +fearfully, the women and children and what few men were left crept out of +their hiding places to see what had been done and to help as best they +could. Perhaps you can imagine what they saw and how they felt during that +long, dark night in the midst of dead and dying husbands, brothers and +sons.</p> + +<p>Next morning it was found that nineteen men and boys were dead, or wounded +so badly that they could not live, and about fifteen others were wounded. +What to do with the dead was the question. There were not men enough to dig +graves; besides, the mob might come back again and finish their awful work; +so the best they could do was to put the nineteen bodies into a large, dry +well that was close by. This was done, and straw and earth placed on top.</p> + +<p>Sister Smith, mother of Sardius and Alma, has told some of the experiences +which she passed through during that awful time. Her husband and one son +were killed, while another son had his hip nearly shot away. During that +first night she says that she prayed to God to know what to do for her +wounded boy, and the Lord distinctly whispered to her what kind of poultice +to put on the wound and how to treat him.</p> + +<p>"I removed the boy to a house next day," she says, "and dressed his hip, +the Lord directing me as before."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91"></a>"'Alma, my child,' I said, 'you believe that the Lord made your hip?'</p> + +<p>"'Yes, mother.'</p> + +<p>"'Well, the Lord can make something there in place of your hip, don't you +believe he can, Alma?'</p> + +<p>"'Do you think that the Lord can, mother?'</p> + +<p>"'Yes, my son,' I replied, 'He has shown it all to me in a vision.'</p> + +<p>"And then I laid him comfortably on his face and said: 'Now you lay like +that and don't move, and the Lord will make you another hip.'</p> + +<p>"So I laid Alma on his face for five weeks, until he was entirely +recovered, a flexible gristle having grown in place of the missing joint +and socket."</p> + +<p>Alma grew up to be a man and became a useful member of the Church.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The massacre at Haun's Mill. 2. Sardius and Alma Smith.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where was Haun's Mill. 2. What advice did +Joseph give the Saints who lived there? 3. What happened October 30, 1838? +4. Tell about the Smith boys and Charles Merrick. 5. Tell about Thomas +McBride. 6. How many were killed?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<h3>DRIVEN FROM MISSOURI.</h3> + + +<p>Wild reports now went over the country about the "Mormons;" and to make +these reports seem true some of the mobbers actually set fire to their own +log cabins and then accused the Saints of the act.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92"></a>In a previous chapter, mention was made of Lilburn W. Boggs. This man was +now governor of the state, and we shall see how he used his power against +the "Mormons," whom he hated so much.</p> + +<p>The reports that the "Mormons" were burning houses and driving people from +their homes, reached the governor, and he believed, or pretended to +believe, all these false stories. So he gave orders to the officers of the +state militia to organize an army of 2,000 men, march to the scene of the +trouble, and see that the people whom the "Mormons" had driven from their +homes were returned to them. Note how eager the governor was to restore +these few presumably abused people to their lands—but it was all right +that twelve hundred "Mormons" should be driven from their property!</p> + +<p>The next day after the governor had issued this order, the news of the +Crooked River battle reached him, so he changed his instructions to the +commanding officer, General Clark. This order, given October 27, 1838, is +known as Governor Boggs' exterminating order, and is one of the most +disgraceful and wicked commands known in history. Exterminate means to +destroy utterly, to root out completely, and this is what a governor of a +state said should be done to twelve thousand innocent people if they did +not leave the state.</p> + +<p>Companies of Missouri militia now came marching from various parts of the +state into Caldwell and other counties nearby. Soon Far West was surrounded +by an army. Niel Gillium was there with his band of men in Indian costume, +who whooped and yelled like true savages. On the evening of October 30th, a +party of men came fresh from the awful massacre, at Haun's Mill, eager for +more blood. Thus the town was surrounded, and as it seemed, doomed to +destruction.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93"></a>The few brethren in Far West prepared to defend themselves as best they +could. It might appear useless for a handful of men to oppose an army, but +when men are fighting for their homes, their liberty, their wives and their +children, a few can do mighty deeds.</p> + +<p>But they were not to fight. Traitors were in the camp of the Saints and +they now betrayed their brethren into the hands of the enemy. Colonel +George M. Hinkle was the commander of the Far West militia, and he went to +the mob commanders and promised to deliver up to them the Church leaders. +He also made an agreement with them that the Saints would deliver up their +arms, sign away their property to pay the expenses of the war, and then +leave the state. This was all done without the knowledge of the "Mormons" +or their leaders.</p> + +<p>On the evening of October 30th, Colonel Hinkle told Joseph Smith, Sidney +Rigdon, Parley P. Pratt, Lyman Wight, and George W. Robinson that the +officers of the mob-militia wanted to consult with them and try to arrange +matters. Next morning these brethren went with Hinkle some distance out of +Far West where they were met by General Lucas, and soon most of the mob +came up. Lucas ordered his men to surround the brethren, when Hinkle +stepped up and said:</p> + +<p>"General Lucas, these are the prisoners I agreed to deliver to you."</p> + +<p>The brethren were then marched into the camp of the mob-militia where they +were received with great shouts, curses, and yells. All that night they +were compelled to lie on the cold ground, and it rained before morning. The +next day Hyrum Smith and Amasa M. Lyman were brought as prisoners into +camp.</p> + +<p>That day General Lucas demanded the arms of the<a name="Page_94" id="Page_94"></a> "Mormons," promising them +protection, and the return of their guns after the trouble was over; but no +sooner had the mob obtained possession of the arms then they began stealing +and carrying away everything they could lay their hands on. They also +destroyed much property and abused innocent women and children. Those of +the brethren that had property were compelled to sign it away to the mob.</p> + +<p>On the evening of November 1st, General Lucas held a court in which Joseph +and his brethren were to be tried. This court was composed of seventeen +preachers and some army officers. None of the prisoners were present, and +knew nothing of what was going on. The brethren were found guilty and +sentenced to be shot next morning at eight, o'clock, on the public square +in Far West. When the sentence was passed Generals Doniphan and Graham said +it was murder, and they would have nothing to do with it. This checked +Lucas in his evil designs and so they decided to take the prisoners to +Jackson county and kill them there. Before starting, they were allowed to +go to their homes and see their families, but they were not permitted to +speak to them. Their wives and children clung to them, crying in their +despair, and were only separated by the cruel swords of the guards.</p> + +<p>Fifty-six of the leading brethren were now taken prisoners and sent to the +town of Richmond. Most of them were released shortly after.</p> + +<p>On November 6th General Clark made his famous speech to the Saints in Far +West, wherein he told them that he had come to carry out the governor's +orders to destroy them, but he would be lenient and give them a little time +to get out of the state. He advised the Saints to be like other people and +not organize themselves with bishops, presidents, etc. It was a very +foolish, conceited speech.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95"></a>About twenty-five miles north of Far West was a beautiful settlement of +the Saints. Joseph said it was the place where our father Adam had blessed +his children, and where he will come again to visit his people. So the +place was called Adam-ondi-Ahman. The people here had suffered with the +rest of the Saints, and now in the cold month of November they were driven +from their homes and took refuge for the winter in Far West.</p> + +<p>During that hard winter and time of trial when Joseph and many of his +brethren were in prison and many others had apostatized, one name comes to +the front as that of a faithful man. It is Brigham Young. He was ever true +to the Prophet, and Joseph could rely on him. With him were such noble men +as Heber C. Kimball, John Taylor, and many others. Brigham was now +president of the Twelve, and it was his duty to take the lead in looking +after the affairs of the Church during the absence of the First Presidency.</p> + +<p>In January, 1839, Brigham Young called a meeting to consider what should be +done in aiding the poor Saints to remove from Missouri. President Young +presented a resolution that the brethren should never desert the poor +Saints, but that they should help them to escape from their persecutors. A +great many brethren agreed to this, and that winter and spring the move +eastward to Illinois continued. They did not travel in large bodies, but in +small companies as they got ready. Not one family who wished to go was left +behind.</p> + +<p>The sufferings of that winter journey cannot be told you here. Many died on +the way through exposure and hardships. The mobs would not let them alone +even when they were leaving as fast as they could. Mobs often rode into Far +West, abused the people, stole horses, drove off cattle and took anything +that pleased them. The Saints traded <a name="Page_96" id="Page_96"></a>their farms for horses and wagons in +which to get away. Sometimes fine farms were nearly given away. It is told +of one brother that he sold forty acres of good land for a blind mare and a +clock.</p> + +<p>July 8, 1838, the Lord gave a revelation wherein he called the Twelve +Apostles to go on a mission to England. The Twelve were to take leave of +the Saints at the temple site in Far West, April 26, 1839. (Doc. and Cov., +Sec. 118.) This time had now come, but it seemed impossible that it could +be carried out, as most of the Saints had left Far West and the mobbers +swore that this was a revelation that should not be fulfilled. They would +kill the first Apostle that came into the place, they said.</p> + +<p>However, seven of the Twelve arrived at Far West the night before the 26th, +and early next morning they went to the temple lot, rolled a large stone to +the southeast corner of the temple grounds as a foundation, and then +proceeded to hold a meeting. Elders Wilford Woodruff and George A. Smith +were then ordained Apostles, the brethren prayed and sang and then +dismissed the meeting, bidding good-bye to the eighteen Saints present. Not +a mobber was astir that morning, and the word of the Lord was again +fulfilled.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Governor Boggs' exterminating order. 2. Betrayal of Joseph +and his brethren. 3. Adam-ondi-Ahman. 4. Departure from Far West. 5. The +meeting of the Twelve at Far West.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. How did the mob make the people believe that +the "Mormons" were burning houses, etc.? 2. What reports were brought to +Governor Boggs? 3. What was the exterminating order? 4. What kinds of +"soldiers" surrounded Far West? 5. What did Colonel Hinkle do? 6. What kind +of court did General Lucas have to try Joseph and his brethren? 7. What was +their sentence?<a name="Page_97" id="Page_97"></a> 8. Why was it not carried out? 9. What did General Clark +say in his speech? 10. Where was Adam-ondi-Ahman? 11. Why was it so called? +12. What did Brigham Young now do? 13. Tell about the meeting held at Far +West, April 26, 1839.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<h3>IN MISSOURI PRISONS.</h3> + + +<p>From Far West Joseph and his brethren who had been taken prisoners were +marched towards Jackson county. At first General Wilson who had them in +charge treated the brethren badly, but as they proceeded on their journey +he became quite friendly, and told the prisoners that he was just going to +show the people of Independence what a "set of fine fellows you are."</p> + +<p>While on the march the Lord comforted Joseph, and he spoke to the other +prisoners as follows: "Be of good cheer, brethren; the word of the Lord +came to me last night that our lives should be given us, and that whatever +we may suffer during this captivity, not one of our lives shall be taken."</p> + +<p>After they had crossed the Missouri river into Jackson county, many people +came to see these wonders, the "Mormons." One lady came up and asked the +guards which of the prisoners the "Mormons" worshiped. Joseph was pointed +out to her. She then asked the Prophet if he professed to be the Lord and +Savior. Joseph said he was only a man sent by Jesus Christ to preach the +gospel. Quite a crowd had gathered around, and Joseph went on explaining +the principles of faith, repentance, etc. Thus Joseph preached a sermon in +Jackson county in fulfillment of a prediction he had made some months +before.</p> + +<p>At Independence their treatment was not bad. The <a name="Page_98" id="Page_98"></a>people seemed curious to +see them, and the brethren spent their time in talking with people who came +to them.</p> + +<p>General Clark, who also wanted some of the "honor" of having these noted +prisoners, now ordered them to Richmond, in Ray county, where the general +had a talk with them. Shortly after this, some guards came into the jail +house and fastened the seven prisoners together by means of a chain and +pad-locks. In this way they lived in a room without chairs or beds, +sleeping on the hard, cold floor at nights. Guards with loaded guns stood +watch over them, and talked to each other of the wicked deeds they had done +at Far West and other places near by. About these horrible acts they +boasted in glee while the prisoners had to lie and hear it all.</p> + +<p>One night, says P.P. Pratt, he lay next to Joseph, listening to all this +vile talk, when suddenly Joseph arose to his feet and spoke in a voice of +thunder, or as the roaring lion, these words:</p> + +<p>"'<i>Silence! ye fiends of the infernal pit! In the name of Jesus Christ I +rebuke you, and command you to be still. I will not live another minute and +hear such language. Cease your talk, or you or I die this minute</i>'</p> + +<p>"He ceased to speak. He stood erect in terrible majesty, chained and +without a weapon; calm, unruffled, and dignified as an angel, he looked +down upon the quailing guards, whose weapons dropped to the ground, whose +knees smote together." The ruffians instantly became still, and were very +glad when a change of guard came so that they could get away.</p> + +<p>General Clark tried hard to find some law by which he could have Joseph +tried by an army court, but he failed in this and therefore he handed the +prisoners over to the civil authorities.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99"></a>Another farce of a trial was now had. About forty men, mostly apostates, +testified against the prisoners. The brethren had no witnesses, and when +the mobber Bogart was sent to Far West for some, he simply arrested them +and put them in prison. The result of the hearing was that Joseph Smith, +Hyrum Smith, Sidney Rigdon, Lyman Wight, Alexander McRae, and Caleb Baldwin +were sent to Liberty, Clay county, to jail. Parley P. Pratt and others were +to remain in Richmond jail, while some others were released.</p> + +<p>Joseph with his fellow-prisoners remained in Liberty jail from November 28, +1838, to April 6, 1839. During all this time they suffered the hardships of +prison life, together with abuses not usually imposed on common prisoners. +It is claimed by some that they were offered human flesh to eat. During +this time of trial Joseph was cheerful and told the brethren they would get +out safe. He wrote many letters of instruction to the Saints, bidding them +to be faithful to their religion. The brethren who were at liberty were not +idle. They were appealing continually to the judges and the governor for +justice for their brethren, but it was of little use. At one hearing, +Sidney Rigdon was released but he had to go back to jail for a time because +the mob threatened to kill him.</p> + +<p>Seeing that it was useless trying to be released lawfully the brethren +decided to try to escape. The evening of February 7, 1839, when the guard +should come with their supper, was fixed as the time to try; but Hyrum +wanted to be sure about the matter so he asked Joseph to enquire of the +Lord if it was wisdom for them to make the attempt. Joseph did so and was +informed that if they were all united they would be able to escape that +evening. Therefore all but Lyman Wight agreed to the plan. He wanted to +wait till the <a name="Page_100" id="Page_100"></a>next day, and as the brethren would not go without him, they +decided to wait.</p> + +<p>That evening the guard left the door wide open and gave them a good chance +to escape, but they did not try. The next evening the jailor brought a +double guard with him, and six of the brethren came to see the prisoners. +Though it was a very poor chance to escape, they meant to try. When the +guard went to close the door the prisoners followed and tried to prevent +him, but they did not succeed. All but one of the visiting brethren were +also locked in, and he had a narrow escape from the mob outside who soon +collected and made all kinds of threats against the prisoners.</p> + +<p>The visitors now thought that they also were in great danger, but Joseph +told them not to fear, as not a hair of their heads would be injured. This +promise came true, because at a trial they had next day they were all set +free and nothing was taken from them.</p> + +<p>April 6, 1839, the prisoners were ordered to Gallatin, Daviess county. +After their long confinement the brethren were weak, and it was hard to +stand the long journey. On the 9th they had another trial or hearing. The +jury consisted mainly of men who had taken part in the Haun's Mill +massacre, and most of the time during the trial they were drunk. The +presiding officer, Judge King, was also as bad as the jury. This mock trial +continued for several days. Men who sat on the jury during the day acted as +guards at night, where they boasted of their murders, thefts, etc., to the +prisoners. This trial resulted in the brethren being held for "murder, +treason, burglary, arson, larceny, theft, and stealing."</p> + +<p>The prisoners now asked for a change of venue, that is, a change of place +of trial. This was granted, and on April 15 they started for Boone county +under guard of the sheriff <a name="Page_101" id="Page_101"></a>and four men. On the night of the 16th the +sheriff told them he was going to take a drink of grog before going to bed +and they could do as they pleased. The sheriff and three of the guards went +to bed drunk, and the other guard helped the brethren saddle the horses and +get away. They traveled day and night, and after much suffering Joseph +arrived at the city of Quincy, Illinois, April 22, 1839, where he was +gladly welcomed by his family and friends.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Prisoners taken to Independence. 2. In Richmond jail. 3. In +Liberty jail. 4. The attempt to escape. 5. Their last trial and escape.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who were taken as prisoners to Independence? 2. +What prediction did Joseph make while on the way? 3. How did Joseph fulfill +his own prophecy in Jackson county? 4. Where were they taken next? 5. How +were they treated in Richmond jail? 6. Describe Joseph's rebuke. 7. Where +next were they sent? 8. How long were they in Liberty jail? 9. Why was the +attempt to escape a failure? 10. Where were they next taken? 11. Describe +their last trial. 12. How did they escape?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<h3>NAUVOO.</h3> + + +<p>From his prison in Missouri, Joseph had advised his brethren to buy land in +the state of Illinois and Iowa. Towards these states, therefore, the Saints +had fled, leaving merciless, blood-stained Missouri to the judgment of God.</p> + +<p>Twenty years afterwards when the great war broke out between the North and +the South, Missouri was one of the fiercest battle grounds, and its people +suffered terribly for <a name="Page_102" id="Page_102"></a>the misery and bloodshed they had brought upon the +Saints.</p> + +<p>The people of Illinois received the homeless Saints kindly, and sold them +land upon which to live. At a small place called Commerce, situated on the +east bank of the Mississippi river, Joseph bought land, and there he +decided to locate the headquarters of the Church. The place was beautifully +situated in a bend of the river. Here a city was laid out and called +Nauvoo, meaning beauty and rest, and Joseph invited the Saints to settle +and build up the place. It was no small task to gather the scattered Saints +into one body again, but early in the summer of 1839 a number of houses +were erected in the new city.</p> + +<p><a name="navoo_house" id="navoo_house"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 381px;"> +<img src="images/image51.jpg" width="381" height="300" alt="THE NAUVOO HOUSE." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE NAUVOO HOUSE.</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103"></a>Now came another trouble. Commerce was not a healthful place, but the +Saints were promised that that would be changed; however, it was not long +before a great many of the Saints became sick. Nearly every house was +afflicted, and Joseph himself also took the fever. On the morning of July +22nd, Joseph arose from his bed and commenced administering to the sick. He +began with those in his own house, then went to some camping in his yard. +The Prophet commanded the sick in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ to +arise from their beds and be made whole, and the sick were healed on ever +side. He then went from house to house and from tent to tent upon the bank +of the river, healing the people. Many wonderful healings were performed. +Joseph would take the sick person by the hand, or stand in the door of the +tent and command the afflicted person to arise and be made whole. The +Prophet with some of the brethren who were now with him crossed the river +to the place where Brigham Young was lying ill. President Young was soon +healed and followed with the rest. As there were many whom the Prophet +could not reach, the Twelve were sent to administer to them. Joseph gave +Wilford Woodruff a silk handkerchief which he was to use in healing some +children. President Woodruff kept the handkerchief to the day of his death.</p> + +<p>After this, there was very little sickness in Nauvoo. During the summer and +fall of 1839 the city grew rapidly. About this time seven of the Twelve +left for their mission to England, of which you have been told, and the +English Saints soon began to gather to Nauvoo.</p> + +<p>Late in October, 1839, Joseph went to the city of Washington to lay the +troubles of the Church before the authorities of the nation. Joseph made +the acquaintance of many leading men, among them John C. Calhoun, and +Henry<a name="Page_104" id="Page_104"></a> Clay. Martin Van Buren was president, and to him Joseph told of the +wrongs they had suffered from the people of Missouri. It was then that the +president made the famous remark: "Your cause is just, but I can do nothing +for you." His meaning, no doubt, was that the president of the United +States had no right to interfere with the affairs of a state; but that all +such troubles should be settled by the state itself.</p> + +<p><a name="navoo_mansion" id="navoo_mansion"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 381px;"> +<img src="images/image52.jpg" width="381" height="300" alt="THE NAUVOO MANSION." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE NAUVOO MANSION.</span> +</div> + +<p>So Joseph returned without any help. Meanwhile, Nauvoo grew into a large +city. Ten wards were laid off and organized. April 6, 1841, the corner +stone of the temple was laid. Many public buildings were erected. Good +<a name="Page_105" id="Page_105"></a>houses were built, and beautiful gardens soon bloomed around them. On the +outskirts of the city, fields of grain stretched as far as the eye could +reach. In 1842 there were 20,000 people in the city, and Nauvoo promised to +be one of the largest cities in the West.</p> + +<p>The fame of Joseph and the "Mormon" city spread, and many people came to +see the wonder. Missionaries were sent out to preach, the <i>Times and +Seasons</i> published by the Church, printed many Gospel truths and much +important history. The militia was organized and the city had a +well-drilled body of men called the Nauvoo Legion. Peace and prosperity +smiled upon them for a season, and it seemed that at last there would be a +permanent stake of Zion established.</p> + +<p>But it was not to be. The hate that burned in the hearts of evil men had +not grown less, but was only waiting for a chance to show itself. Trouble +again arose. It would not be easy to understand the many causes that led to +these troubles, but a few may be noted.</p> + +<p>The Saints now had great power at the polls, the same as in Missouri. The +"Mormons" would not vote for men who would not give them their rights, and +so many of these politicians became their enemies and stirred up the people +against the Saints by their many lies. Then, there were the jealousies of +the sectarian preachers; and perhaps worse than all, the evil work of +apostates. Then it happened that a band of thieves troubled the +neighborhood, and of course the "Mormons" were blamed. It was not a hard +matter to find excuses for a further persecution of the Latter-day Saints.</p> + +<p>And now came again Governor Boggs, of Missouri. He, it seems, had not had +enough, so he asked Governor Carlin to deliver to him Joseph and the other +brethren who had escaped from Missouri. Governor Carlin of Illinois, <a name="Page_106" id="Page_106"></a>made +out the papers for the brethren's arrest, but the officer could not find +them when he went to Nauvoo. He therefore returned without his prisoners, +and nothing more was done in the matter until nearly a year later, when +Joseph was visiting the governor at Quincy. Governor Carlin treated Joseph +kindly, but as soon as the Prophet had left, some of the officers were sent +after him. They overtook Joseph and arrested him on the old charge from +Missouri. However, they went on to Nauvoo, where the sheriff, being sick, +was taken good care of by his prisoner. As it was Joseph's right by law to +be tried in Illinois, he was permitted to have a hearing before Judge +Stephen A. Douglas, in Monmouth, Illinois. There was great excitement at +the trial, some of his enemies trying to excite a mob against him. At the +close of the hearing Joseph was set free by the judge.</p> + +<p>Dr. J.C. Bennett was the mayor of Nauvoo, and held other high positions; +but he proved to be a very wicked man. At one time, when the Legion was +having a sham fight, Bennett tried to get Joseph into a position that he +might be shot without anyone knowing who did it. This did not succeed. Then +he began to commit sin, and say that Joseph upheld him in it. Bennett was +of course cut off from the Church, after which he wrote many false things +against Joseph and the Saints and was the means of bringing much +persecution on them.</p> + +<p>In May, 1842, Ex-Governor Boggs of Missouri was shot at and wounded by some +person in Independence. Although at this time they were hundreds of miles +from Independence, Joseph Smith and O.P. Rockwell were charged with this +crime, and again papers were issued for their arrest. They were tried in +Nauvoo and acquitted. As the Missourians were trying many schemes to take +Joseph to Missouri and there kill him, he went in hiding for a time.<a name="Page_107" id="Page_107"></a> Every +effort was made to take Joseph, and rewards were offered for his capture. +Elder Rockwell was kidnapped and taken to Missouri, where he was +ill-treated, but at last escaped.</p> + +<p>Thomas Ford now became governor of Illinois and to him Joseph went. The +governor prevailed upon Joseph to stand another trial, which was held at +Springfield, Illinois. Joseph was again proved innocent and released.</p> + +<p>But the fiends from Missouri would not give up. Once again he was taken +while away from Nauvoo, by two officers, who abused him shamefully. I +cannot tell you all about his exciting adventures—that you must read in a +larger history—but at last he arrived safe again in Nauvoo.</p> + +<p>Persecution continued. Mobs now gathered around Nauvoo. Threats were made +that mobs would come from Missouri, and join with those of Illinois, +against the "Mormons." There was great unrest. When Joseph was spoken to +about the danger he was in, he said he was not exposed to as much danger +from outside enemies as from traitors within. "<i>We have a Judas in our +midst</i>," he said.</p> + +<p>Thus ended the year 1843.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Settlement at Nauvoo. 2. The healing of the sick. 3. City of +Nauvoo. 4. Attempts to take Joseph to Missouri.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Locate Nauvoo. 2. What was its name before it +was called Nauvoo? 3. Relate how Joseph healed the sick. 4. When did Joseph +go to Washington? 5. What was his mission there? 6. What answer did +President Martin Van Buren make? 7. Why was it useless to expect justice +from Missouri? 8. What kind of city did Nauvoo become? 9. What was the +Times and Seasons? 10. What was the Nauvoo Legion? 11. Name some of the +causes that led to the new persecution. 12. Who was Dr. Bennett, and what +did he do? 13. Tell of the efforts to get Joseph to Missouri.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<h3>THE MARTYRDOM.</h3> + + +<p>On January 29, 1844, Joseph Smith was nominated for President of the United +States. Neither he nor his friends had much hopes of his election, but it +gave the citizens of Nauvoo at least a chance to vote for an honest man who +was their friend. Brethren were sent to various parts of the country to +make speeches in his favor, and Joseph published his views on how the +government should be conducted. One of his ideas was that the government +should set the negro slaves free, paying their masters for them. President +Abraham Lincoln, twenty years later, also favored this plan.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile, Nauvoo prospered and the Church grew. When the weather would +permit, meetings were held in a grove near the temple, there being no room +large enough to hold the large crowds of people. Joseph continued to give +many glorious truths to the Church about the nature of God, the land of +Zion, baptism for the dead, and many other things.</p> + +<p>The Prophet's prediction that there was a Judas in their midst soon proved +too true; and there were more than one. William Law, Joseph's second +counselor, William Marks, president of the Nauvoo Stake, with many other +leading men proved themselves false to Joseph and the Church. They even +planned with Joseph's enemies to have him killed. They were also proved +guilty of other sins and were therefore cut off from the Church. After +this, these men said Joseph was a fallen prophet, and so they organized a +church of their own. It did not amount to anything, however.</p> + +<p>Joseph's periods of peace were not many. Apostates were his worst enemies, +and they were all the time annoying <a name="Page_109" id="Page_109"></a>him by having him arrested on all +manner of false charges. These men were very bitter, and they howled around +him like a pack of wolves, eager to devour him; but Joseph trusted in the +Saints and they in him, for those who were faithful to their duties knew by +the Spirit of God that Joseph was not a fallen prophet.</p> + +<p>In June, 1844, the enemies of the Saints began to publish a paper in +Nauvoo, called the <i>Expositor</i>. Its purpose was to deprive the people of +Nauvoo of their rights, so it boldly said. One paper was printed, and that +was so full of false statements and abuse against the city officials that +the city council declared it a nuisance and had the press, type, etc., +destroyed.</p> + +<p>This raised great excitement among the enemies of the Church. Joseph and +seventeen others were arrested, tried before a court in Nauvoo, and +acquitted; but this did not satisfy the mobbers. On the advice of the +United States judge for that district, Joseph and his brethren allowed +themselves to be arrested again and have a trial before Justice Daniel H. +Wells, then not a "Mormon." They were again discharged as innocent of +crime.</p> + +<p>Now mobs began to threaten again, but the Nauvoo Legion was ready to defend +the city. As the Legion was drawn up in front of Joseph's house one day—it +was the 18th of June—he got upon a platform and spoke to the soldiers. +That speech was long remembered by those who heard it. It thrilled them +through and through and at the word they would gladly have marched and met +the mob in battle; but that was not Joseph's way. He was always willing to +have the laws carried out even if he suffered thereby, so that his enemies +could have no just excuse. That was the Prophet Joseph Smith's last public +speech.</p> + +<p>During the excitement Governor Ford arrived at Carthage, <a name="Page_110" id="Page_110"></a>a town about +eighteen miles from Nauvoo, and the county seat of Hancock county. The +governor sent word to Nauvoo that he wanted some explanation of the +trouble, so Joseph sent some of the brethren to him. The governor treated +his callers rudely. Carthage was full of mobs, and the governor seemed to +believe all they told him about the "Mormons." He organized the mobs into +troops. Joseph asked the governor to come to Nauvoo and investigate the +whole matter; but no: Joseph must go to Carthage. The governor said he +would protect him if he would go.</p> + +<p>It was on the evening of June 22nd. Joseph and Hyrum had called some +brethren together: "All they want is Hyrum and myself," said the Prophet. +Joseph and Hyrum both seemed certain that if their enemies got them in +their power again they would be killed. Joseph then proposed that he and +Hyrum should escape to the Rocky Mountains. Preparations for this trip were +made and they were rowed over the river to Iowa, when Joseph's wife sent +some of the brethren to plead with him to return. Some brethren also found +fault with him in running away to "leave the flock to the wolves."</p> + +<p>Joseph replied, "If my life is of no value to my friends, it is of none to +myself." So they went back, Joseph saying, "We shall be butchered."</p> + +<p>On the morning of June 24th Joseph and eighteen brethren set out for +Carthage to be tried again on the old charge. As he rode out the Prophet +made many expressions of goodby to his friends. Four miles from Carthage +they met a company of militia going to Nauvoo with an order from the +governor that the Nauvoo Legion give up its arms. Joseph rode back with +them to see that this was done. Twice he bade his family farewell. His face +was pale, and he was suffering.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111"></a>"I am going like a lamb to the slaughter," he said, "but I am calm as a +summer morning."</p> + +<p>At Carthage they were received with oaths and threats by the troops. +Apostates and soldiers swore that the brethren would never leave Carthage +alive.</p> + +<p>The next day the governor paraded the prisoners before the troops, who +insulted them as they passed along. Then they were placed in the jail +awaiting their trial.</p> + +<p><a name="jail" id="jail"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 443px;"> +<img src="images/image56.jpg" width="443" height="300" alt="CARTHAGE JAIL." title="" /> +<span class="caption">CARTHAGE JAIL.</span> +</div> + +<p>The day following, the prisoners were marched to the court house, guarded +by the troops; but the trial was postponed until the next day, and the +brethren were taken back to jail.</p> + +<p>This was the 26th of June. That night Joseph was lying on the floor with +some of the brethren. Brother Dan Jones was on one side and Brother John S. +Fullmer on the other.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112"></a>"Lay your head on my arm for a pillow, Brother John," said Joseph, and +then he talked with him in a low tone. Joseph expressed a desire to see his +family again and preach to the Saints once more.</p> + +<p>To Brother Jones he whispered, "Are you afraid to die?" When Brother Jones +said he was not, Joseph replied, "You will yet see Wales, and fulfill the +mission appointed you, before you die." (Dan Jones did a wonderful +missionary work in Wales.)</p> + +<p>The next morning the guards frequently told some of the brethren that if +they did not wish to be killed they had better get away from Joseph. This +was told to Governor Ford, but he paid no attention to it.</p> + +<p>At 10:30 that morning, June 27, the governor with the most friendly of the +troops left for Nauvoo, and the brethren were left to their fate.</p> + +<p>In an upper room of Carthage jail, Joseph, Hyrum, John Taylor, and Willard +Richards were spending their time in writing letters, singing, talking, and +praying. In the afternoon Joseph asked Elder Taylor to sing the hymn, +commencing:</p> + +<p>"A poor wayfaring man of grief."</p> + +<p>And when it was done he asked him to sing it again. Brother Taylor said he +could hardly sing it, he felt so sad, but he sang the hymn again.</p> + +<p>About 5 o'clock in the afternoon a mob of about two hundred men surrounded +the jail. They had blackened their faces with powder and mud. Then the +firing began. The mob rushed up the stairs, shooting into the room where +the four brethren were. The prisoners sprang to the door to close it but +the guns of the mob forced it open. Elders Taylor and Richards tried to +push the guns aside with their <a name="Page_113" id="Page_113"></a>canes. The bullets flew like hail into the +room. One ball came through the door and struck Hyrum in the head. Four +others hit him, and he fell back saying:</p> + +<p>"<i>I am a dead man</i>."</p> + +<p>Joseph gazed on his brother and exclaimed: "Oh! dear brother Hyrum!"</p> + +<p>Elder Taylor now tried to jump from the window. A ball struck him, and he +was about to fall from the window, when another bullet from the outside hit +his watch in his vest pocket and threw him back into the room. Here he was +hit by two more balls, and he rolled under the bed.</p> + +<p>Then Joseph went to the open window intending to leap out. Two bullets +struck him and he fell outward, exclaiming:</p> + +<p>"<i>O Lord, my God</i>!"</p> + +<p>As soon as he had struck the ground a mobber set him against a well curb a +few feet from the jail, and then, by order of Col. Levi Williams, a mobber +and Baptist preacher, four men sent bullets into his body.</p> + +<p>Then the mob fled, and the whole town of Carthage with them, fearing the +vengeance of the people of Nauvoo. But vengeance is the Lord's.</p> + +<p>Willard Richards was not hurt. That night he spent in attending to his +wounded brother, John Taylor, and watching over the dead bodies of the +Prophet and Patriarch.</p> + +<p>Joseph's earthly work was done, and the Master had called him away from the +haunts of mobs and wicked men. He sealed his testimony with his blood. He +had spent his life in working for the salvation of his fellowman, and even +yet in a freer and grander sphere he is working for the cause of Christ and +the Church.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Joseph nominated for president. 2. Traitors.<a name="Page_114" id="Page_114"></a> 3. The +Expositor. 4. Joseph goes to Carthage. 5. The martyrdom.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. When was Joseph nominated for President of the +United States? 2. What were his ideas of slavery? 3. Where were the large +meetings in Nauvoo held? 4. Who proved false to Joseph? 5. How did the +Saints know that Joseph was not a fallen prophet? 6. What was the Nauvoo +Expositor? 7. Why was it destroyed? 8. Why did Joseph object to being tried +in Carthage? 9. On what occasion did Joseph deliver his last speech? 10. +Why did not Joseph go west to the mountains? 11. What did Governor Ford +promise? 12. Give some expressions of the prophet on going to Carthage. 13. +Who were with Joseph in jail? 14. Tell about the martyrdom. 15. When did it +take place? 16. How old was Joseph when he was killed?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXV" id="CHAPTER_XXV"></a>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<h3>EXPULSION FROM ILLINOIS.</h3> + + +<p>When the bodies of the martyred Prophet and Patriarch were brought from +Carthage, they were met by thousands of the Saints from Nauvoo who wept +aloud for the loss of their beloved leaders. The scene was a very sad one. +Elder Willard Richards spoke to the people and advised them to remain +peaceable as they had always been, and let the Lord avenge the murder of +their loved ones.</p> + +<p>The bodies of Joseph and Hyrum were buried privately at Nauvoo so that +their enemies might not disturb them.</p> + +<p>And now the Saints were a little confused about who should be their +leaders. Joseph, the President of the Church, and Hyrum, one of his +counselors, were dead, and<a name="Page_115" id="Page_115"></a> Sidney Rigdon, the other counselors, had some +months before got tired of affairs at Nauvoo and had gone to Pittsburg, +Pennsylvania. He was an apostate at heart, though he had not yet been cut +off from the Church. Most of the Twelve Apostles were away on missions, and +word was sent for them to return as soon as possible.</p> + +<p>Though at first there was some misunderstanding among the Saints, the Lord +did not intend his Church should go to pieces because its leader had been +taken away. The Church had been set up never to be thrown down or left to +other people. The Gospel had been given to the earth "for the last time and +for the fullness of times." The Saints had a promise that the kingdom was +theirs "and the enemy shall not overcome." It would be a poor church, +indeed, that would go to pieces every time its chief officer died. No; the +Lord, through Joseph, had organized the Church so well that this could not +be. There was a quorum in the Church that had been given all the power +necessary to carry on the work of the Church in case the First Presidency +was taken away. That quorum was the Twelve Apostles. Now that there was no +First Presidency, it was the duty of the Twelve to preside and regulate the +affairs of the Church until such time that there should be another +president appointed. Brigham Young was the president of the Twelve, so in +reality he was the leading man in the Church.</p> + +<p>But now came Sidney Rigdon from Pittsburg. He wanted to be appointed the +leader of the Church, or as he called it, a "guardian." He, with some +others, tried to have a meeting of the Saints before the Twelve could get +home. This meeting was appointed for the 8th of August, 1844. On the 6th of +August President Young and five of the Apostles arrived at Nauvoo.</p> + +<p>The meeting was held at the grove, and Sidney Rigdon <a name="Page_116" id="Page_116"></a>and some of the +Twelve spoke. When Brigham Young arose to address the meeting, it seemed to +the Saints that both in appearance and speech he was like the Prophet +Joseph. This certainly was a sign to them. At this meeting Sidney Rigdon +was rejected and the Twelve Apostles were upheld as the quorum to lead the +Church.</p> + +<p>Sidney Rigdon did not like this. He got a few followers and tried to +organize another church. A number of others did the same, but all these +movements did not amount to much. The Saints kept on under the direction of +the Twelve, building the temple and other public edifices in Nauvoo.</p> + +<p>The enemies of the Church were disappointed. They had thought that if they +could get Joseph out of the way that would be the end of "Mormonism." Of +course they did not understand that "Mormonism" is the Lord's work and does +not depend for its success on one or two men. He can raise up any number of +men to carry on his work, and now Brigham Young and his brethren were the +men who could and would carry it on.</p> + +<p>In May, 1845, some of the murderers of Joseph and Hyrum were tried, and by +a jury pronounced innocent. This gave the mobbers more courage, and they +gathered again. In the small settlements outside of Nauvoo many houses were +burned and the inmates driven into the fields. These Saints were advised to +move into Nauvoo for protection.</p> + +<p>Some time before his death, Joseph had predicted that the Saints would yet +move to the Rocky Mountains; and he had even begun the movement by holding +councils and asking for volunteers from the brethren to go ahead and locate +a place to which the Church might gather. President Young and the Twelve +now began preparing to carry this plan out. They could plainly see that it +was useless to try <a name="Page_117" id="Page_117"></a>to live in peace in Illinois. The mobs grew larger and +fiercer. The people living in the counties surrounding Hancock county, +threatened to drive the "Mormons" from the state; and the officers whose +duty it was to enforce the laws would not do so if it was to protect the +"Mormons."</p> + +<p>So in August, 1845, it was decided to select three thousand men who, with +their families, were to go to Upper California. All this western country +was then called Upper California. The authorities of the Church promised +the mob leaders that if they would not molest them they would all leave the +state early the next spring.</p> + +<p>But the mobbing did not cease at this; so the sheriff of the county, a Mr. +Backenstos, organized a posse, that is, a company of men to help him +enforce the laws and keep order. The sheriff kept after the mob to prevent +them from burning houses, etc., and this made the mobbers very angry. One +day some of them tried to kill the sheriff, but he was saved by two +"Mormons" coming to his rescue. Thus during the summer and fall of 1845 +there was much trouble between the mobs, the "Mormons," and the militia.</p> + +<p>All this time the Saints had worked hard to finish the temple. It had been +decided to do this even if they had to work with the "trowel in one hand +and a sword in the other." October 5th the temple was near enough finished +that a conference was held in the building. No general conference had been +held for three years, as Joseph had said none should be convened until it +could be held in the temple.</p> + +<p>After this the work on the building still went on, and in a short time it +was so far completed that it was dedicated, and a great many of the Saints +received their endowments within its sacred walls.</p> + +<p>All that winter, (1845-46) Nauvoo was like a big workshop. Everybody that +could was preparing for the <a name="Page_118" id="Page_118"></a>great move westward. Farms and houses were +offered for sale. Wagons were built, and as iron was scarce, many of them +had wooden tires. Horses and cattle were gathered. It was to be the sixth +move of the Saints from their homes, and it was no small undertaking now as +there were many thousands of people, and they were to go to a wild, unknown +land among the deserts and mountains of the West.</p> + +<p>The move began on February 4, 1846, and from that date on there was a +continuous stream of wagons crossing the Mississippi river to the Iowa +side. A camp was made on Sugar creek, nine miles from Nauvoo, where the +Saints gathered. Towards the last of the month the weather became very +cold, the river froze over so that teams could be driven across on the ice. +It was a bad time of the year to begin such a move. Many of the Saints were +poorly clad, some had no tents or wagon covers, and in the snow and cold +there was much suffering; but on the Saints went, looking with sad hearts +on their deserted homes; but rather would they face the winter storms and +cold than to live in constant dread of cruel mobs.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Presiding authority in the Church. 2. The Twelve sustained. +3. Action of Sidney Rigdon. 4. Mobbings. 5. The removal.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where were Joseph and Hyrum buried? 2. What +were the feelings of the Saints? 3. Why were the Saints troubled about a +leader? 4. Where were most of the Twelve at the time of the martyrdom? 5. +When the First Presidency is taken away, what is the next presiding +authority in the Church? 6. What did Sidney Rigdon want? 7. What testimony +was given the Saints at the meeting on August 8th? 8. What became of Sidney +Rigdon? 9. What did the enemies of the Church expect to do by killing +Joseph Smith? 10. Who first planned the move to the mountains? 11. Tell +about the work of <a name="Page_119" id="Page_119"></a>the mobs. 12. Why did the Saints work so hard to finish +the temple, knowing they would have to leave it? 13. When did the move +westward begin?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<h3>THE BATTLE OF NAUVOO.</h3> + + +<p>Leaving the main body of the Saints traveling westward, in this chapter I +wish to tell you about what happened to those who remained in Nauvoo; and +by the way, this is the last chapter of this little history in which mobs +will play an important part.</p> + +<p>In the summer of 1846 there were about six hundred Saints in Nauvoo, most +of whom had been unable to get away. Many were poor, some were sick, and +there were many old people and children. Many non-"Mormons" had bought +property from the Saints who had left, and had moved into the city. The mob +called these friendly citizens "Jack Mormons."</p> + +<p>Naturally, one would think that these few Saints would be left to get ready +to move in peace; but not so. If there is any doubt of the brutal character +of the mob, what they now did will remove that doubt forever.</p> + +<p>On July 11, eight brethren were engaged in cutting grain in a field twelve +miles from Nauvoo. A mob surrounded them, and then taking them one by one, +whipped them severely. Two of these mobbers were afterwards arrested, and +to get even for this, the mob carried away five other brethren who were +abused by the mobbers for twelve days before they were released.</p> + +<p>The next move of the mob was to get writs of arrest for many persons in +Nauvoo. A John Carlin was unlawfully <a name="Page_120" id="Page_120"></a>appointed a constable to serve these +writs, that is, make the arrests, and he raised a large body of men to help +him; but behind all this, the real object was to drive the remaining +"Mormons" from the city.</p> + +<p>Governor Ford was now notified of the actions of these mobbers, and he sent +Major Parker to Nauvoo, who was to raise volunteers and defend the city. +Four companies of troops were organized by the governor's order; but +instead of treating the invaders as they truly were, a mob, Major Parker +made a treaty with their leader in which it was agreed that the "Mormons" +would leave the state within sixty days. The mob leader thought this fair +enough, but the mobbers did not. At this, their leader resigned and a man +by the name of Brockman took command of the crowd. He gave the order to +march towards Nauvoo, which they gladly did.</p> + +<p>On the morning of September 10th, 1846, the watchman in the tower of the +temple gave notice that the enemy were coming 1,000 or 1,500 strong. They +had cannon, plenty of ammunition, and came like an army ready for battle. +Many of the new citizens fled, and the little band of defenders numbered +only one hundred and twenty-three men.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile, a committee had come from Quincy to try to settle the troubles +without bloodshed. Although with them were Major Flood, sent by the +governor, and Mr. Wood, mayor of Quincy, the mob paid no attention to them, +and so they could do nothing.</p> + +<p>There seemed no prospect but that the citizens would have to defend +themselves as best they could. Benjamin Clifford took command of the +volunteers, and Captain William Anderson organized a small body of +sharpshooters called the Spartan Band. As cannon were badly needed, the +brethren got two hollow steamboat shafts, cut them in two, <a name="Page_121" id="Page_121"></a>plugged up one +end, and thus made some cannon. They had no cannon balls, but they used +scraps of iron and lead tied up into bags.</p> + +<p>On Friday, the 11th, the mob drew up to the city and began firing. They +were met by the "Mormon" troops with their home-made cannon, which +surprised the mobbers very much, and they were compelled to stop their +advance.</p> + +<p>On Saturday, the 12th, a flag of truce was brought into the city, and with +it a note to the commander at Nauvoo, stating that if they did not +surrender they would have to take the consequences. Major Clifford replied +that he had been sent by the governor to uphold the laws and that he was +going to do it, advising Brockman to disband his men.</p> + +<p>The Nauvoo citizens had held their position during the night and had thrown +up some breastworks. The next day the battle waged fiercer than ever, but +the Nauvoo boys held their ground and the mob could not get in. Twelve +mobbers were wounded. The first one killed among the defenders was Augustus +Anderson, a "Mormon" boy fourteen years old. He left his mother that +morning saying he would fight for her, and went along with his father, +Captain William Anderson. Augustus was struck by a cannon ball, and died in +a few minutes. Shortly after Captain Anderson was also hit.</p> + +<p>"I am wounded," he cried. "Take my gun and shoot on."</p> + +<p>David Norris was also killed, and a number of other brethren wounded.</p> + +<p>For six days that little band of brave defenders kept the mob at bay; and +even when it was seen to be useless to keep the fight up longer, many were +in favor of doing so.</p> + +<p>On the 16th a treaty was made. The city was to surrender. The citizens were +not to be molested, and the sick <a name="Page_122" id="Page_122"></a>and helpless were to be protected. The +"Mormons" were to leave as soon as possible.</p> + +<p>The mob forces entered the city on the 17th; but it was the same old story. +They thought no more of promises or of the treaty. Bands of men went +through the city, stealing, insulting, and in every way abusing the people. +A gang went through the temple and up to the tower where they rang the +bell, yelled and shouted. A preacher who was in the mob went up to the top +of the tower and cried in a loud voice:</p> + +<p>"Peace! peace! peace! to the inhabitants of the earth, now the 'Mormons' +are driven!"</p> + +<p>The poor Saints had to get away as fast as they could. Some went north, +some south, but most of them crossed the river and camped on the low +bottoms of the Mississippi in Iowa. I shall not attempt to tell you of the +sufferings of these poor people; weak, sick hungry, cold, and wet. It would +make your heart ache to see the picture, one of the saddest in all our +history.</p> + +<p>At this time, when it seemed as though these people would starve to death, +a strange thing happened. Great flocks of quail came flying into camp. They +flew against the wagons with such force that they were killed or stunned, +so that they could be picked up. They also alighted all over the camp and +were so tame that they could be taken by the hand. Thus the Lord sent food +to his hungry children.</p> + +<p>If you wish to read a very interesting account of this removal from Nauvoo, +read Colonel Kane's lecture, found in many of our larger histories.<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p> + +<p><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123"></a><b>Topics.</b>—1. Nauvoo after the main body of Saints had left. 2. The Battle +of Nauvoo. 3. The remnant driven out.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. About how many Saints were left in Nauvoo? 2. +Who were the "Jack Mormons?" 3. Tell of the mob's doings. 4. Who was John +Carlin? 5. What did he do? 6. Who was Major Parker? 7. What did he have +orders to do? 8. Describe the mobbing party. 9. Tell about the Nauvoo +volunteers. 10. Who were William and Augustus Anderson? 11. How long did +the defenders hold out? 12. What was agreed upon in the treaty of peace? +13. Describe the actions of the mob in Nauvoo. 14. To where were the Saints +driven? 15. What was their condition? 16. How were they fed? 17. Who wrote +an interesting account of this exodus?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<h3>WESTWARD.</h3> + + +<p>The moving of a nation! What a task it must have been!</p> + +<p>Most of you have had some experience in moving, it may be only a family +moving from one house to another, and you know what a lot of worry and work +there are in such a small affair; but here was a nation moving!</p> + +<p>This great exodus was very much like the time when the children of Israel +went from under the oppression of Egypt out into the wilderness to journey +to the promised land. When at Nauvoo, Brigham Young said to the Saints: "To +your tents, O Israel," they knew they had another Moses to lead them from +their persecutors.</p> + +<p>The camp at Sugar creek grew larger every day through the arrival of exiles +from Nauvoo. Many did not bring provisions enough with them, so that they +were forced <a name="Page_124" id="Page_124"></a>to go to the neighboring farms and settlements and work for +corn.</p> + +<p>The first move the camp made was on March 1, 1846, when four hundred wagons +started forward. Five miles only was traveled that day, and when they +camped, the snow had to be shovelled away where they pitched their tents.</p> + +<p>From that time the Saints moved slowly westward across the territory of +Iowa. As they advanced, the spring rains came and often drenched the +travelers through. The ground now became very muddy, and it was so hard for +the poor teams that some days only a few miles were traveled. Sometimes +their camping places were so wet that they who slept on the ground would +have to lay on branches of trees so that they would not sink into the mud.</p> + +<p>At first there was very little feed for their animals, and they had to live +on the bark and twigs of trees, with what, corn could be spared for them. +Many horses were traded for oxen, as they could stand such hardship better. +Trips were made to the nearest settlements to buy food. Those who had no +money traded what they could spare, such as dishes and feather beds for +corn.</p> + +<p>For the first few weeks there was not much order in their way of traveling; +but on March 27th the Saints were more perfectly organized. Brigham Young +was sustained as president of the whole camp. Then captains were appointed +over hundreds, over fifties, and over tens. Clerks were chosen to keep the +records, etc., and men were called to see to the buying and distributing of +the food. Thus every one had something to do and everything was done in +order.</p> + +<p><a name="train" id="train"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 482px;"> +<img src="images/image63.jpg" width="482" height="300" alt="A PIONEER TRAIN." title="" /> +<span class="caption">A PIONEER TRAIN.</span> +</div> + +<p>Often in the evening when supper had been eaten, the logs were piled on the +bonfire, a space was cleared, the musicians <a name="Page_126" id="Page_126"></a>brought out their instruments, +and the sorrows and hardships of the day were forgotten in the innocent +dance.</p> + +<p>The camp always rested on Sundays, and if the weather would permit, +meetings were held.</p> + +<p>On April 24th a point on Grand river was reached, one hundred and +forty-five miles north-west from Nauvoo. Here it was decided to form a +settlement—to build houses and plant crops, that those who came after +would have food and a stopping place. The settlement was called Garden +Grove. Soon it was as lively as a hive of bees. Hundreds of men were busy +making fence rails and fences, building houses, digging wells, clearing +land, and plowing. Meetings were held often and the people were instructed +and encouraged. Parley P. Pratt and a small company were sent ahead to find +another location for a settlement. They found a beautiful place about +thirty miles from Garden Grove, which they called Mount Pisgah. Here houses +were also built, and farms and gardens planted. As many of the Saints were +poor and sick they rested at these two settlements while the main body went +on.</p> + +<p>From Mount Pisgah the country was wild Indian lands, there being no white +settlements or roads. The spring rains had now moderated so that the roads +were better. On June 14th President Young and the leading companies arrived +at the Missouri river, where a stop was made. Most of the companies came up +in July. A camp was made on the east side of the river on some high land +called Council Bluffs.</p> + +<p>This was on Indian land, but the travelers were received kindly and given +permission to stop.</p> + +<p>President Young intended to send a body of picked men into the Rocky +Mountains as soon as possible to locate a gathering place. They were to +push on ahead that summer <a name="Page_127" id="Page_127"></a>and put in crops. Arrangements were being made +to this end, when something happened that put a stop to the plan. This was +the call for the Mormon Battalion, about which I will tell you in the next +chapter.</p> + +<p>After five hundred of their best men had marched away to fight the battles +of their country, it was impossible for the Saints to get to the mountains +that year. So it was decided to make a third stopping place and remain +there during the winter.</p> + +<p>There being a good location for a town on the west bank of the Missouri +river, that place was selected and named Winter Quarters. The town was laid +out regularly into streets, and log houses were built. Some made dugouts in +the sides of the hill, which were quite comfortable during the cold winter. +As the Indians were troublesome on that side of the river a stockade was +built around the town. By December, 1846, five hundred and thirty-eight log +houses and eighty-three sod houses were built, inhabited by three thousand +four hundred and eighty-three people. The town was divided into twenty-two +wards, each presided over by a bishop. A large log house was built in which +meetings and parties were held.</p> + +<p>The food of the people that winter consisted largely of corn-bread and +pork. President Young had a grist mill built, but before that time many ate +boiled wheat, and ground their corn in coffee mills.</p> + +<p>Because of hardships and poor food there was much sickness at all the +settlements. Graves marked the prairie for hundreds of miles. At Winter +Quarters alone over six hundred were buried.</p> + +<p>The poor Saints who were left at Nauvoo were not forgotten. After they had +been driven from Nauvoo, they were <a name="Page_128" id="Page_128"></a>met by teams from Winter Quarters, and +all who wished to go were taken to the camps of the Saints.</p> + +<p>Perhaps you may get an idea of this great move when you are told that +during that summer there were about two thousand wagons and ten thousand +Saints on the way between Nauvoo and Council Bluffs.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. From Nauvoo to Garden Grove. 2. Garden Grove and Mount +Pisgah. 3. Winter Quarters.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What might this last move of the Saints be +likened to? 2. After leaving Nauvoo where was the first stopping place? 3. +When did the camp start west? 4. What hindered the traveling? 5. How was +the camp organized? 6. What did the Saints do for amusement? 7. Where were +Garden Grove and Mount Pisgah? 8. What was the object in making these +settlements? 9. What prevented a band of pioneers from going to the +mountains that summer? 10. Where was Winter Quarters? 11. Describe the +place. 12. About how many people were traveling across Iowa that summer?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE MORMON BATTALION.</h3> + + +<p>During the summer of 1846 the United States was at war with the republic of +Mexico. A number of battles had been fought in Texas. What is now +California, Nevada, Utah, and Arizona belonged to Mexico, and as President +Polk desired to get this large district of country for the United States, +he sent soldiers westward to the Pacific ocean.</p> + +<p>The "Mormon" people traveling from Nauvoo had asked President Polk for +assistance in their journey to the west. They said they wanted to remain +under the protection <a name="Page_129" id="Page_129"></a>of the government, and were willing to aid in holding +the western country for the United States.</p> + +<p>In the month of June, 1846, Captain James Allen, an officer of the United +States army arrived at Mount Pisgah, Iowa. What he wanted was five hundred +men with which to form a battalion and march across the continent to +California, and take part in the war with Mexico.</p> + +<p>This was startling news indeed. The Saints had not expected this kind of +"help" in their journeying through the wilderness. Many of the Saints +looked upon the call as a plan to destroy them. You can hardly blame them +for that, can you, knowing some of their past history?</p> + +<p>But President Young and the leading brethren told the officer he should +have his men. They thought it was a test to see if they were true to their +country. Though it was a pretty hard test, thus to take their best and +strongest men away from such a camp as theirs, yet the "Mormon" people +would show to the government and to the whole world that they were loyal to +their country, even though that country had failed to protect them in their +rights to live in peace and worship God.</p> + +<p>At a meeting held at Council Bluffs it was decided to raise the men asked +for. Brigham Young and the Twelve took an active part in getting +volunteers. Word was sent to the different settlements of the Saints. The +stars and stripes were hoisted to a tree top, and the work of enrollment +began. Within three days the little army was organized and ready for the +march. Then they had a grand farewell party, held, not in some beautifully +lighted ball room, but in a bowery, where the ground had been packed hard +by the tread of many feet. There fathers and mothers and brothers and +sisters and sweethearts said their goodbyes to each other.</p> + +<p>And then the long, dreary march began. The story of <a name="Page_130" id="Page_130"></a>that march would fill +a book, so of course very little of it can be told here. If you would like +to read more about it, you will find it in Brother Tyler's "History of the +Mormon Battalion."</p> + +<p>There were five hundred and forty-nine souls in the Battalion. Captain +James Allen was the commander. They started on their march July 20, 1846, +to Fort Leavenworth, where they received their guns and other things +necessary for an army. At this point Captain Allen died, which made the men +feel bad, as he was a good, kind officer.</p> + +<p>The Battalion began to move from Fort Leavenworth on the 12th of August. +You may see their line of march by looking at the map on page 128. After +suffering much hardship, they reached Santa Fe, October 9th. Here Colonel +Cooke took the command. As many of the soldiers as were too sick to go on +were sent to Pueblo, where they remained all winter, and traveled to Salt +Lake valley the next summer. The main body of the Battalion left Santa Fe, +October 19th, for California. At Tucson they expected to have a battle with +some Mexican soldiers, and prepared for it, but they marched through the +city without being disturbed. From Tucson they continued over the deserts, +and arrived at San Diego, January 29, 1847, where they saw the broad, blue, +ocean, many of them for the first time.</p> + +<p>The Battalion remained in and around San Diego for about two weeks. As +there was no fighting to be done, the men built houses, dug wells, made +brick, and helped build up the town. On March 19th most of them marched to +Los Angeles, and on the 16th of July they were mustered out, having served +their full time—one year.</p> + +<p>Of this great march Colonel Cooke their commander wrote:</p> + +<p>"History may be searched in vain for an equal march <a name="Page_131" id="Page_131"></a>of infantry; +nine-tenths of it through a wilderness, where nothing but savages and wild +beasts are found, or deserts, where for want of water, there is no living +creature. There, with almost hopeless labor we have dug deep wells. Without +a guide we have crossed the wilderness, we have ventured into trackless +prairies, where water was not found for several marches. With crowbar and +pickax in hand we have worked our way over mountains, which seemed to defy +aught but the wild goat, and hewed a passage through a chasm of rock, more +narrow than our wagons."</p> + +<p>After their release, most of the men took up their march for home. Perhaps +it would be more correct to say to find their families and friends, as they +did not have any home yet. They journeyed northward in California and then +crossed the mountains to Salt Lake valley where most of them arrived in +October, 1847. From there many went right on to Winter Quarters to their +families.</p> + +<p>A number of the Battalion men remained in California to earn a little +money. Some got work with a Captain Sutter who had a large ranch on the +American fork of the Sacramento river. The "Mormons" with some others were +set to work building a mill, and it was here while digging in the mill race +that gold was discovered in California. Some of the brethren carried away a +few hundred dollars' worth when they went to Salt Lake Valley the next +summer.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The call for the Mormon Battalion. 2. Its march. 3. Discovery +of Gold.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who was Captain James Allen? 2. What did he +want of the "Mormons?" 3. What was the Battalion wanted for? 4. What did +President Young say? 5. What did many of the Saints think of the call? 6. +Why was it a hardship on the Saints at that time to furnish five hundred +soldiers?<a name="Page_132" id="Page_132"></a> 7. Describe the line of march of the Battalion. 8. How long did +it take them? 9. How far was it? 10. What kind of journey was it? 11. What +did Colonel Cooke say about it? 12. What did the Battalion men do in +California? 13. What happened at Nauvoo in the summer of 1846, when the +Battalion was on the march?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<h3>THE PIONEERS.</h3> + + +<p>While the Saints were in Winter Quarters during the winter of 1846-7 they +were busily preparing for the march to the mountains next spring. Men for +the advance company were selected, and on April 7, 1847, they began to move +out of Winter Quarters to a place westward, where they were to gather. Ten +days later the first or pioneer camp, was ready for marching. The idea was +to have twelve times twelve men, but one became sick and had to return, so +that left one hundred and forty-three. There were besides the men three +women and two children. They had seventy-two wagons, ninety-three horses, +fifty-two mules, sixty-six oxen, nineteen cows, seventeen dogs, and some +chickens.</p> + +<p>For three months and seventeen days this company traveled westward over +plains and mountains. During the first part of their journey they sometimes +followed a wagon road to Oregon, and sometimes they made new roads. The +shallow rivers they forded, the deep ones they built bridges over, and the +large ones they crossed in ferry boats which they built. After these +ferries had been built the pioneers sometimes took over companies on their +way to Oregon and received provisions for their pay.</p> + +<p><a name="map_3" id="map_3"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 483px;"> +<img src="images/image67.jpg" width="483" height="300" alt="MAP OF PIONEER ROUTE." title="" /> +<span class="caption">MAP OF PIONEER ROUTE.</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134"></a>The map will show you the route they took better than can be told here.</p> + +<p>The pioneers did not know exactly where they were to locate. It was to be +in some valley of the Rocky mountains where they could live in peace, free +from mobs. When President Young was asked as to their destination, all he +could say was that he would know the place when he should see it, and that +they should continue to travel the way the Spirit of the Lord directed +them.</p> + +<p>On their journey they often met scouts and trappers. One of the best known +of these was Col. James Bridger. He had been all through the valley of the +Great Salt Lake, he said, and he told the pioneers that they could not live +there, as nothing would grow. So sure was he of this that he offered to +give a thousand dollars for the first bushel of corn they could raise in +that valley. President Young simply said, "Wait a little and we will show +you."</p> + +<p>When they left the plains and got up in the mountains some of them became +sick with the mountain fever. Among those ailing was President Young. He +became so bad that he could not travel, so when they were in Echo canyon he +instructed Orson Pratt to take the main company on and he with a few men +would remain for a few days.</p> + +<p>The main company, therefore, went on down Echo canyon, up Weber valley, and +across the mountains, coming down into Salt Lake valley through Emigration +canyon. President Young had told them that when they got to the open +country on crossing the mountain they were to go to the north and stop at +the first convenient place for putting in their seeds. This the company +did, and on the 23rd of July they camped on the ground where now stands the +beautiful city and county building in Salt Lake City. After offering up +their thanks to God for his preserving care, they at once <a name="Page_135" id="Page_135"></a>got out their +tools and began to work. The season was so far advanced that if they were +to raise anything they must hurry. When they tried to plow the land, they +found it so dry and hard that some of the plows were broken. What could +they do? Then the thought came to turn the water in the creek over the land +and soak it up. This was done, and then there was no trouble to plow and +plant. This was the beginning of irrigation in this western part of the +United States.</p> + +<p>President Young and his party followed the next day. President Wilford +Woodruff was with him and we will let him tell of it:</p> + +<p>"On the 24th I drove my carriage, with President Young lying on a bed in +it, into the open valley. When we came out of the canyon into full view of +the valley, I turned the side of my carriage around, open to the west, and +President Young arose from his bed and took a look at the country. While +gazing on the scene before us, he was enwrapped in vision for several +minutes. He had seen the valley before in vision, and now he saw the future +glory of Zion and of Israel as they would be, planted in the valleys of +these mountains. When the vision had passed, he said:</p> + +<p>"'It is enough. This is the right place. Drive on.'"</p> + +<p>On August 26th, President Young and a company of one hundred and seven +persons, started on the return trip to Winter Quarters. On the Sweetwater +river they met two large companies of Saints on the way to the valley, +following the trail of the pioneers. There was great rejoicing, as the +Saints now for the first time knew where they were to locate. These +companies arrived safely in Salt Lake valley in September and October.</p> + +<p>President Young and company arrived at Winter Quarters<a name="Page_136" id="Page_136"></a> October 31. All was +well with the Saints, and they were prospering.</p> + +<p>And now a very important event took place. From the death of Joseph the +Prophet up to this time the Church had been led by the Twelve. Now it was +decided to reorganize the First Presidency, and at a meeting held in Winter +Quarters, December 5, 1847, the Twelve chose Brigham Young as President of +the Church. He chose Heber C. Kimball and Willard Richards as his +counselors, and these now became the First Presidency. This action of the +Twelve was sustained at a conference of the Church on the 27th.</p> + +<p>Thus the work prospered. Many meetings were held, and the Church was set in +order. Missionaries were sent to the world, and the Saints, now that they +had another gathering place, began to flock towards the new Zion in the +mountains. Winter Quarters was deserted and a new settlement founded across +the river. It was called Kanesville (now Council Bluffs) in honor of Thomas +L. Kane who did many kind acts for the Saints.</p> + +<p>In the spring of 1848 the Saints on the Missouri river were busy getting +ready for the move to the mountains. They started about the beginning of +June, organized into three large companies, all led by President Young. +Altogether there were 2,417 people, 793 wagons, herds of horses and cattle, +a great many sheep, pigs, chickens, etc. Here was surely, if not a nation, +a whole city moving. They followed in the trail of the first companies and +arrived in Great Salt Lake valley in September and October.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The march of the pioneers. 2. Arrival in Salt Lake valley. 3. +The reorganization of the First Presidency. 4. The main companies.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. How many persons were in the <a name="Page_137" id="Page_137"></a>first or pioneer +company? 2. What was the object of the company? 3. How long were they on +the journey? 4. Describe their route. (See map). 5. What did trappers and +hunters say of Salt Lake valley? 6. When did the main body reach Salt Lake +valley? 7. When did President Young arrive? 8. What did he say about the +place? 9. Why did the pioneers know very little about irrigation? 10. Who +returned to Winter Quarters? 11. Whom did they meet? 12. What took place +December 5, 1847? 13. Where was Kanesville? 14. What took place during the +summer of 1848?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXX" id="CHAPTER_XXX"></a>CHAPTER. XXX.</h2> + +<h3>GREAT SALT LAKE CITY.</h3> + + +<p>The 25th of July, 1847, came on a Sunday, therefore the pioneers rested and +held meetings.</p> + +<p>Monday morning work began in earnest. Plowing and planting had to be +hurried. Exploring parties were also sent out in different directions to +become acquainted with the country.</p> + +<p>On the evening of July 28th President Young, accompanied by the Apostles, +went some distance from the camp to select a spot from which to begin +building the city. Arriving at a good location, President Young stopped, +and, striking his cane in the earth, he said: "Here will be the temple of +our God"—and on that spot the temple stands today. It was then decided to +lay out the city north, east, south, and west from the temple site, in ten +acre blocks, the streets to be eight rods wide and the sidewalks twenty +feet. Some time after this it was named Great Salt Lake City.</p> + +<p>You will call to mind that some of the Mormon Battalion, owing to sickness, +did not march through to California.<a name="Page_138" id="Page_138"></a> This company, together with some +Saints from the state of Mississippi, arrived at the pioneer camp on July +29th, thus making quite an addition to the company. The first building of +any kind erected in the valley by the Saints was a bowery built on the +temple block by the Battalion men. This was used for some time in which to +hold meetings.</p> + +<p>It was decided not to settle on the city lots at first, but build a fort +with houses in as a protection from the Indians. The houses were built of +logs, and stood in a row, close together, which formed one side of the +fort. The other three sides were built of adobe walls. The roofs of the +houses were made of soil. The windows and doors faced the inside. Though +better than living all the winter in tents and wagons, you may imagine +these houses were not very comfortable, especially when the rain came +through the roofs onto beds, tables, stoves, etc.</p> + +<p><a name="valley" id="valley"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 498px;"> +<img src="images/image69.jpg" width="498" height="300" alt="SALT LAKE VALLEY IN 1847." title="" /> +<span class="caption">SALT LAKE VALLEY IN 1847.</span> +</div> + +<p>A conference was held in the bowery on Sunday, August 22nd, where +considerable business was attended to.<a name="Page_139" id="Page_139"></a> The Salt Lake Stake of Zion was +organized, with John Smith as president. It was shortly after this that +President Young and his company went back to Winter Quarters.</p> + +<p>The next addition to the settlement was the Mormon Battalion from +California.</p> + +<p>At the coming of winter all moved into the fort. That season the winter was +mild, so quite an amount of work was done outside.</p> + +<p>The spring of 1848 opened with fine prospects ahead. Five thousand acres of +land were planted, and the grain was growing rapidly; but another trial was +at hand. In May and June great swarms of crickets came from the mountains +and began to devour every growing thing. The settlers fought them as best +they were able, but what could be done with such countless millions of +insects! It seemed hopeless. Their crops were fast disappearing, and with +them their means of living through the next year. Remember, they were a +thousand miles from any other people, with mountains and deserts between +them. They could not get food from other places. They would have to raise +it or to starve.</p> + +<p>When they had about given up hope, there came great flocks of white birds +from the lake. They settled on the fields and began eating the crickets. +They would eat all they were able, then vomit, and eat again. This they did +day after day until the crickets were destroyed and part of the crop was +saved.</p> + +<p><a name="fort" id="fort"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 462px;"> +<img src="images/image70.jpg" width="462" height="300" alt="IN THE OLD FORT." title="" /> +<span class="caption">IN THE OLD FORT.</span> +</div> + +<p>That fall President Young with the main body of Saints arrived from the +East. There were now about five thousand people in the valley, and +prospects were not very encouraging, owing to the small crop raised. Food +was scarce, as also was clothing. Many people lived for weeks on "greens" +and the roots of the sego and thistle. A kind of soup was made by cooking +raw-hides. Yet in the midst of <a name="Page_141" id="Page_141"></a>these times Heber C. Kimball declared in a +public meeting that it would not be three years before "states goods" would +be sold in Salt Lake cheaper than in St. Louis. No one at that time could +see how it could be possible, but the prophecy was fulfilled within a year, +and it was in this way: That winter gold was discovered in California, and +early the next summer great companies of men came flocking from the east on +their way to the gold mines. Salt Lake City was a sort of half way house. +These gold seekers were heavily laden with all manner of goods, but being +anxious to get to California as soon as possible they traded to the people +in Salt Lake City their goods for lighter wagons, fresh horses, etc. Thus a +great deal of merchandise was brought to the valley, and Brother Kimball's +prophecy was fulfilled.</p> + +<p>The city had now been laid out into blocks, and lots were given to the +settlers. Some built houses and moved in that fall, but most of the people +remained in the fort until the spring of 1849.</p> + +<p>The city now began to grow rapidly, as companies of Saints were continually +coming from the east. In February, 1849, the city was divided into nineteen +wards and a bishop appointed over each. On the 12th of the same month the +four vacancies in the quorum of the Twelve Apostles were filled by the +calling of Charles C. Rich, Lorenzo Snow, Erastus Snow, and Franklin D. +Richards to the apostleship.</p> + +<p>Thus the Church was firmly established again, this time in the peaceful +valleys of the mountains, away from the persecution of its enemies and the +anger of mobs.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Locating the temple and city. 2. The fort. 3. The crickets +and gulls. 4. Hard times. 5. Heber C. Kimball's prophecy.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. How did President Young locate <a name="Page_142" id="Page_142"></a>the temple +spot? 2. How was the city laid out? 3. What was the first building in the +valley? 4. Describe a bowery. 5. What was the fort? 6. Describe it. 7. Who +was the first stake president in Utah? 8. What happened in the spring of +1848? 9. How were the crops saved? 10. Why was food so scarce in 1848? 11. +What kinds of food were eaten? 12. What was Heber C. Kimball's prophecy? +13. How was it fulfilled? 14. How was the city built up? 15. What apostles +were chosen February 12, 1849?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXI" id="CHAPTER_XXXI"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<h3>GROWTH OF UTAH AND THE CHURCH.</h3> + + +<p>As you were told in the last chapter, among the first things done by the +pioneers was to send exploring parties out to find other locations for +settlement. They knew that thousands of Saints would follow them to their +new home, and room must be had for them.</p> + +<p>In the first company that followed the pioneers was Peregrine Sessions. He, +with some others, moved north from the pioneer camp and settled in what is +now Davis county. Further north, at the junction of the Weber and Ogden +rivers, there lived, before the pioneers came, a trapper and trader by the +name of Goodyear. He claimed a large area of land, nearly all of what is +now Weber county, saying that the Mexican government had granted it to him. +This claim he sold in 1847 to Captain James Brown of the Mormon Battalion +for the sum of $3,000. In the spring of 1848, Captain Brown with his sons +moved to the new location and began putting in crops. They were told that +frost would kill the corn before it could ripen, but they worked on, and in +the fall reaped a large harvest. Soon other families <a name="Page_143" id="Page_143"></a>moved in, to whom +Captain Brown gave land. Thus Ogden city and Weber county had their +beginning.</p> + +<p>Early in the spring of 1849, the first settlers moved south from Salt Lake +City. They consisted of thirty families led by John S. Higbee, one of the +pioneers. They settled on Provo river, built a fort for protection, and +then began plowing and planting. There were quite a number of Indians in +that part. Their head chief was Sowiette, and under him was Chief Walker. +The first was a kind Indian who wished to live in peace with the whites; +but not so with Walker who delighted in stealing and fighting.</p> + +<p>For some months everything went well with the Provo settlers, but in the +fall the Indians began stealing, and once in awhile an arrow came +uncomfortably near some settler when away from the fort. At length a party +of men who were out searching for stolen cattle, had a fight with a band of +Indians in which five of the savages were killed.</p> + +<p>The settlers in the fort were now continually annoyed, until in February, +1850, a company of militia was sent from Salt Lake City to their aid. A +fierce battle ensued, in which a number were killed on both sides, and the +Indians were scattered to the mountains.</p> + +<p>It was President Young's policy not to harm the Indians if possible, saying +that it was cheaper to feed them than to fight them. But even this kind +policy did not altogether prevent trouble with these wild people. In 1853, +the Indians, led by Chief Walker, made war on the southern settlements, +with the result that about twenty whites and a great many Indians were +killed.</p> + +<p>At the close of the war with Mexico all this western country became a part +of the United States. At a convention held in Salt Lake City, March 4, +1849, the people asked Congress for a territorial organization. Later, a +petition <a name="Page_144" id="Page_144"></a>was sent asking to be admitted into the Union under the name of +"The State of Deseret." Until Congress could act, a temporary government +was formed which existed for nearly two years. President Young was elected +governor, and there were the other officers usually found in a state. +September 9, 1850, Congress passed an act organizing Utah Territory. +President Millard Fillmore appointed Brigham Young as governor. Out of the +six other officers, three were "Mormons," and three non-"Mormons" from the +East.</p> + +<p>At a conference held in Salt Lake City, October 6, 1849, a number of elders +were called to new mission fields. John Taylor, Curtis E. Bolton, and John +Pack were sent to France; Erastus Snow and Peter O. Hansen to Denmark; John +Forsgren to Sweden; Lorenzo Snow and Joseph Toronto to Italy; Addison +Pratt, James S. Brown, and Hiram H. Blackwell, to the Society Islands. +Brother Pratt had but recently returned from a five years mission to these +islands, where twelve hundred souls had been baptized into the Church.</p> + +<p>At the April conference, 1851, Edward Hunter was chosen to succeed Newel K. +Whitney as bishop of the Church. There were at that time about thirty +thousand people in Utah.</p> + +<p>President Young and the Apostles traveled much throughout the Territory, +locating settlements, organizing wards and putting the Church in order. At +the October conference, 1853, some of the leading brethren were called to +locate in different parts of the Territory. Among them were Elders George +A. Smith and Erastus Snow with fifty families who were called to strengthen +Iron county, and Elder Lorenzo Snow with fifty families to go to Box Elder.</p> + +<p>In the summer of 1854 the grasshoppers did much damage to the crops, and +again in 1855 in many parts these insects <a name="Page_145" id="Page_145"></a>took every green thing. This +brought on another scarcity. There was much suffering and again the people +were compelled to live on roots. A number of the brethren had stored up +some grain which they now shared with those who had none. In this way all +fared very much alike and the hardships were shared by all.</p> + +<p>In the winter of 1856 a very sad thing happened. That year some emigrants +came to Utah in handcart companies. Small, two wheeled carts were made at +the place of starting in Iowa. On these carts were loaded baggage and +provisions, and the men and boys pulled them across the plains. Sometimes +the women and girls helped. A few ox teams usually hauled the heaviest +loads in wagons, and in this way the Saints walked and pulled their carts +over the thirteen hundred miles of their journey. This plan succeeded very +well for those who started early and reached the valley in good time, but a +number of companies started too late and were caught in fierce snow storms +in the mountains. Many of these poor travelers died from hunger and cold, +and if it had not been for some of the brethren who came out from Salt Lake +to their help, no doubt most of them would have perished.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Making settlements. 2. Trouble with the Indians. 3. +Organizing Utah Territory. 4. Famine of 1855-6. 5. The handcart companies.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Where was the second settlement in Utah made? +2. When and by whom was Ogden settled? 3. Tell about the settlement of +Provo. 4. What trouble did the Provo settlers have? 5. What was President +Young's Indian policy? 6. Who was Chief Walker? 7. What was done March 4, +1849? 8. What did the people wish to name the state? 9. When was Utah +Territory organized? 10. Who was the first governor? 11. Name the first +missionaries to France; to Denmark; <a name="Page_146" id="Page_146"></a>to Sweden; to Italy; to the Society +Islands. 12. Tell something about these missions. 13. Tell about the work +of the Church leaders in making settlements, etc. 14. What was the cause of +the famine in 1855-6? 15. What were the handcart companies?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXII" id="CHAPTER_XXXII"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<h3>THE "UTAH WAR."</h3> + + +<p>The president of the United States appoints the leading officers of a +territory. Many of the officers sent to Utah by the president were good men +and did justice to "Mormon" and Gentile alike; but some were men who could +see no good in the Saints, and were therefore always trying to oppress +them. Such men were Judges Stiles and Drummond, and Secretary Ferris, who +were in Utah in 1856. At last they left the territory and sent in a report +to the president. In it Judge Drummond said that the "Mormons" were +traitors to the United States, and would not obey its laws; that they had a +secret organization whose duty it was to murder all who opposed them; that +the court records had been burned; that the government officials were in +danger of their lives, etc. Like reports were made by other persons, and +the result was that a strong feeling was created in the East against the +people of Utah.</p> + +<p>On the 24th of July, 1857, the people of Salt Lake City were having a grand +celebration in Big Cottonwood canyon. They were having a happy time. The +band played, the choirs sang, the cannon roared, while the Stars and +Stripes waved from trees and mountain peaks. Suddenly four dusty travelers +rode into the camp. They brought news from the<a name="Page_147" id="Page_147"></a> East, and startling news it +was: the president of the United States had sent an army to Utah to +establish law and order among the "Mormons!"</p> + +<p>In the evening the Saints were called together, and the news was told them. +President Young spoke with power. "We have transgressed no law, neither do +we intend to," said he; "but as for any nation coming to destroy this +people, God Almighty being my helper, it shall not be."</p> + +<p>Two thousand five hundred soldiers were on the march to Utah. General +Harney was appointed commander, but he was succeeded by Colonel Albert +Sidney Johnston. With the army came the new set of officers which the +president had appointed for the territory.</p> + +<p>In the commander's orders it was stated that the people of Utah were in +rebellion against the United States, and that it was the duty of the army +to restore the authority of the government and aid and protect the new +officers in the discharge of their duties. On the 8th of September Captain +Van Vliet arrived in Salt Lake City from the army. He told President Young +that their intentions were not to harm the people in any way. President +Young replied that he had had experience with military bodies in Missouri +and Illinois, and he knew what the "Mormons" could expect. The captain +tried to show President Young how useless it would be for a few "Mormons" +to resist a nation like the United States. Even if they prevented the army +from entering the valley that year, more soldiers would be sent in the +spring.</p> + +<p>"We are aware that such will be the case," replied the president; "but when +those troops arrive they will find Utah a desert; every house will be +burned to the ground, every tree cut down, and every field laid waste."</p> + +<p>The captain was deeply impressed, but such were really the intentions of +the Saints. They could not trust the troops, <a name="Page_148" id="Page_148"></a>and they did not intend to +submit tamely to such scenes as they had passed through in Far West and +Nauvoo. They were not in rebellion, and if the president had simply sent +some one to investigate, he would have found out that truth; but he had +acted on the spur of the moment, and the troops were already far on the +way. If they could be checked for a time until the truth could be learned, +the danger of a conflict might be averted; but if not, then, said President +Young, and the people were with him, their homes, fields, and gardens would +be destroyed by fire and the Saints would flee to the mountains.</p> + +<p>The army continued its march towards Utah. Col. R.T. Burton was now ordered +by Gen. Daniel H. Wells, commander of the Utah militia, to take a small +body of men and guard the emigrant trains that were coming in. The militia +to the number of 2,500 men was called into service, and in September, 1857, +Gen. Wells and staff went to Echo canyon and there made their headquarters. +Active preparations were now made to stop the enemy. Echo canyon, through +which the troops would have to pass, was fortified by trenches and the +loosening of rocks on the hill sides.</p> + +<p>By this time the army was in what is now Wyoming, and was making for Echo +canyon. Small companies of Utah men were sent out to meet them. They were +instructed to annoy the invaders as much as possible, to burn the grass, +drive off their cattle, etc., but they were to shed no blood if it were +possible to prevent it. These orders were followed, and many exciting +encounters and narrow escapes took place. Major Lot Smith, with a small +company of men, at one time rode up to a large wagon train carrying +supplies for the army. After capturing the drivers, they set fire to and +destroy the whole train. Herds of cattle were <a name="Page_149" id="Page_149"></a>driven off to Salt Lake +valley, where they were kept during the winter and taken back to the +soldiers in the spring.</p> + +<p>Winter came early that year, and in the mountains where the armies were, +the weather became very cold, with snow and sleet. The government troops +made but little progress. They tried hard to reach the valley; but at last +they were compelled to stop for the winter in the mountains of western +Wyoming.</p> + +<p>This was all the Utah leaders wanted. Now there would be time for finding +out the truth. Most of the militia returned home, leaving fifty men as a +guard in Echo canyon.</p> + +<p>When the government at Washington heard the news from the seat of the "war" +there was considerable excitement, and Congress voted to send another army +to aid the first one. Meanwhile the people of Utah were anxiously waiting +for spring and preparing for the conflict which they thought must then +come.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Character of some territorial officials. 2. The army for +Utah. 3. What the "Mormons" thought of the army. 4. How the army was +stopped.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who was Judge Drummond? 2. What report did he +make to the government about Utah affairs? 3. What led President Buchanan +to send an army to Utah? 4. What was the object of sending this army? 5. +When did the Saints first hear of it? 6. What did the "Mormons" resolve to +do? 7. Why could they not trust the army? 8. What did the Utah militia do? +9. What was the object in annoying the troops? 10. What hindered the troops +from entering Salt Lake valley that year?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIII" id="CHAPTER_XXXIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII.</h2> + +<h3>THE "UTAH WAR," (CONCLUDED.)</h3> + + +<p>When that friend of the Latter-day Saints, Colonel, afterwards General +Thomas L. Kane, heard of the troubles in Utah, he left his home in +Philadelphia and went to Washington to see the president. Though feeble in +health, he offered to go to Utah and try to settle the difficulties in a +peaceable manner. The offer was accepted. Colonel Kane arrived in Salt Lake +City in February, 1858, where he was gladly received. In the cold and snow +of that winter he went to the camp of the army and had a talk with the new +governor whom the president had appointed to take Brigham Young's place. +Colonel Kane told the officers with the army that they would be welcomed in +the valley and kindly treated, but the troops must not locate in or near +any settlement of the territory. The Colonel also convinced Governor +Cumming that he had no need of an army to help him take charge of his +office, and even prevailed on him to go back to Salt Lake City with him.</p> + +<p>To this, General Johnston of the army was very much opposed. The president +had sent him with an army to put the governor into his office, aided by +sword and cannon; but now, if the governor could enter peaceably upon his +duties there would be no need of him or his soldiers. The general didn't +like it a bit; but nevertheless, Governor Cumming went with Colonel Kane to +Salt Lake City in charge of some of the Utah militia.</p> + +<p>Governor Cumming was received with the respect due such an officer, and +duly installed into his position. He found the records and books of the +courts safe, and learned <a name="Page_151" id="Page_151"></a>that the reports which had led the president to +send the army were not true.</p> + +<p>The new governor was a good man. He said the troops would have to come into +the valley in the spring, but the people's rights would be respected, and +no harm should be done to any of them. The Saints, however, could not trust +the army. They remembered the scenes of the past, and resolved that they +should not be enacted over again in the valleys of Utah. So, early in the +spring, the order came for all the Saints to pack up their goods, get +together their stock, and move southward, leaving their deserted homes in +the care of a few guards who were to set fire to everything should the army +attempt to locate in the settlements.</p> + +<p>On seeing the Saints thus leaving their hard-earned homes, the kind-hearted +old governor entreated them not to do so, promising them full protection. +When his wife arrived from the camp of the army and saw the towns lonely +and deserted, she burst into tears and pleaded with her husband to bring +the people back. The governor, however, could do nothing. The 30,000 people +in Salt Lake City and northward took all their goods and moved south, most +of them into Utah Valley.</p> + +<p>President Buchanan, now having learned the true condition of affairs, sent +two gentlemen to arrange for peace. They arrived in Salt Lake in June and +had a number of meetings with the leading brethren who came from the south +for that purpose. A letter was read from President Buchanan which, after +telling of the many crimes committed by the "Mormons" against the +government, offered to pardon all who would submit to the laws. In reply +President Young said that he and his brethren had simply stood up for their +rights, and they had done nothing to be pardoned for, except, perhaps the +burning of some government trains, and <a name="Page_152" id="Page_152"></a>for that act they accepted the +President's pardon. President Young then said they were willing the troops +should come into the country. They might march through the city but they +were not to make a camp less than forty miles away. "No mobs shall live in +the homes we have built in these mountains," said the president. "That's +the program, gentlemen, whether you like it or not. If you want war, you +can have it; but, if you want peace, peace it is; and we shall be glad of +it." After the meetings the brethren went back to the Saints in the south.</p> + +<p>June 26, 1858, "Johnston's Army," marched through Salt Lake City. All day +long the troops and trains passed through the city. The only sounds heard +was the noise made by the horses' hoofs and the roll of the wagons. The +city seemed as if dead. Hardly a person was seen on the streets. Quietly +and orderly the soldiers marched on. Colonel Cooke, once the commander of +the Mormon Battalion, bared his head as he rode through the streets in +honor of the brave "Mormon" boys who had marched under his command.</p> + +<p>The army camped that night across the Jordan, and then continued its march +to Cedar Valley, thirty-six miles south of the city. About two years later, +the soldiers went back to the east where they took part in the great Civil +War. The commander, Albert Sidney Johnston, fought on the side of the +south, and fell in the great battle of Shiloh.</p> + +<p>The Saints returned to their homes in July, 1858. Thus again, the Lord +preserved his people, and protected them from their enemies.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. The mission of Colonel Kane. 2. Governor Cumming installed. +3. Meeting with peace commissioners. 4. The move south. 5. The entrance of +the army.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153"></a><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What did Colonel Kane do at Washington? 2. +What was his mission to Utah? 3. Where was the army camped? 4. Who was +Governor Cumming? 5. What did Colonel Kane get the governor to do? 6. What +did the governor find in Salt Lake City? 7. Why did the Saints move south? +8. What did they propose doing if the army came to harm them? 9. What were +Governor Cumming's feelings? 10. Tell about the meeting with the peace +commissioners. 11. Describe the march of the army through Salt Lake City. +12. Where did the soldiers camp? 13. When did they leave Utah, and where +did they go?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIV" id="CHAPTER_XXXIV"></a>CHAPTER XXXIV.</h2> + +<h3>PROSPERITY.</h3> + + +<p>The action of the "Mormons" in again leaving the homes they had newly made +in the wilderness of the West, called the whole world's attention to them. +Many honest people began to see what a mistake it had been to send armed +soldiers against an innocent people.</p> + +<p>When the army was withdrawn, peace once more prevailed, and the Church was +again busy preaching the Gospel to the world and gathering the honest from +the nations. Many missionaries were sent out and new fields were opened.</p> + +<p>From Europe the Saints came by the thousands. Sometimes a whole ship would +be engaged to take a company of Saints across the ocean, in charge of one +of the Apostles or some leading elder. From the sea, they would travel in +train loads to the end of the railroad, where companies of teams and wagons +would take them the remainder of the journey to Utah.</p> + +<p>Now came the telegraph line westward. October 17,<a name="Page_154" id="Page_154"></a> 1861, it was completed +to Salt Lake City, and the next day President Young sent the first message +east. At this time the war between the north and the south was beginning, +and in this first telegram President Young said that Utah had not seceded, +but was firm for the Union.</p> + +<p><a name="interior" id="interior"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 390px;"> +<img src="images/image79.jpg" width="390" height="300" alt="SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (INTERIOR.)" title="" /> +<span class="caption">SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (INTERIOR.)</span> +</div> + +<p>Following the telegraph came the railroads. The Union Pacific was being +built from the east, while the Central Pacific came from the west. May 10, +1869, the two roads met in Northern Utah near the Promontory, and the last +spike was driven with much ceremony. Thus was completed the first iron road +across the continent.</p> + +<p>But true to the past history of the Latter-day Saints, <a name="Page_155" id="Page_155"></a>peace was not a +blessing they were permitted to enjoy for many years at a time.</p> + +<p><a name="exterior" id="exterior"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 388px;"> +<img src="images/image80.jpg" width="388" height="300" alt="SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (EXTERIOR.)" title="" /> +<span class="caption">SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (EXTERIOR.)</span> +</div> + +<p>In the year 1869 a number of prominent elders in the Church opposed +President Young and the authorities, and were cut off from the Church. One +of these elders was Wm. S. Godbe, therefore those who followed him were +sometimes called "Godbeites." These men joined with the anti-"Mormons" and +formed what was called the Liberal Party. It was the object of this +organization to oppose the "Mormons," and they were aided in this by the +officers sent to Utah by the government. It had been the policy of +Presidents Lincoln and Johnson to let the "Mormons" alone, but when General +Grant became president he changed the program <a name="Page_156" id="Page_156"></a>and at once sent officers to +Utah to "straighten out" the "Mormons." President Grant, no doubt obtained +much of his information about the "Mormons" from his friend, the Rev. J.P. +Newman. This minister had held a three days' discussion in the Tabernacle +at Salt Lake City with Apostle Orson Pratt on the subject of polygamy. +Elder Pratt seems to have got the better of the argument, and it can well +be imagined what kind of information this preacher gave to the president.</p> + +<p>The Saints never had more bitter enemies than some of these territorial +officers, especially Governor Shaffer and Chief Judge McKean. For years +these officials, aided by the Liberal Party, tried to run affairs their own +way; and you can easily understand that they could do a great many hateful +things against the "Mormons," having the officers of the law, if not the +law itself, on their side. Especially was their hate directed towards +President Young and the leading brethren who were accused of all manner of +crimes. They were arrested, tried, and placed in prison in many unlawful +ways.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding all these annoyances, the Church continued to grow in +strength and numbers. The Sunday Schools, the first of which was organized +in 1849, by Elder Richard Ballantyne, in the Fourteenth Ward of Salt Lake +City, had by this time grown to be a strong institution. The Mutual +Improvement Associations were organized in 1875, and soon did much good +among the young.</p> + +<p>President Young and his brethren were busy organizing stakes of Zion, +setting the quorums of the priesthood in order, directing the building of +temples, laying out towns and cities, and attending to the general duties +of the Church. Thus Zion grew and became stronger day by day.</p> + +<p>Brigham City is named after President Young. August<a name="Page_157" id="Page_157"></a> 19, 1877, the +president was at that place and the Box Elder Stake of Zion was organized. +Shortly after his return home, he was taken ill and died August 29th, at +the age of seventy-six.</p> + +<p>Thus passed away the second president of the Church. Joseph had laid the +foundation deep and strong. Brigham had built upon it. For thirty years he +had stood at the head of the Church and had led the Saints through some of +the most trying scenes of their history. Brigham Young was the leading +spirit in the removal from Nauvoo, in the march across the wild prairies +and mountains, in the building up of a great state in the desert valleys of +the Rocky Mountains; and his name will be ever honored as the great pioneer +of the west.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Prosperity of the Saints. 2. The telegraph and railroad. 3. +The Liberal Party. 4. Death of President Young.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. How did the Saints come from Europe in early +days? 2. Tell about the overland telegraph line in Utah and the first +telegram. 3. Tell about the railroads. 4. Who composed the Liberal party? +5. What was its object? 6. How did President Grant treat the "Mormons?" 7. +Tell about the Newman-Pratt discussion. 8. Why could the Utah officials +greatly annoy the Saints? 9. Who organized the first Sunday School? 10. +Where and when was it? 11. Tell of the death of President Young. 12. Tell +what you can of his life.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXV" id="CHAPTER_XXXV"></a>CHAPTER XXXV.</h2> + +<h3>THE "CRUSADE."</h3> + + +<p>Those who did not understand the true nature of "Mormonism" thought that at +the death of Brigham Young, the Church would go to pieces; but they soon +found out that the <a name="Page_158" id="Page_158"></a>work of God does not depend on any one man. The Twelve +again became the leading quorum in the Church, with John Taylor at its +head. Three years after the death of President Young, October 10, 1880, the +First Presidency was again organized. John Taylor became President, and he +chose George Q. Cannon as first and Joseph F. Smith as second counselor.</p> + +<p><a name="taylor" id="taylor"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image81.jpg" width="300" height="399" alt="PRESIDENT JOHN TAYLOR." title="" /> +<span class="caption">PRESIDENT JOHN TAYLOR.</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159"></a>President Taylor was seventy-two years old at this time. He had been with +the Church nearly from the beginning, having been an Apostle for forty-two +years. He had filled many missions both in the United States and in Europe, +had written much on gospel subjects, and was in reality as some called him, +the "Champion of Liberty." You will remember that he was with Joseph and +Hyrum at the time of their martyrdom in Carthage jail and was then severely +wounded.</p> + +<p>The year 1880 was the jubilee year of the Church, being fifty years since +it was organized. As was the custom in ancient Israel, it was a time of +forgiveness. The Church remitted many debts of the poor, besides giving +them many sheep and cattle. "While God is blessing us, let us bless one +another," said President Taylor; and thus much good feeling was manifested +among the Saints.</p> + +<p>But another storm was coming. A trial of another kind was in store for the +Church.</p> + +<p>In the days of Nauvoo, in 1843, Joseph the Prophet had received a +revelation from God, saying that it was right for good men holding the +priesthood to have more wives than one. By the time the Church had been in +Utah a few years, quite a number of the Saints had obeyed this law and +entered plural marriage. The enemies of the Church call this practice a +great sin, even though they can read in the Bible that good men of old whom +the Lord loved had many wives. In 1862 Congress passed a law against plural +marriage or polygamy. As many thought it was an unjust law, it was not +enforced for many years. Elder George Reynolds offered to be arrested and +tried under the law in order to have it tested. This was done, and Elder +Reynolds was convicted and sent to prison. His case was taken to the +Supreme<a name="Page_160" id="Page_160"></a> Court of the United States where the law was decided to be +constitutional.</p> + +<p>But this law was not hard enough on the "Mormons" to suit their enemies. +Sectarian preachers and politicians who wanted some office began to spread +falsehoods all over the country about Utah and its people, all of which had +its effect on Congress. Notwithstanding the protest of the "Mormons," +another law was passed against them, (March, 1882), called the Edmunds Act. +This law provided that no polygamist should vote or hold office; and if +found guilty of polygamy a man might be fined five hundred dollars and put +in prison for three years. If a man lived with more than one wife, he could +be fined three hundred dollars and imprisoned for six months.</p> + +<p>Officers were now sent to Utah to enforce this law, and what is called the +"Crusade" began in earnest. "Mormons" were not allowed to sit on juries or +have anything to do with the courts, so it was an easy matter to convict +all "Mormons" who came to trial.</p> + +<p>Arrests now followed fast, and it was indeed a sad time for many of the +Saints. Officers, called deputy marshals, were sent into all the +settlements of the Saints to spy out and arrest those supposed to be +guilty. Many of the brethren left the country or went away in hiding to +avoid being arrested, leaving the women and children to manage as best they +could. In Idaho no "Mormon" was allowed to vote or hold office, no matter +whether he had broken the law or not. Three brethren were sent from Arizona +to the penitentiary at Detroit, Michigan. Nearly all the leading brethren +were in hiding; and, as they could not speak to the people in their +meetings, they wrote epistles which were read to the Saints at their +conferences.</p> + +<p>For a number of years this persecution went on. Seemingly, <a name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>the strongest +anti-"Mormons" should have been satisfied. But no; they asked Congress to +make yet stronger laws to put down the "Mormons." Accordingly, in 1887, +another law was passed, called the Edmunds-Tucker Bill. This law, among +other things, provided that the property of the Church should be +confiscated, that is, taken from the Church. United States officers went to +work at once and took from the Church nearly $800,000 worth of property. +After the officers had gotten some good salaries out of it, the property +was at last given back to the Church.</p> + +<p>During the time of this crusade thirteen hundred persons suffered from +fines or imprisonment.</p> + +<p>July 25, 1887, President John Taylor died at Kaysville, Davis County, Utah. +He had been in exile for over two years; but the brave spirit was now away +from under the power of persecutors, and the Saints could but look on the +peaceful form and face of their beloved leader.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. President John Taylor. 2. Plural marriage. 3. The Edmunds +Bill. 4. The "Crusade." 5. The Edmunds-Tucker Bill.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Why was there no danger to the Church at the +death of President Young? 2. When was the First Presidency organized again? +3. Who composed it? 4. Tell what you can about John Taylor. 5. Tell about +the Jubilee year. 6. When and where was plural marriage revealed to the +Church? 7. When was the first law passed against this practice? 8. What is +meant by a law being constitutional? 9. What was the Edmunds Bill? 10. How +was it enforced? 11. What was the Edmunds-Tucker Law? 12. When and where +did President Taylor die?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXVI" id="CHAPTER_XXXVI"></a>CHAPTER XXXVI.</h2> + +<h3>PRESIDENCY OF WILFORD WOODRUFF.</h3> + + +<p>At the April conference, 1889, the First Presidency was again organized. +Wilford Woodruff was chosen president and he called the former counselors +to act also with him. President Woodruff was eighty-two years old when this +<a name="Page_163" id="Page_163"></a>high calling was placed upon him, but he was still quite strong and +active. His life had been devoted to God and his cause. He joined the +Church in 1833, so you see he had been with it from the beginning. He had +been an Apostle for fifty years. It will give you an idea of how busy +President Woodruff had been when you are told that from 1834 to 1895 he had +traveled through twenty-eight States of the Union, three of the countries +of Europe, and six islands of the sea. He had held 7,555 meetings, preached +3,526 discourses, organized fifty-one branches of the Church, besides doing +a great deal of other work in the Church.</p> + +<p><a name="woodruff" id="woodruff"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image83.jpg" width="300" height="343" alt="PRESIDENT WILFORD WOODRUFF." title="" /> +<span class="caption">PRESIDENT WILFORD WOODRUFF.</span> +</div> + +<p>President George Q. Cannon, first counselor in the presidency, came with +his father's family from England to Nauvoo in the year 1842, and from that +time had been an active worker in the Church. In 1850 he, in company with +other missionaries, went to the Sandwich Islands. Here Elder Cannon +translated the Book of Mormon into the native language, and sometime after +he had it printed. He labored as an editor and a publisher of Church papers +in San Francisco, in Liverpool, and at home with the <i>Deseret News</i>. In +1860 he was ordained an Apostle. In 1866 he began to publish the <i>Juvenile +Instructor</i>. He spent many years in Washington as delegate from Utah. +President Cannon was the General Superintendent of Sunday Schools to the +time of his death.</p> + +<p>The second counselor in the presidency, Joseph F. Smith, was born November +13, 1838, in Far West, Missouri, a few days after the time when his father +Hyrum Smith was taken by the mob and ordered to be shot. As a nine-year-old +boy he drove his mother's yoke of cattle across the plains with an emigrant +train. President Smith has filled many missions to Europe, to the Sandwich +Islands and to various parts of the United States.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164"></a>He was ordained as one of the Twelve Apostles July 1, 1866.</p> + +<p>During the first few years that Wilford Woodruff was president of the +Church, the persecution against those who had more than one family +continued to rage; yet the enemies of the Saints were not satisfied. Though +many of the people had been deprived of the right to vote and hold office, +yet there were enough left to outvote the anti-"Mormons," many of whom were +eager to get into some office. These kept urging Congress to pass other +laws against the "Mormons," and at last a number of bills were introduced +in Congress for the purpose of disfranchising the "Mormons," that is, +taking away from them the right to vote and to hold public office.</p> + +<p>During all this trouble the authorities of the Church were asking the Lord +to show them the right thing to do. In answer to these pleadings, the Lord +inspired President Woodruff to issue what is called the manifesto. In this +document President Woodruff, among other things, said:</p> + +<p>"Inasmuch as laws have been enacted by Congress forbidding plural +marriages, which laws have been pronounced constitutional by the court of +last resort, I hereby declare my intention to submit to those laws, and to +use my influence with the members of the Church over which I preside to +have them do likewise.</p> + +<p>"... And I now publicly declare that my advice to the Latter-day Saints is +to refrain from contracting any marriage forbidden by the law of the land."</p> + +<p>At the general conference of the Church held October 6, 1890, President +Woodruff's action was sustained by the vote of the conference.</p> + +<p>The enemies of the Church now had no excuse for their <a name="Page_165" id="Page_165"></a>persecutions, so, +after a time, peace came once more. The two political parties, the +"Liberal" and "People's" which had been for many years fighting each other +at the polls, now disbanded, and "Mormons" and non-"Mormons" joined either +the Democratic or the Republican party.</p> + +<p>In 1893 the great World's Fair was held in Chicago. In September of that +year the Tabernacle choir of Salt Lake City, led by Evan Stephens, went to +Chicago, accompanied by the first presidency and others. The choir gave +concerts in some of the large cities on the way, and at Chicago carried off +the second prize of one thousand dollars for the best singing.</p> + +<p>During the World's Fair there was held what was called a Parliament of +Religions. Meetings were convened where people of all religions were +invited to speak and tell of their beliefs. Men came from every part of the +world. There were Catholics and Protestants; there were followers of Brahma +and Buddha from India; there were Greeks and Mohammedans; there were +Japanese, Chinese, and negroes—but, among them all there was one religion +and one church lacking, and that was the Church of Jesus Christ of +Latter-day Saints. It had not been invited, and when Elder B.H. Roberts was +sent to Chicago to get a hearing for the Church of Christ, he was treated +in an ungentlemanly manner and was not allowed to properly present the +claims and doctrines of the Church. The Savior once said: "Blessed are ye, +when men shall hate you, and when they shall separate you from their +company, and shall reproach you, and cast out your name as evil, for the +Son of Man's sake." May we not draw a great lesson from all this?</p> + +<p>On January 4, 1896, President Grover Cleveland signed the paper which +admitted Utah into the Union as a state.<a name="Page_166" id="Page_166"></a> Celebrations in honor of the +event were held in all the towns and cities of the State.</p> + +<p>Fifty years from the time the pioneers entered Salt Lake Valley, July 24th, +1897, a grand celebration was held in Salt Lake City to honor the event.</p> + +<p><a name="monument" id="monument"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image85.jpg" width="300" height="371" alt="THE PIONEER MONUMENT." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE PIONEER MONUMENT.</span> +</div> + +<p>This celebration began Tuesday, July 20, 1897, and closed on the night of +Saturday 24th. On the 20th the Pioneer Monument, which is surmounted by a +bronze statue <a name="Page_167" id="Page_167"></a>of President Brigham Young, and situated near the Southeast +corner of the Temple block, Salt Lake City, was dedicated by President +Wilford Woodruff. The same day, at a reception held in the Tabernacle, all +surviving pioneers of 1847, were presented with a golden badge. Memorial +services in honor of the deceased pioneers were held in the Tabernacle on +Sunday 25th.</p> + +<p>When the war with Spain broke out the next year, a call was made on Utah +for five hundred volunteers. Utah's young men, many of them sons of the +pioneers and old settlers, heeded the call, and the men were promptly +raised and sent to the seat of war.</p> + +<p>President Wilford Woodruff while on a visit to the Pacific coast, took +suddenly ill and died in San Francisco, September 2, 1898.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Wilford Woodruff. 2. George Q. Cannon. 3. Joseph F. Smith. 4. +The "Manifesto." 5. The Parliament of Religions. 6. Death of President +Woodruff.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who constituted the fourth First Presidency of +the Church? 2. Tell something of President Woodruff. 3. Name some positions +President Cannon has held. 4. Tell about President Smith's boyhood. 5. What +further laws did the enemies of the "Mormons" wish passed against them? 6. +What is the "manifesto?" 7. How came it to be issued? 8. When was it +accepted. 9. Tell about the Tabernacle choir's trip to Chicago. 10. What +was the Parliament of Religions? 11. How was the Church treated in that +body? 12. Give some reasons for this treatment. 13. When was Utah admitted +as a state? 14. Tell about the Utah volunteers. 15. When and where did +President Woodruff die?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168"></a></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXVII" id="CHAPTER_XXXVII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVII.</h2> + +<h3>TEMPLE BUILDING.</h3> + + +<p>God's goodness, mercy, and watch-care reach to all his children, whether +they be white or black, bond or free; whether they live now or lived +thousands of years ago; yes, whether they are alive or dead. Death is but a +change from one sphere of action to another, and as God is everywhere, it +is not alone in this life that his loving care is manifested. The gospel +also is everlasting. It did not begin with this world, neither will it end +with this life, but its purifying, uplifting power is felt throughout all +time and place.</p> + +<p>Salvation is to get from under the powers of sin and death, and live +forever in the hereafter, growing in wisdom and in power, and becoming more +and more like unto our Great Father, God. This salvation is obtained by +obeying the principles of the gospel and performing the ordinances required +therein. You all know what the first of these principles and ordinances +are. One of the ordinances is that a person must be baptized by water for +the remission of sin. "He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved," +said the Savior. This must of course be performed here on earth, and by a +servant of God having authority to do so.</p> + +<p>Now, by thinking about it a moment, you will know that there are a great +many of the human race who have not been baptized with this kind of +baptism. Millions there are and have been who never heard of the gospel or +of Jesus Christ. Many others there are and have been who have had a kind of +baptism but not performed by one with authority. What will then become of +all these people?</p> + +<p><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169"></a>Many religions of the day teach that there is no chance for people after +they leave this life; if they are not saved when they die, they never can +be afterwards. Can you not see what a cruel thought that is? Think of the +millions who have not had a chance! Surely God would not punish people for +not doing something they had no chance to do.</p> + +<p><a name="temple_block" id="temple_block"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 395px;"> +<img src="images/image87.jpg" width="395" height="300" alt="THE TEMPLE BLOCK." title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE TEMPLE BLOCK.</span> +</div> + +<p>Now all this was made plain to the Prophet Joseph Smith. The Lord told him +that all those who died without repentance and baptism would have a chance +in the next world. Christ, while his body lay three days in the tomb, went +and preached to the spirits in prison. Likewise, many of the servants of +God have, and are now preaching the gospel to the children of God in the +spirit world. They can there believe and repent, but can not be baptized. +That <a name="Page_170" id="Page_170"></a>must be done for them by someone on the earth. This ordinance can be +performed in any place that God directs, but he has commanded that holy +buildings be erected wherein baptisms for the dead can be performed. This, +then, is one use of our temples. Marriages, sealings and other holy +ordinances are also performed in these buildings.</p> + +<p>The first temple site was dedicated in Jackson county, Missouri, August 3, +1831, but, as you have been told, no work was done to erect a building. The +Kirtland temple you also have been told about. After the Saints left +Kirtland the building was neglected. Then it came into the possession of +the Reorganization or "Reorganites," as they are sometimes called, a +religious body founded, and built up for the most part by apostates from +the Church. The Kirtland temple is still standing.</p> + +<p>Ground was dedicated for a temple at Far West July 3, 1837, but owing to +the Saints being driven away, no work other than digging the foundation was +done.</p> + +<p>The next effort was at Nauvoo. This temple was begun April 6, 1841, and +dedicated April 30th and May 1, 1846. You will remember how the Saints +toiled to complete this building. It was a large, beautiful structure, one +of the finest in the west, and cost about one million dollars. About two +years after the Saints had left Nauvoo, the temple was destroyed by fire.</p> + +<p>The Salt Lake temple was begun in 1853, but while it was being built three +others were completed. The first of these is the St. George temple. It was +begun the 9th of November, 1871, and dedicated April 6, 1877. The Logan +temple was begun May 18, 1877, and completed May 17, 1884. The corner +stones of the temple at Manti were laid April 14, 1879, and the building +was dedicated May 21, 1888. All <a name="Page_171" id="Page_171"></a>these temples are beautiful buildings, and +many are the blessings the Saints have received in them.</p> + +<p>Those of you who have not seen the Salt Lake temple may get a good idea of +its beauty by the picture. It is built of hewn blocks of gray granite, a +hard, beautiful stone. It was forty years in building. The last top stone +on the towers, called the capstone, was laid April 6, 1892. There were at +least forty thousand people on the temple grounds on this occasion. A +platform had been erected on the south side of the temple, whereon the +authorities of the Church were seated. There were services of singing, +prayer, and speaking, and then President Woodruff touched a button which +sent an electric current up a wire to the top of the tower. The electricity +set free the capstone which settled into its place. President Lorenzo Snow +led the vast audience in giving the grand Hosanna shout.</p> + +<p>President Woodruff was anxious to live to see the completion of the temple. +It was therefore voted by the large audience present that the inside of the +building be finished in one year.</p> + +<p>To accomplish this, means were donated liberally by the Saints, and the +work went on rapidly. On the 6th of April, 1893, the temple was completed, +and on the morning of that day the first meeting was held in the building. +President Woodruff offered the dedicatory prayer. In the afternoon another +meeting was held, and this continued day after day until thirty-one +meetings had been held. Seventy thousand of the Saints witnessed the +dedication exercises, besides thirteen thousand Sunday School children, for +whom special services were held.</p> + +<p>Some of you who read this book may have been in one of our temples. Did you +not notice what a calm, sweet <a name="Page_172" id="Page_172"></a>feeling came over you while there? Surely, +the Spirit of God is in these sacred buildings, and those who labor therein +for the living and the dead enjoy its blessed influence. Let every one of +you so live that your life may be pure and clean, so that some day you may +be worthy of entering the House of God and partaking of the blessings in +store for you.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Salvation for the dead. 2. The temples. 3. Salt Lake temple.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. What is salvation? 2. Is salvation limited to +this life? 3. How is salvation obtained? 4. Name some of the first +principles of the gospel. 5. Name some of its first ordinances. 6. What +have some preachers of religion taught regarding salvation? 7. What did the +Lord reveal to Joseph Smith on this subject? 8. Where did Jesus go while +his body lay in the sepulchre? (I Peter 3:18, 20.) 9. What are some of the +uses of temples? 10. How many temples have been built by the Church? 11. +Locate each. 12. Tell something about the Nauvoo temple. 13. Describe the +Salt Lake temple. 14. When was it dedicated? 15. What great blessings are +to be had in a temple?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXVIII" id="CHAPTER_XXXVIII"></a>CHAPTER XXXVIII.</h2> + +<h3>PRESIDENCY OF LORENZO SNOW.</h3> + + +<p>September 13, 1898, the quorum of Twelve Apostles met at Salt Lake City and +chose Lorenzo Snow President of the Church. President Snow chose George Q. +Cannon and Joseph F. Smith as his counselors.</p> + +<p>President Snow was born in Ohio, April 3, 1814. While yet a young man, he +went to Kirtland, where he became acquainted <a name="Page_173" id="Page_173"></a>with the Prophet Joseph. +Joining the Church, he was soon in the field as a missionary, traveling +through the States preaching the gospel. From Nauvoo, he went on a mission +to England, returning in 1843 with a large company of Saints. He was +ordained a member of the Twelve Apostles, February 12, 1849, at Salt Lake +City. Shortly afterwards he was called on a mission to Italy. His labors, +however, were not confined to that country, as he organized many branches +of the Church in other European lands.</p> + +<p><a name="snow" id="snow"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 300px;"> +<img src="images/image89.jpg" width="300" height="385" alt="PRESIDENT LORENZO SNOW." title="" /> +<span class="caption">PRESIDENT LORENZO SNOW.</span> +</div> + +<p><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174"></a>In 1853, President Snow removed to Brigham City, where for many years he +united the people in a system of co-operation, which rapidly built up the +country. At the completion of the Salt Lake temple he was called to preside +in that sacred building.</p> + +<p>Though so far advanced in years when called to stand at the head of the +Church, President Snow was quite strong in body and in mind. During the +summer of 1899, with a party of Apostles and, other leading men, he visited +many of the stakes of Zion in their conference gatherings. President Snow +said he had a special message to deliver to the Saints which was that they +should in the future more fully observe the law of tithing. This law had +been neglected in the past, but now, the Prophet said, the Lord expected +the Saints to observe this commandment. It is pleasing to state that most +of the Saints heeded the timely instruction and warning, and there was +great improvement in keeping this law of the Lord.</p> + +<p>When President Snow took charge of the affairs of the Church, it was +largely in debt, owing to the troubles incident to the confiscation of its +property by the government some time before. Now, because of the +improvement in the payment of tithes and offerings, the First Presidency +were able to pay some of the debts of the Church, and make arrangements for +the payment of others as they became due.</p> + +<p>President Snow put new life into many departments of the Church. The School +system which the Church had established received much attention. The +Latter-day Saints' University at Salt Lake City was established, and one of +its buildings was erected. Many other Church buildings were planned and +begun.</p> + +<p>At an election held in the fall of 1898, Brigham H. Roberts <a name="Page_175" id="Page_175"></a>was elected to +represent Utah in Congress. At this election the people, as they had done +many times before, voted as either Democrats or Republicans, and both +"Mormons" and non-"Mormons" were elected to office. Now, however, some +anti-"Mormon" newspapers, assisted by many of the Utah sectarian preachers, +made a great stir. The enemies of the Saints continued to send a flood of +falsehood all over the country. Much excitement was worked up and a +determined effort was made to keep Utah's representative out of Congress.</p> + +<p>Representative Roberts fought bravely for his own and his people's rights, +but once more hatred against "Mormonism" overcame better judgment, and he +was refused admission to the seat to which he was fairly elected, on the +ground that he had obeyed the law of plural marriage.</p> + +<p>August 19, 1899, the Utah volunteers returned from the Philippines where +they had proved themselves valiant soldiers in the service of their +country. A grand celebration was held in Salt Lake City in their honor.</p> + +<p>On April 12, 1901, President George Q. Cannon died at Monterey, California, +where he had gone for his health. This great and good man had done much for +the Church, and he was greatly beloved by the Saints.</p> + +<p>Elder Heber J. Grant, with Horace S. Ensign, Louis A. Kelsch, and Alma O. +Taylor, left Salt Lake City July 24, 1901, for a mission to Japan. They +landed in that country August 12, and at once set to work learning the +language. September 1, of that year, Elder Grant dedicated the land for the +preaching of the Gospel. Since that time a good beginning has been made in +the distribution of the printed word, and the Book of Mormon has been +translated into Japanese and printed.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176"></a>President Snow died after a brief illness at his home in Salt Lake City, +October 10, 1901. He was not president of the Church long, but during the +three years of his presidency, the Lord blessed him and gave him power to +do much good.</p> + +<p>Four days before he died, President Snow addressed the Saints assembled in +conference in the Tabernacle at Salt Lake City. The burden of this, his +last message was, "God bless you." He urged the presidents of stakes and +the high counselors to take upon themselves more of the responsibility of +looking after the affairs of the Church, so that the Twelve could devote +their time to their special work of preaching the gospel.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. Lorenzo Snow as President. 2. Election of B.H. Roberts to +Congress. 3. The Mission to Japan.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who constituted the fifth Presidency of the +Church? 2. Tell what you can about Lorenzo Snow. 3. What is the law of +tithing? 4. What message did President Snow deliver regarding the law of +tithing? 5. Why was the Church in debt? 6. Who opened the Japanese mission?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XXXIX" id="CHAPTER_XXXIX"></a>CHAPTER XXXIX.</h2> + +<h3>PRESIDENCY OF JOSEPH F. SMITH.</h3> + + +<p>The First Presidency of the Church was reorganized for the sixth time +October 17, 1901. Joseph F. Smith was chosen president, and he selected for +his counselors, John R. Winder and Anthon H. Lund. At a special conference +held in Salt Lake City November 10, 1901, this presidency was sustained by +the vote of the Church.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177"></a>From his boyhood President Smith has been an active, earnest member of the +Church over which he now presides. His father was Hyrum Smith the +Patriarch, brother to the Prophet Joseph. You will remember how these two +brothers were so closely together in the beginning of the Church, and how +they were both killed in Carthage jail.</p> + +<p>Joseph was thus left fatherless when he was a boy six years old. As a boy +he had not the privilege of going every day to school or of playing +peacefully in the door-yard of his home. Mobs drove them out of Missouri, +and then out of Nauvoo. They had little peace. Two years after his father +had been killed, Joseph's mother, with her family, had to leave her home, +along with the Saints, and undertake the long westward journey. Although +Joseph was only eight years old at the time, he successfully drove a team +of oxen for three hundred miles over the rolling prairies of Iowa. This was +not an easy task for the boy, for the road was often steep or muddy, and +many older drivers had breakdowns on the way.</p> + +<p>In chapter 27 of this history you are told of the Saints stopping for a +time at Winter Quarters, getting ready to move westward. Joseph and his +mother were with them. Most of his time was spent in herding his mother's +cattle. And he was a good herdboy, too. He saw to it that none of them was +lost. There were Indians in that country then, and often they would steal +cattle and horses. One day Joseph had a narrow escape. It happened this +way:</p> + +<p>Joseph and another boy had driven their cattle to the herd-grounds, and +they were having a good time on their horses which they rode. Suddenly, +they heard the whoop of Indians. On looking up, they saw a band of about +thirty savages riding toward them. They were naked, their bodies <a name="Page_178" id="Page_178"></a>daubed +with clay and their hair and faces painted! Joseph's first thought was not +about himself, but about his cattle. If the Indians should drive off his +cattle, the family would not be able to go to the Valley next spring. So, +off he rode to try to save his stock, the Indians coming in the same +direction. They whooped and yelled so that the cattle ran off in great +fright. Then the Indians singled out Joseph, for they wanted his horse, +which was a good one and could run. The chase was now on in earnest. Joseph +turned. Some of the Indians followed, while others slacked to head him off. +Soon he was between two parties of Indians. After a time they closed in on +him. One of the Indians took him by the arm, and another by the leg, and +lifted him from his horse, letting him fall to the ground. The horses +jumped over him, but did not hurt him. The Indians rode off with the horse, +but did not get the cattle.</p> + +<p>This is only one of the many thrilling incidents in the life of President +Smith as a boy. When his mother was ready to move West, Joseph drove two +yoke of oxen hitched to a heavily loaded wagon across the plains, a +distance of one thousand miles. He drove into Salt Lake City September 23, +1848.</p> + +<p>In those early days, even the boys had to work hard to help make a living +in the new country. Joseph again herded cattle, besides doing work on the +farm and in the canyon. How, then, did the boy get his education? Crossing +the plains, when they were resting in the tent or by the camp fire, +Joseph's mother taught him to read the Bible, and from that day to this, he +has been reading good books. You see, he started early in the reading of +the best books, and that means a lot. Joseph's mother was a very good and +wise woman, and he says that much of his success in life is <a name="Page_180" id="Page_180"></a>due to her +teachings, and the fact that he heeded her counsels.</p> + +<p><a name="first_presidency" id="first_presidency"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 404px;"> +<img src="images/image92.jpg" width="404" height="300" alt="THE FIRST PRESIDENCY, 1916" title="" /> +<span class="caption">THE FIRST PRESIDENCY, 1916</span> +</div> + +<p>When Joseph was fourteen years old his mother died. When he was fifteen he +went on a mission to the Hawaiian Islands. He worked a number of months in +California to earn money to pay his passage to the Islands. He was greatly +blessed on this mission.</p> + +<p>This small history cannot tell you of the many missions President Smith has +filled since that first one. Many times he has been back to the Hawaiian +Islands, and many times to the States and to Europe. Every boy and girl +ought to read the detailed story of President Smith's life. President Smith +is still with us. Most of the Sunday School boys and girls have seen him +and heard him speak. He is a great and good man. He is the prophet of the +Lord to us. Let us be thankful that we live in a day when we can have such +men with us to show us by the example of their lives how to be good boys +and girls, good men and women.</p> + +<p>President John R. Winder was born at Biddenden near London, England, +December 11, 1821. He joined the Church when he was a young man and +emigrated to Utah in 1853, since which time he took an active and leading +part in Church matters. In the year 1877 he was chosen to be the second +counselor to Presiding Bishop Wm. B. Preston, which position he held until +he was called to the First Presidency. When the Salt Lake Temple was +nearing completion, he was given special charge of the work, and at the +dedication of the Temple he became the first assistant to President Snow. +He died March 27, 1910. He lived to a good old age, active and strong to +the last. He claimed that this was due to his having obeyed the laws of +God, especially those contained in the Word of Wisdom.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181"></a>President Anthon H. Lund came from Denmark. He was born in the city of +Aalborg in that far-away country May 14, 1844. Many interesting stories are +told of him as a boy-preacher of the gospel in his native land. When he was +called upon to give his first report at conference he was lifted upon a +table that he might be better seen and heard. He came to Utah when eighteen +years old, and settled in Sanpete county. He was made an Apostle in 1889. +He has filled a number of foreign missions, and at one time he presided +over the European mission. He has also been president of the Manti Temple.</p> + +<p>At the death of President Winder, President Lund was chosen First Counselor +to President Smith, and Elder John Henry Smith, one of the quorum of the +Twelve, was called to be the Second Counselor. He was born at Carbunca, +near Council Bluffs, Iowa, September 18, 1848. His father was George A. +Smith, at one time Counselor to President Brigham Young. He came to Utah in +early days, and filled many missions at home and abroad. He died Oct. 13, +1911. President Smith, during his life, became known and well-beloved far +and near. He was always kind and cheerful, and he had a way with him which +won the hearts of all who came to know him.</p> + +<p>Elder Charles W. Penrose, of the Council of the Twelve, was chosen to +succeed John Henry Smith in the First Presidency, December 7, 1911. +President Penrose was born February 4, 1832, at Camberwell, London, +England. When he was four years old he could read the Bible. At eighteen he +joined the Church, and being so well versed in the scriptures he was soon +called on a mission. For ten years he traveled about his native land +preaching the gospel, healing many of the sick and organizing branches of +the Church. He suffered <a name="Page_182" id="Page_182"></a>from hardships and persecution, but he kept right +on until he was released, when he emigrated to Utah. Since then President +Penrose has filled many missions. He is a clear, forceful speaker, and he +has written much on doctrinal subjects. He was for many years editor of the +<i>Deseret News</i>. He wrote a number of our best songs. He was called and +ordained to be an apostle and set apart as one of the Twelve, July 7, 1904. +He presided over the European Mission from December, 1906, to June, 1910.</p> + +<p>In January, 1903, Reed Smoot was elected Senator to represent Utah in the +Congress of the United States at Washington. As he is a leading official in +the Church, some anti-"Mormons" objected to his retaining the office to +which he was elected. They sent a protest to the Senate, and that body +appointed a committee to investigate the charges made. President Smith and +many of the brethren were summoned to Washington to give their testimony. +All of this led to much agitation and misrepresentation against the Church. +Senator Smoot retained his seat.</p> + +<p>During recent years the Church has been growing both at home and abroad. +Property is being acquired in many parts of the world, and mission houses +are being erected. Carthage Jail, in Illinois, the farm containing the +birthplace of the Prophet Joseph Smith, and a large part of the Temple +grounds at Independence, Missouri, have been purchased by the Church.</p> + +<p>In the year 1905 a monument of polished granite was erected and a +comfortable and commodious cottage was built on the site of the Prophet's +birth, on the farm purchased by the Church, in Sharon, Windsor County, +Vermont. The monument is 50 feet and 10 inches high and weighs nearly 100 +tons. The shaft is 38-3/4 feet long, each foot corresponding <a name="Page_183" id="Page_183"></a>to one year +of the Prophet's life. The cottage is built around the original hearthstone +of the old Smith home. On December 23rd, 1905—the one hundredth +anniversary of the birth of the Prophet—this cottage and monument were +dedicated by President Joseph F. Smith, who, with a number of the leading +brethren of the Church and a few Saints, had gone to Vermont for that +purpose. The monument contains a written description of the Prophet's +testimony and stands as a silent witness of the great work he was called +upon by the Lord to perform.</p> + +<p><a name="smith_monument" id="smith_monument"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 544px;"> +<img src="images/image94.jpg" width="544" height="300" alt="JOSEPH SMITH MONUMENT AND MEMORIAL COTTAGE." title="" /> +<span class="caption">JOSEPH SMITH MONUMENT AND MEMORIAL COTTAGE.</span> +</div> + +<p>For many years past, the Saints had been making settlements in Mexico, and +establishing themselves there in good homes. In the year 1912 the +disturbances in the country broke out into civil war, and because of the +dangers attendant on the fighting between various factions, most of the +Latter-day Saints had to leave the country and their possessions and come +to the United States.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184"></a>Two new Temples are now being erected, one in Alberta, Canada, and another +at Laie, on the island of Oahu, Hawaiian or Sandwich Islands. Work on the +Canadian Temple was begun in 1913, and the one at Hawaii was commenced in +the summer of 1915. The building of these Temples indicate that the great +work for the dead is being energetically carried out by the Church.</p> + +<p>In the summer of 1914, the great European war broke out, which has caused +the death and crippling of millions, and brought misery untold to the +nations engaged in it. Very likely this war is the greatest the world has +ever known. Nearly all our missionaries have had to be withdrawn from +Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Holland, and France, and very few +have been left in Great Britain and the Scandinavian countries. We +sympathize with all these nations, and can only hope that the Lord will +make it possible, after the war, that the missionaries will be better able +to reach the people with the gospel of peace and salvation.</p> + +<p>At this writing (December, 1916) there are seventy-three stakes of Zion in +the Church, and over eight hundred wards. The quorums of the Priesthood +have been more thoroughly organized, and have regular courses of study in +their classes. The helping organizations of the Church, such as the Sunday +Schools, the Mutual Improvement Associations, and others are doing a +splendid work. The Church has recently completed a beautiful Church office +building in Salt Lake City. The first and second floors of this building +are occupied by the First Presidency and other Church officials. The third +floor is devoted to the Historian's work, and the large collection of books +and Church records. The fourth floor is used by the Genealogical Society, +an organization whose purpose is to help people with their records, <a name="Page_185" id="Page_185"></a>and +gather a library of genealogical books, which will help them do the work in +the Temples for their dead.</p> + +<p><a name="office" id="office"></a></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 412px;"> +<img src="images/image95.jpg" width="412" height="300" alt="CHURCH OFFICE BUILDING" title="" /> +<span class="caption">CHURCH OFFICE BUILDING</span> +</div> + +<hr style='width: 45%;' /> + +<p>Here ends our history for the present. The little tree (mentioned in +Chapter I) planted by God and nurtured by his servants, has in the space of +eighty-six years grown to a large, beautiful tree, whose branches, as it +were, protect thousands of people, and whose fruit nourishes a multitude. +The enemy has striven hard to uproot and destroy it, but every effort has +only made it cling more firmly to the nourishing earth.</p> + +<p>The Church is growing in strength and power to save the human family. That +is its mission. It will never be overcome, or left to other people. "No +unhallowed hand <a name="Page_186" id="Page_186"></a>can stop the work from progressing," said the Prophet +Joseph, "persecution may rage; mobs may combine; armies may assemble, +calumny may defame, but the truth of God will go forth boldly, nobly, and +independently till it has penetrated every continent; visited every clime, +swept every country; and sounded in every ear; till the purposes of God +shall be accomplished, and the Great Jehovah shall say the work is done."</p> + +<p>And now let all the boys and girls who read this book remember what the +Lord expects of them. He must have men and women to carry on the great work +begun so nobly and so well. If He is to use you, you must make your lives +worthy; you must grow in wisdom and power and faith and goodness; be pure +and strong in mind and body; be studious, earnest, prayerful, noble, and +brave to do the right; then God will be pleased to use you, and you +yourselves will become makers of a glorious future history.</p> + +<p><b>Topics.</b>—1. President Joseph F. Smith. 2. John R. Winder. 3. Anthon H. +Lund. 4. John Henry Smith. 5. Charles W. Penrose. 6. The trouble in Mexico. +7. The great war in Europe. 8. Progress of the Church.</p> + +<p><b>Questions and Review.</b>—1. Who was President Joseph F. Smith's father? 2. +Describe some of his boyhood surroundings. 3. Tell about his adventure with +the Indians. 4. How did he cross the plains? 5. Tell of his missions. 6. +How long has he been President of the Church? 7. How many of you have seen +him and heard him speak? 8. Name President Smith's counselors. 9. Tell +something about each of them. 10. What historical places has the Church +purchased and improved? 11. Why have the Saints had to leave Mexico? 12. +Review the great European war. 13. What might be the outcome of this war? +14. Where are new temples being built? 15. How many stakes and wards are +there now in the Church 16. What did the Prophet Joseph Smith say about the +future of the Church?</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187"></a></p> +<h2><a name="FIRST_PRESIDENCIES_OF_THE_CHURCH" id="FIRST_PRESIDENCIES_OF_THE_CHURCH"></a>FIRST PRESIDENCIES OF THE CHURCH.</h2> + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>First.—1833-1844.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Frederick G. Williams.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Joseph Smith.</td><td align='left'>Sidney Rigdon.</td><td align='left'>Hyrum Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>William Law.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Second.—1847-1877.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Heber C. Kimball,</td><td align='left'>Willard Richards,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Brigham Young.</td><td align='left'>George A. Smith,</td><td align='left'>Jedediah M. Grant,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>John W. Young.</td><td align='left'>Daniel H. Wells.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Third.—1880-1887.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>John Taylor.</td><td align='left'>George Q. Cannon.</td><td align='left'>Joseph F. Smith.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Fourth.—1889-1898.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Wilford Woodruff.</td><td align='left'>George Q. Cannon.</td><td align='left'>Joseph F. Smith.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Fifth.—1898-1901.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Lorenzo Snow.</td><td align='left'>George Q. Cannon.</td><td align='left'>Joseph F. Smith.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Sixth.—1901-</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'><i>President.</i></td><td align='left'><i>First Counselor.</i></td><td align='left'><i>Second Counselors.</i></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>John R. Winder.</td><td align='left'>Anthon H. Lund.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Joseph F. Smith.</td><td align='left'>Anthon H. Lund.</td><td align='left'>John Henry Smith.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Charles W. Penrose.</td></tr> +</table></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188"></a></p> +<h2><a name="NAMES_OF_THE_TWELVE_APOSTLES" id="NAMES_OF_THE_TWELVE_APOSTLES"></a>NAMES OF THE TWELVE APOSTLES.</h2> + +<h3>SINCE THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH.</h3> + + + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align='left'>1 Thomas B. Marsh,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>2 David W. Patten,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>3 Brigham Young,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>4 Heber C. Kimball,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>5 Orson Hyde,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>6 William E. McLellin,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>7 Parley P. Pratt,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>8 Luke S. Johnson,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>9 William Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>10 Orson Pratt,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>11 John F. Boynton,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>12 Lyman E. Johnson,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>13 John E. Page,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>14 John Taylor,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>15 Wilford Woodruff,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>16 George A. Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>17 Willard Richards,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>18 Lyman Wight,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>19 Amasa M. Lyman,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>20 Ezra T. Benson,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>21 Charles C. Rich,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>22 Lorenzo Snow,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>23 Erastus Snow,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>24 Franklin D. Richards,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>25 George Q. Cannon,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>26 Joseph F. Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>27 Brigham Young, Jun.,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>28 Albert Carrington,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>29 Moses Thatcher,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>30 Francis M. Lyman,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>31 John Henry Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>32 George Teasdale,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>33 Heber J. Grant,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>34 John W. Taylor,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>35 Marriner W. Merrill,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>36 Anthon H. Lund,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>37 Abraham H. Cannon,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>38 Matthias F. Cowley,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>39 Abraham O. Woodruff,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>40 Rudger Clawson,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>41 Reed Smoot,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>42 Hyrum M. Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>43 Geo. Albert Smith,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>44 Chas. W. Penrose,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>45 George F. Richards,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>46 Orson F. Whitney,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>47 David O. McKay,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>48 Anthony W. Ivins,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>49 Joseph F. Smith. Jun.,</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>50 James E. Talmage.</td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> Not.—If we say that the Father and the Son came to Joseph +because of his prayer, we might conclude that every boy who prayed should +receive such a visit. No; the time had come for the ushering in of a new +dispensation, etc. To bring out this thought is the idea of this question.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2_2"><span class="label">[2]</span></a> Jensen's Historical Record, page 838. Whitney's History of +Utah. Vol. I, page 274.</p></div> + +</div> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A Young Folks' History of the Church +of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, by Nephi Anderson + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY *** + +***** This file should be named 16534-h.htm or 16534-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/5/3/16534/ + +Produced by Kevin Handy, Josephine Paolucci and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/16534-h/images/image01.jpg b/16534-h/images/image01.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..92f730a --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image01.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image01a.jpg b/16534-h/images/image01a.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc08e4f --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image01a.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image12.jpg b/16534-h/images/image12.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..55cee50 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image12.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image17.jpg b/16534-h/images/image17.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2a4466 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image17.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image21.jpg b/16534-h/images/image21.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f688ceb --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image21.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image26.jpg b/16534-h/images/image26.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d71a81 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image26.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image32.jpg b/16534-h/images/image32.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6a5cad --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image32.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image37.jpg b/16534-h/images/image37.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8dc0ae4 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image37.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image38.jpg b/16534-h/images/image38.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bbc5d43 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image38.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image39.jpg b/16534-h/images/image39.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e08aaa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image39.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image44.jpg b/16534-h/images/image44.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f92df7 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image44.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image51.jpg b/16534-h/images/image51.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8188c43 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image51.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image52.jpg b/16534-h/images/image52.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..500ef2c --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image52.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image56.jpg b/16534-h/images/image56.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f728bc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image56.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image63.jpg b/16534-h/images/image63.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2451bfe --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image63.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image67.jpg b/16534-h/images/image67.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..250da03 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image67.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image69.jpg b/16534-h/images/image69.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..83b58eb --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image69.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image70.jpg b/16534-h/images/image70.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d35c283 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image70.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image79.jpg b/16534-h/images/image79.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e4e8eb --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image79.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image80.jpg b/16534-h/images/image80.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a92173c --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image80.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image81.jpg b/16534-h/images/image81.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..43b7480 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image81.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image83.jpg b/16534-h/images/image83.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..34f88f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image83.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image85.jpg b/16534-h/images/image85.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a6e865 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image85.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image87.jpg b/16534-h/images/image87.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..219a028 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image87.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image89.jpg b/16534-h/images/image89.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0de259a --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image89.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image92.jpg b/16534-h/images/image92.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5478231 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image92.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image94.jpg b/16534-h/images/image94.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd6c136 --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image94.jpg diff --git a/16534-h/images/image95.jpg b/16534-h/images/image95.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..14146fa --- /dev/null +++ b/16534-h/images/image95.jpg diff --git a/16534.txt b/16534.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1283fa --- /dev/null +++ b/16534.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5623 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Young Folks' History of the Church of +Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, by Nephi Anderson + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: A Young Folks' History of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints + +Author: Nephi Anderson + +Release Date: August 16, 2005 [EBook #16534] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY *** + + + + +Produced by Kevin Handy, Josephine Paolucci and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Transcriber's note: Minor typos in text corrected and footnotes moved to +end of text.] + +[Illustration: JOSEPH SMITH, THE PROPHET.] + +[Illustration: HYRUM SMITH, THE PATRIARCH.] + + + + +A Young Folks' History + +OF THE + +CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS + +By NEPHI ANDERSON + + + "_We have heard with our ears, O God, our fathers have told us, + what Work thou didst in their days, in the time of old_"--_Psalm + xliv:1_. + +Published by the +DESERET SUNDAY SCHOOL UNION +Salt Lake City. Utah +1916 + +_Copyright, 1889, +By Nephi Anderson + +Copyright, 1916, +By Joseph F. Smith, +For the Deseret Sunday School Union_. + + + + +To Parents and Teachers. + + +Studying the history of our country creates patriotism and engenders +loyalty. For the same reason, a study of the history of the Church of Jesus +Christ of Latter-day Saints will implant in our boys and girls a love for +its heroes, a loyalty to its principles, and an appreciation of its +achievements. By a knowledge of the history of the Church, our young people +will prize more highly that heritage given them of God and preserved for +them by the sweat and blood of their fathers. + +The teacher using this little book will understand that it is not +exhaustive, but rather suggestive. The teacher should be in possession of +much more history than is given here. He should fill in much of the +undercurrent of heroism, faith, and devotion exhibited by the characters of +the history, very little of which can be given in the text. The importance +of this larger knowledge on the part of the teacher will be understood by +an examination of the review and questions at the end of each chapter. The +aim in these questions is not only to review the facts of the lesson, but +by suggestions and reference to bring out more fully deductions and +principles. + +It is believed that by combining the topical and the question methods the +best results may be obtained. The topics are to be assigned certain pupils +for treatment. Questions should not be limited to those in the book. The +teacher should find many more to ask. + +Special attention is called to the maps. Have pupils locate each important +place. Quite a number of dates are found in the text. It is not intended +that the pupils should memorize them all. Most of them should be used +merely in fixing the relative time between events. It is suggested that the +pupils be encouraged to refer to the Church works and other books mentioned +in the text. + +For further preparation the teacher is referred to "The History of the +Church," "Cannon's Life of Joseph Smith," "Whitney's History of Utah." The +"Faith Promoting Series," Evan's "Hundred Years of Mormonism," etc., will +give much interesting and valuable information. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +To Parents and Teachers + +CHAPTER I. +A Parable + +CHAPTER II. +The First Vision + +CHAPTER III. +The Angel Moroni + +CHAPTER IV. +The Sacred Plates + +CHAPTER V. +The Book of Mormon + +CHAPTER VI. +The Three Witnesses + +CHAPTER VII. +The Priesthood Restored + +CHAPTER VIII. +Organization of the Church + +CHAPTER IX. +Persecution of Joseph + +CHAPTER X. +The Mission to the Indians + +CHAPTER XI. +Removal to Ohio + +CHAPTER XII. +The Land of Zion + +CHAPTER XIII. +Persecution in Jackson County + +CHAPTER XIV. +Expulsion from Jackson County + +CHAPTER XV. +Zion's Camp + +CHAPTER XVI. +The Church at Kirtland + +CHAPTER XVII. +The Twelve Apostles--The Seventies--Kirtland Temple + +CHAPTER XVIII. +The Mission to England + +CHAPTER XIX. +Far West + +CHAPTER XX. +Haun's Mill Massacre + +CHAPTER XXI. +Driven from Missouri + +CHAPTER XXII. +In Missouri Prisons + +CHAPTER XXIII. +Nauvoo + +CHAPTER XXIV. +The Martyrdom + +CHAPTER XXV. +Expulsion from Illinois + +CHAPTER XXVI. +The Battle of Nauvoo + +CHAPTER XXVII. +Westward + +CHAPTER XXVIII. +The Mormon Battalion + +CHAPTER XXIX. +The Pioneers + +CHAPTER XXX. +Great Salt Lake City + +CHAPTER XXXI. +Growth of Utah and the Church + +CHAPTER XXXII. +The "Utah War" + +CHAPTER XXXIII. +The "Utah War" (Concluded) + +CHAPTER XXXIV. +Prosperity + +CHAPTER XXXV. +The "Crusade" + +CHAPTER XXXVI. +The Presidency of Wilford Woodruff + +CHAPTER XXXVII. +Temple Building + +CHAPTER XXXVIII. +The Presidency of Lorenzo Snow + +CHAPTER XXXIX. +The Presidency of Joseph F. Smith + +APPENDIX. + +First Presidencies of the Church +List of Twelve Apostles + +MAPS. +Fayette and Kirtland +Missouri and Illinois +Routes of Mormon Battalion and Pioneers + +ILLUSTRATIONS. +Joseph Smith, the Prophet +Hyrum Smith the Patriarch +Brigham Young +The Hill Cumorah +The Three Witnesses +Sidney Rigdon +President Brigham Young +The Kirtland Temple +President Heber C. Kimball +Haun's Mill +The Nauvoo House +The Nauvoo Mansion +Carthage Jail +A Pioneer Train +Salt Lake Valley in 1847 +The Old Fort +Salt Lake Tabernacle (Interior) +Salt Lake Tabernacle (Exterior) +President John Taylor +President Wilford Woodruff +The Pioneer Monument +Salt Lake Temple and Grounds +President Lorenzo Snow +The First Presidency, 1916 +Joseph Smith Monument and Memorial Cottage +Church Office Building + + + + +A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY + +OF THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +A PARABLE. + + +Once upon a time the owner of a very large garden planted therein a tree, +the fruit of which was very precious and of great value to all who ate of +it. For a time, the tree grew and bore much good fruit. But the owner of +the garden had an enemy who went about secretly sowing seeds of weeds and +all manner of briers and brush, that they might spread all over the garden +and kill out the good tree which the master had planted. The enemy also +persuaded many of the workmen in the garden to neglect the good tree, and +let the briers and weeds grow up around it and so prevent its growth. Thus +in time the once precious fruit of the good tree became wild and scrubby, +no better than the enemy's trees which grew around it. + +Years passed, and the master, grieving that the precious fruit should have +become so worthless, determined to plant the good tree once more in the +garden. He did not try to clear away a spot for it amid the old, overgrown +parts of the land, but he called upon certain workers to go to a distant +part of the garden where nothing had been planted for a long time, and +there prepare the ground for the planting of the tree. + +These workers were faithful to their master and did as they were told. Very +few of the enemy's noxious weeds were growing in the new soil, so it was +not such hard work to clear the ground and prepare a place for the master +to plant his tree. + +To be better protected against the enemy, the master told his workmen to +build a high, strong wall about that part of the garden. This was all done; +and then one beautiful spring day the owner came with his servants. They +had with them the precious tree taken from some other garden where it had +grown without hindrance from weeds. The tree was planted and put in charge +of other servants to tend it. The warm sun shone on it, the rains came from +heaven to water it, and the tree took firm root and grew. + +Now all the boys and girls who read this book will understand that the +little story I have just told is what is called a _Parable_, meant to make +plainer some facts and truths. I can not tell you all about that tree here, +how it grew and bore fruit, and how many people came and ate of its +delicious fruit, notwithstanding the enemy came again and tried to check +its growth. I say, I cannot tell it to you in the form of a parable, but +will tell it as it actually happened. You may, if you like, imagine in your +own minds the rest of the parable, but the real story you will find more +interesting than any made-up tale can be. + +First, let me explain to you the meaning of the parable. + +The garden means the earth, and the owner is the Lord, who came to the +earth about nineteen hundred years ago to die for the sins of the world. He +also planted the good tree, that is, He brought the gospel and taught it +to his followers. The enemy is the evil one, the devil, who stirred up men +to work against the gospel and to kill those who obeyed it. He also mixed +his lies with Christ's truths, until in time the pure gospel was not to be +found on the earth. + +This was the condition of the world for hundreds of years. Then the Lord +wished to restore the true gospel and again establish his Church on the +earth. He therefore chose a place where all would have the right to believe +the truth and be protected in that liberty. The Lord, therefore, moved upon +Columbus to discover this land of America. + +The servants spoken of, whom the Lord sent to prepare the land for the +planting, were all those great and good men whom you have read about in +your American history: Washington, Jefferson, Franklin, and many others. +You will remember how these men loved right and liberty, and how they +worked so hard for it; and in reading the history of these men we can +plainly see that the Lord was with them and helped them. These men built +the high wall, which means that they made just laws that would protect the +people and let them worship God in any way they thought right. + +Thus was the way prepared for the gospel to be restored again to the earth; +and the Lord himself came from heaven, also his servants Moroni, Peter, +James, and John to bring the glad tidings to all who live on the earth. + +Then the Lord called some more servants to preach the gospel to the world +and build up his Church. The first and greatest of these servants is known +by the name of Joseph Smith, the Prophet. How the Lord called him to this +great work and delivered to him the gospel will be told you in the next +chapter. + +Topics.--1. The Parable. 2. Explanation. + +Questions and Review.--1. Name some of Christ's first disciples. 2: Tell +how some of them were killed. 3. How long was the world without the gospel? +4. Tell how Columbus discovered America. 5. Who were the Pilgrims? 6. What +was the Revolutionary war about? 7. What is the Constitution of the United +States? 8. Find out what it says about religious liberty. 9. Why is America +the "Land of liberty?" + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +THE FIRST VISION. + + +At the time when Thomas Jefferson was president of the United States, there +was born among the Green Mountains of Vermont a boy who was to become the +great prophet of the last days. The hills and valleys of Vermont look +beautiful in the summer, but at the time here spoken of they were no doubt +covered with snow, for it was the 23rd of December, 1805, in the town of +Sharon, Windsor county, that Joseph Smith first saw the light of the world. + +Joseph was named after his father, whose name was Joseph. His mother's +maiden name was Lucy Mack. Joseph had five brothers and three sisters whose +names were Alvin, Hyrum, (then Joseph), Samuel, William, Don Carlos, +Sophronia, Catherine and Lucy; so you see that there was a large family for +the father and mother to take care of. Joseph's parents were poor and had +to work hard for a living, so when the boys were old enough they had to +help on the farm; this they willingly, did. For this reason Joseph did not +go to school much, but he learned to read, to write fairly well, and to +work some examples in arithmetic. Though Joseph did not get much of an +education at school, yet he was a great student; and then God became his +teacher, so that before he died, as you will see, he became one of the most +learned men in the world. + +When Joseph was ten years old they all moved from Vermont to Palmyra, in +the western part of the state of New York. Four years later they moved +again to the small town of Manchester, in Ontario, now Wayne County, New +York. + +While the family was living at Manchester there arose a great religious +excitement all through the country. The different religious sects held many +meetings and tried to get people to join them. Joseph was now in his +fifteenth year and he also became interested, as his parents had always +taught him to believe in God and the Bible. Joseph thought he would like to +join the true church of Christ, but what troubled him was to know which of +all these sects was the true church. He could see that all of them could +not be true, as God surely would not have a great many churches, one +striving against the other; also, no doubt, he had read in the Bible that +there was but "one Lord, one faith, one baptism," etc., which the Lord +accepted. Joseph went first to one meeting, then to another. His mother and +some of his brothers and sisters had joined the Presbyterians, but Joseph +could not make up his mind what to do. + +But there is a way by which anyone may find out which is the true church +and therefore which to join, and every boy and girl that reads this book +should remember it. It is this: Ask God. Joseph did not know this until one +day while reading in his Testament he came to the fifth verse in the first +chapter of James, which reads as follows: + + "If any of you lack wisdom, let him ask of God, that giveth to all + men liberally and upbraideth not; and it shall be given him." + +This was just the thing. God had surely led him to read that verse. Joseph +certainly lacked wisdom, and here was a way to find out what he wanted to +know about the sects. The Lord would tell him. All he had to do was to ask. +How simple it was! + +On a beautiful morning in the spring of the year 1820, Joseph decided to +ask the Lord for wisdom. He went out into a grove near his father's house, +and after looking around to make sure that he was alone, he kneeled down on +the grass under the trees and began to pray. No sooner had he begun than +some awful power which he could not see took hold of him and made it nearly +impossible for him to speak. It soon became dark around the boy, and Joseph +thought the unseen power would kill him; but he struggled hard and tried to +pray to God for help. + +Just at that moment Joseph saw a great light coming down from above, and +then the evil power left him. The light was brighter than the sun, and as +it came down and touched the tops of the trees, Joseph wondered why it did +not burn them. Then it shone all around him, and in the light, standing in +the air above him, he saw two persons who looked like men, only they were +shining with a glory that can not be described. One of them, pointing to +the other, said to the boy: + +"_Joseph, this is my Beloved Son; hear him_." + +Joseph then asked which of all the religions was right, and great was his +surprise when he was told that none was right; that they all had gone +astray from the truth; and that he must join none of them. Joseph was told +many other things, among which was that some day the true gospel would be +made known to him. Then they left him alone in the woods. + +What a wonderful thing! God the Father and his Son Jesus Christ had +actually come to Joseph. He had seen them and they had spoken to him. That +same Jesus of whom he had read in his Bible had come from heaven and his +Father had come with him to introduce him to the boy praying in the woods! + +This was the first vision and the beginning of the gospel in our day; and +by thinking carefully about this vision, we may see that it teaches us many +things. First, that God has a body like unto man's. Second, that the Father +and the Son are two persons, not one, as many in the world believe. Third, +that the many religions which man has made are not accepted by God. Fourth, +that God has not ceased to give revelations to men on the earth. + +Topics.--1. Joseph's Boyhood. 2. The Vision. 3. What may be learned from +the vision. + +Questions and Review.--1. When and where was Joseph Smith born? 2. To +what places did Joseph move? 3. What led Joseph to ask God for wisdom? 4. +Repeat James I:5. 5. Why can not all the sects in the world be right? 6. +Did the Father and the Son come to Joseph solely because of this prayer?[1] +7. Why did the evil one try to destroy Joseph? 8. What may we learn from +this vision? + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +THE ANGEL MORONI. + + +When Joseph told of his vision to some of his friends he was surprised to +find that they did not believe him, but made fun of what he said. The +strangest thing to the boy was that the preachers of religion, instead of +being glad at such glorious news, told him it was from the devil, and that +God did not give any more revelations from heaven. All such things had +ceased with the apostles of old, they said. Another strange thing was that +these preachers began to tell untruths about him, and seemed to hate him +for what he told. Still Joseph would not deny his story. "I have actually +seen a vision," he said again and again. "I know it, and I know that God +knows it, and I dare not deny it." + +So three years went by. + +On the evening of September 21, 1823, after Joseph had retired to his room, +he prayed earnestly that the Lord would forgive him his sins and show him +if he was yet accepted of him. While he was yet praying a very bright light +came into the room, and immediately a person stood in the air by his +bedside. As this person was an angel--a being who had died and had been +resurrected with an immortal body--it is interesting to know how he looked. + +Joseph describes him as a man having on a robe whiter than anything he had +ever seen. His hands were naked, and his arms also, a little above the +wrists. His feet were also bare a little above the ankles. His head and +neck were also bare. Not only was his robe very white but his whole person +shone with great glory. The room was very light, but not so bright as +close around the angel's person. + +The angel called Joseph by name, and said that he was a messenger sent from +God to him, and that his name was Moroni. He told Joseph that God had a +work for him to do, and because of this work, good and evil would be spoken +about his name in all nations. The angel then told him of a record written +on gold plates which were hidden in a hill not far away. This record was a +history of the peoples who had lived on this continent, of whom the Indians +were a part. With the plates was an instrument called the Urim and Thummim, +which God had prepared for the translating of the records. After a time +these things would be given to Joseph, but he must take great care of them +and show them to no one except those to whom the Lord would direct. Then +Moroni showed Joseph, by a vision, the place, where the plates were hidden. + +After giving much other instruction, the light in the room began to gather +in towards the person of the angel, leaving the room again in darkness, +except just around the heavenly visitor, who soon disappeared in a shining +path into heaven. + +Three times that same night Moroni visited Joseph and told him nearly the +same things over again. About the plates Joseph was further told that he +would be tempted to get them for the purpose of getting rich, as the plates +were of great value; but he must not yield to that spirit as they were +sacred, and he must have no other purpose in view than to do the will of +God and build up his kingdom; otherwise he would not get them. At the close +of the third visit it was morning, and then Joseph knew that he had been +talking with the angel nearly all the night. + +That morning Joseph went as usual with his father to work in the field, +but he was so weak that he could do but little. His father, seeing this, +told him to go home. + +On the way, as he was climbing over a fence, Joseph fell helpless to the +ground. After that the first thing he knew was that some one was calling +him by name. Looking up he again saw the angel Moroni, who once more told +him all that he had related the night before. He then told Joseph to go +back to the field and tell his father of the vision and the commandments +which he had received. + +Joseph obeyed at once, and went back and told all he had seen and heard. +His father believed all he said, and told Joseph to obey the angel, as the +teachings and commandments were surely from the Lord. + +Topics.--1. Beginning of persecution. 2. Visit of the angel Moroni. 3. +What Moroni told Joseph. + +Questions and Review.--1. What did people say of Joseph's first vision? +2. Why did people persecute a young boy like Joseph? 3. Name the date of +Moroni's visit. 4. What is an angel? (See Doc. and Cov. Sec. 129, also Key +to Theology, Chap. 12.) 5. Describe the Angel Moroni. 6. Why did the angel +repeat so often his instructions to Joseph? 7. How old was Joseph at this +time? + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE SACRED PLATES. + + +About two miles south of Joseph's home, in Manchester, is a large hill, the +highest in that part of the country. To this place Joseph went on the +morning after the angel's visit, as this was the spot he had seen in his +vision. On the west side of this hill, not far from the top, Joseph found +a large, rounded stone, nearly covered with earth. Prying this up, he found +it to be the lid of a stone box which was buried in the earth. Raising the +lid, he looked in, and there indeed were the sacred treasures about which +the angel had told him. As he stood looking at them in wonder, the angel +Moroni came to his side, and Joseph was taught many things about the +future. He was shown in a vision the glory of the good and the darkness of +the evil. + +[Illustration: THE HILL CUMORAH.] + +Joseph was about to take the plates from the box, when the angel forbade +him, telling him the time had not yet arrived, but that he should come to +the hill in one year from that date when the angel would meet him. This he +must do for four years, at the end of which time, if Joseph was faithful, +the plates would be given to him to translate and publish to the world. + +True to the angel's instructions, Joseph went to the hill Cumorah on the +22nd day of September of each year, at which time Moroni appeared to him +and gave him many teachings about the word of God. + +During all this time Joseph had to labor hard on the farm, sometimes hiring +out to work for others. In October, 1825, he worked for a man by the name +of Josiah Stoal, who took Joseph to the State of Pennsylvania, and set him +with other men, digging for a silver mine which he thought he could find. +After working at it for some time, Joseph persuaded his employer to give it +up. It was from this incident that Joseph's enemies sometimes called him a +"money digger." + +While working for Mr. Stoal, Joseph boarded for some time with the family +of Isaac Hale. Here he met Emma Hale who became his wife, they being +married in the year 1827. + +The four years were now passed. On the 22nd of September, 1827, Joseph went +on his fifth visit to the sacred hill, and on that day the angel Moroni +delivered to him the plates and the Urim and Thummim. He was told to take +good care of them as evil men would try to take them from him; but if he, +Joseph, would do all he could to preserve them, the Lord would come to his +assistance when it would be needed. + +The records which Joseph received consisted of a great many gold plates +nearly as thick as common tin. They were about seven by eight inches in +size, and were bound together by three rings running through holes, in the +edges of the plates. This made the plates like a book, so that they might +be turned as the leaves of a book are turned. On each side of every plate +were engraved beautiful letters, in a language which Joseph could not read. +The book was about six inches thick. A part of it was sealed, and Joseph +was told not to open it, as the time had not yet come for that part to be +made known to the world. + +The Urim and Thummim consisted of two transparent stones, clear as crystal, +set in two rims of a bow. It was used in ancient times by the seers, and +through it they received revelations of things past and future. You may +read about this instrument in the Bible, in Exodus, 28: 30; and Ezra 2: 63. + +As soon as it was known that Joseph had the plates, many evil-minded +persons tried to get them from him, and he had to hide them in different +places to keep them safe. Mobs began to surround his house, men tried to +catch him on the roads or in the fields, and he was even shot at a number +of times. Joseph now saw how timely the angel's warning was. + +Living thus in constant fear, Joseph could not do anything towards +translating the records; so he moved, with his wife, to her old home in +Pennsylvania. While on the way an officer overtook him and searched his +wagon for the plates, but could not find them. They were there, however, +safely hidden in a barrel of beans. + +Arriving in Harmony, where his father-in-law lived, Joseph began to +translate some of the writings on the plates. As Joseph was a slow writer +he did not make much progress, and so he asked the Lord to send someone to +help him. In answer to this request a man by the name of Martin Harris came +to him from Palmyra, New York. Now the work went better. Martin wrote while +Joseph translated. + +They had translated one hundred and sixteen written pages, when Martin +asked Joseph to let him take the writings and show them to some of his +friends. Joseph asked the Lord about it, and the answer was that he must +not; but Martin kept on teasing Joseph till at last the Lord permitted him +to show them to certain persons. But Martin showed them to others, and the +writings were lost. The Lord was displeased at this, and told Joseph not to +translate the same over again, but to write from another part of the plates +which told about the same events. However, the Urim and Thummim was taken +from Joseph for a short time, and when he received it again, his wife Emma +wrote a little for him. + +Now the Lord sent another helper to Joseph. He was a young school teacher, +named Oliver Cowdery, and these two men worked hard at the translation. You +will remember that Joseph was poor, and it seemed they would have to stop +translating and find other work whereby to earn means to live. They were +now also again annoyed by evil men and mobs. + +In the midst of this trouble the Lord sent aid again. A man named Joseph +Knight came to them with provisions, and soon after Joseph was visited by a +young man named David Whitmer, who came to invite them to his father's +house in Fayette, Seneca county, New York. This invitation was gladly +accepted, and Joseph and Oliver went back with him. + +At the Whitmers' they lived and labored in peace until the work was +completed. David, John, and Peter, sons of Peter Whitmer, Sen., helped all +they could, and soon the book was ready to be printed. Martin Harris also +helped Joseph in getting out the work. The first edition of five thousand +copies was printed in Palmyra, in 1830. Since then the book has been +printed in many languages and read by many thousands of people. It is +called THE BOOK OF MORMON. The next chapter will tell you why it is so +called, and a little of what it contains. + +Topics.--1. Joseph's visits to Cumorah. 2. Joseph in Pennsylvania. 3. +Description of the plates and Urim and Thummim. 4. The translation. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where is the hill Cumorah? 2. What did Joseph +find there? 3. Why did not Joseph carry away the plates the first time? 4. +How many visits did he make to Cumorah? 5. Where did Joseph go to work? 6. +Whom did he marry? 7. When did Joseph get the plates? 8. Describe the +plates. 9. What was the Urim and Thummim? 10. Who first helped Joseph to +translate? 11. Who was Oliver Cowdery? 12. What help did the Whitmers give +Joseph? 13. When was the Book of Mormon published? + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +THE BOOK OF MORMON. + + +You will all be interested in knowing what was written on the plates which +the prophet Joseph Smith received from the angel Moroni, so in this chapter +I will tell you very briefly. Some time you will want to read the whole +book, which of course is the better way. + +You have read in your histories and geographies that ruins of great cities +have been found in many places in America, showing that at one time there +were people here more civilized than the Indians. The writings on these +plates told the history of these peoples. + +Six hundred years before Christ was born, there lived in the city of +Jerusalem a prophet by the name of Lehi. He had at that time four sons, +Laman, Lemuel, Sam, and Nephi. The Lord told Lehi that because of the +wickedness of the city, it would soon be destroyed, and if he wished to be +saved he must take his family and travel into the wilderness. This Lehi +did. They went south-eastward until they got to the sea where they built a +ship in which to cross to a promised land. While camping in the wilderness +Lehi sent his sons back to Jerusalem to get some records of their +forefathers, and it was through the faithfulness of Nephi that this was +done. + +After many days of sailing, they at last landed on the west coast of South +America in what is now called Chili. + +The two older boys, Laman and Lemuel were often disobedient to their +father, and many times they brought trouble to the little company. They +also treated their younger brother, Nephi, badly because he would not agree +with them but tried to do as his father told him. + +When Lehi died, Nephi was chosen their leader, but soon Laman and Lemuel +became dissatisfied and again began making trouble. The Lord then told +Nephi to take all who would listen to him and leave the other brothers and +those who upheld them in their evil deeds. + +In this way there became two peoples in the land. Those who went with Nephi +were called Nephites, and those who remained with Laman became Lamanites. +The Nephites built houses, planted fields, and lived as civilized people, +and the Lord often revealed his will to them through prophets and holy men. +The Lamanites became lazy, lived in tents in the forests, and killed wild +animals for their food. Their skins also became dark. + +The greater part of the Book of Mormon is about these two peoples, their +wars with each other, etc. The Nephites ought to have remained a good +people, because the Lord blessed them so much: yet they often did wrong. +The Lord would prosper them until they became rich; then they would become +proud and at last wicked. Then the Lord would allow the Lamanites to come +upon them, and there would be bloody wars. So the story goes for hundreds +of years. + +Both nations became very large and occupied the greater part of North and +South America. + +At times the Lord would raise up prophets who would preach to the wicked. +Usually these teachers were Nephites, but sometimes they were Lamanites. +Sometimes great numbers of Lamanites were converted to the Lord, and when +they once accepted the truth, they did not fall away so easily as their +Nephite brethren. At one time two thousand young men whose parents were +converted Lamanites did valiant service for their country and their +religion. There isn't room to tell you about the story here; but you may +read about it in the Book of Mormon, beginning with the 53rd chapter of +Alma. + +When Nephi separated from his brethren, he went north and settled in a +place they called the Land of Nephi; but after a time the Lamanites again +annoyed them so much that the Lord told Mosiah, who was their leader then +to take the more faithful part of the people and again go northward. This +they did, and found a city called Zarahemla which had been built by a +people who had also come from Jerusalem at the time that city was +destroyed. The Nephites joined with the people of Zarahemla, and for a long +time this city was the capital of the Nephite people. + +In time the Lamanites occupied all of South America except a small part in +the north, on which the Nephites lived. The Nephites' land also extended +far up into North America. + +A little over six hundred years after Lehi landed on this continent, Jesus +appeared unto some of the righteous. Before this, however, there had been a +great storm all over the land, and many of the wicked had been destroyed. +Jesus had been crucified at Jerusalem, had risen from the dead, and now he +came to the Nephites with his resurrected body. He taught them the same +gospel that he had taught in Palestine and chose twelve disciples to preach +and build up his church. For nearly two hundred years the people all +belonged to the Church of Christ, and peace was over all the land. Then +they became wicked again. The Lamanites kept driving the Nephites further +north, until they reached what is now the United States. Around a hill in +the western part of the State of New York, then called Cumorah, what was +left of the Nephites gathered for the last struggle. The Lamanites met +them, and there was a great battle in which all but a very few of the +Nephites were killed. Thus ended the Nephite nation, not quite four hundred +years after Christ, and the Lamanites or Indians have lived here ever +since. + +During all this time the Lord had some good men keep a record of what +happened among the people. In those days they did not write on paper, so +these histories were recorded on plates of metal. These plates were handed +from one man to another, until about the time of the last great battle, a +prophet by the name of Mormon had all the records. He wrote a short account +from them called an abridgment. What he took from each man's record he +called after the writer's name, as the Book of Alma, Book of Helaman, etc., +which we might call names of chapters in Mormon's book. Mormon gave all his +writings to his son Moroni, who wrote a little more on the plates. Moroni +also made a short account of another people who had lived in America before +the Nephites. They were called the Jaredites. Their history is told in the +Book of Ether. + +After Moroni had seen his people destroyed he hid all the records in the +hill Cumorah. + +Topics.--1. What history and geography prove regarding the Book of +Mormon. 2. The Lamanites. 3. The Nephites. 4. Mormon. 5. Moroni. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who was Lehi? 2. Name his sons. (Jacob and +Joseph were born after he left Jerusalem.) 3. Tell about Laman and Lemuel. +4. What kind of boy was Nephi? 5. Why did they leave Jerusalem? 6. Why did +Lehi want the records of his forefathers? 7. Who were the Lamanites? 8. +Describe them. 9. Tell about the Nephites. 10. In what land did these +people live? 11. Why were the Nephites destroyed? 12. What is the Book of +Mormon? 13. Who wrote it? 14. Who had charge of the plates? 15. Where were +they hidden? 16. Who translated them into the English language? + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE THREE WITNESSES. + + +All who read this book ought to turn to one of the first pages of the Book +of Moromon and read a paragraph signed by three men whose names are Oliver +Cowdery, David Whitmer, and Martin Harris. You will notice in that +paragraph that these men bear a most solemn witness that the book is true; +that an angel of God came to them with the plates and laid them before +their eyes; and that they were translated by the gift and power of God. + +The three names signed to this testimony are so important that I wish to +tell you something about these men. You have learned a little about them +already, but here is a good place to tell you something more about their +lives. + +[Illustration: THE THREE WITNESSES.] + +Martin Harris was a farmer who became acquainted with Joseph about the time +he received the plates. You will remember that Martin visited Joseph in +Pennsylvania and did some writing for him. Martin Harris was the man who +took some of the writings copied from the plates, with their translation, +to the city of New York, and showed them to a learned man named Professor +Anthon. The professor seemed pleased with what was shown him, and gave +Martin a certificate that the writings were true characters. He also +offered to assist in translating the plates, but when Martin told him that +an angel had given Joseph the plates, and that part of the book was sealed, +he took back the certificate and tore it up, saying "I can not read a +sealed book." + +If you wish to read something in the Bible that will remind you of this +incident you may find it in Isaiah, 29th chapter, beginning at the 10th +verse. + +Oliver Cowdery became acquainted with Joseph's family, while he boarded +with them one winter when he was teaching school. Hearing of Joseph in +Pennsylvania and the work he was there doing, Oliver prayed to the Lord for +light regarding the matter. Receiving a testimony that it was true, Oliver +went to visit Joseph, and there, as we have seen, he wrote for him. + +David Whitmer was a friend of Oliver's, and the latter told David many +things regarding Joseph. While he was in Pennsylvania, Oliver wrote to +David telling him to come down and see them. David came, found everything +as had been told him, and took the two young men back to his father's home. + +While translating the plates, Joseph came to the passage where it says that +there should be three witnesses to these things. (Book of Mormon, II Nephi +11:3; also 27:12.) On learning this Oliver, David, and Martin asked Joseph +to enquire of the Lord if they might be these witnesses. Joseph did so, and +their request was granted. They, with Joseph then went out into the woods +and prayed so earnestly that an angel came and showed them the sacred +treasure exactly as they have testified. + +For some years these three men continued to take a prominent part in the +affairs of the Church as you will see in future chapters. + +In April, 1838, Oliver Cowdery was cut off from the Church for a number of +things that a Latter-day Saint should not do. He became a lawyer, and went +to Michigan. For ten years he remained away from the Church; but during all +that time he never once denied his testimony that the Book of Mormon is +true. Often men tried to have him deny it, but he stood firm to that truth. + +At a meeting held in Kanesville, Iowa, October 21, 1848, Oliver Cowdery +spoke and bore a strong testimony to the truth of the Book of Mormon and +the work of God. Shortly after he asked to be baptized into the Church +again. He did not ask for position or honor, he wanted simply to be a +member of the Church. His wish was granted and he was baptized. + +While on his way to Utah, Oliver stopped at Richmond, Missouri, to visit +his friends, the Whitmers. While here he died. David Whitmer said of the +event: + + "Oliver died the happiest man I ever saw. After shaking hands with + the family, and kissing his wife and daughter, he said, 'Now I lay + me down for the last time; I am going to my Savior;' and he died + immediately with a smile on his face." + +Martin Harris also left the Church. He was rejected at Kirtland, in 1837, +and remained away from the Church for over thirty years; but all this time +he testified to the truth of the Book of Mormon. In 1870, through the +labors of Elder Edward Stevenson, Martin Harris came to Utah and was again +baptized into the Church of Christ. For five years he continued to tell of +the truth of the work of God in the meetings of the Saints in Utah. He died +July 10th, 1875, at Clarkston, Cache county, Utah. On the afternoon of his +death, he sat propped up in his bed with a Book of Mormon in his hand +bearing his testimony to its truth to those around him. + +David Whitmer, after being with the Saints until 1838, apostatized in +Missouri. He moved to Richmond, Ray county, and lived there to the day of +his death, January 25, 1888. He never rejoined the Church; but he always +bore a strong testimony that the Book of Mormon is true. On his death bed +he said to those around him: + + "I want to say to you all that the Bible and the record of the + Nephites (Book of Mormon) are true, so that you can say that you + heard me bear my testimony on my death-bed. God bless you all. My + trust is in Christ forever, worlds without end. Amen." + +The world can not deny these three men's testimony. Though they left the +Church and in their darkness they opposed the prophet of the Lord, yet +never did they deny what the angel had shown them. On the same page that +the testimony of the three witnesses is recorded, you will also find the +names of eight others who testify to having seen the plates from which the +Book of Mormon was translated. + +Topics.--1. The testimony of the three witnesses. 2. Martin Harris. 3. +Oliver Cowdery. 4. David Whitmer. 5. The eight witnesses. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where is the testimony of the three witnesses +found? 2. What does that testimony say? 3. What other testimony is found in +the Book of Mormon? 4. How did the three get their testimony? 5. Tell of +Martin Harris. 6. Of Oliver Cowdery. 7. Of David Whitmer. 8. Name some +things that make their testimony strong. 9. Name the eight witnesses. + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +THE PRIESTHOOD RESTORED. + + +When Joseph and Oliver were engaged in translating the Book of Mormon they +came to a passage which told of baptism in water for the remission of sins. +This was not quite plain to them. They knew, of course, something of the +many kinds of baptism practiced by the various sects of the day, but if the +religions on the earth at that time were not accepted of the Lord as Joseph +had been told, none of the ministers would have a right to baptize; +besides, the passage in the Book of Mormon said that baptism was for the +remission of sins. The preachers did not teach it this way, though they +could read that it was taught in the same manner by the apostles in +Christ's time. (Acts 2:38.) + +This right or authority to do things in the name of the Lord is called +Priesthood. The apostles and prophets of old had it, but where were they to +look for this power now? + +So Joseph and Oliver on the 15th day of May, 1829, went into the woods to +ask the Lord about it. Their prayer was answered by an angel who told them +that his name was John, called John the Baptist, who had baptized Jesus in +the river Jordan. He said he had come to restore a portion of the holy +Priesthood, even that part which would give them power to baptize for the +remission of sins, but not to lay on hands for the gift of the Holy Ghost. +He promised them that if they were faithful this other power would be +given them later. + +The angel then laid his hands on their heads and ordained them to the +Aaronic Priesthood. He told Joseph to baptize Oliver, after which Oliver +was to baptize Joseph. Then Joseph was to ordain Oliver and Oliver to do +the same to Joseph. All this they gladly did, and immediately they were +filled with great joy. + +Thus was the power to baptize for the remission of sins again given to the +earth. Think what a great event it was! None in all the world had this +power, save two unknown young men in the woods of Pennsylvania. Great +things often have small beginnings. Now there are thousands who have this +blessed power, and no doubt the elder that baptized each of you can trace +his ordination which gave him the authority to do so back to Joseph or +Oliver and from them to John the baptist. + +Sometime in June, 1829, the promise which John made to the young men was +fulfilled. The ancient apostles Peter, James, and John, who held the keys +of this higher power came to Joseph and Oliver and ordained them to the +Melchizedek Priesthood. This gave them the power to lay on hands for the +gift of the Holy Ghost, and also to go forth and administer in the +ordinances of the gospel. + +Topics.--1. Priesthood. 2. Visit of John the Baptist. 3. Visit of Peter, +James, and John. + +Questions and Review.--1. What led Joseph and Oliver to ask the Lord +about baptism? 2. What is baptism for? 3. How is it performed? 4. How did +Joseph and Oliver get the authority to baptize? 5. Who was John the +Baptist? 6. What is Priesthood? 7. Name the two grades of Priesthood. 8. +Who baptized you? 9. How did he get the authority to baptize? 10. Who were +Peter, James, and John? 11. What did they do? 12. Give the date of John's +visit. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH. + + +By this time many people came to Joseph, some out of curiosity, some to be +taught of the wonderful truths which he had received, and some, I am sorry +to say, came to do him harm. As Joseph and Oliver now had power to baptize, +a number of those who believed were baptized by them. + +The time had now come to organize the Church and the Lord revealed to +Joseph that it should be done on the 6th day of April, 1830. Accordingly on +that day six men who had been baptized met at the house of Peter Whitmer, +Sen., at Fayette, Seneca county, state of New York. Their names were Joseph +Smith, Oliver Cowdery, Hyrum Smith, Peter Whitmer, Jr., Samuel H. Smith, +and David Whitmer. + +Joseph tells us what was done at this meeting as follows: + +"Having opened the meeting by solemn prayer to our Heavenly Father, we +proceeded to call on our brethren to know whether they accepted us as their +teachers in the things of the kingdom of God and whether they were +satisfied that we should proceed and be organized as a Church according to +the commandments we had received. To this they all consented. I then laid +my hands upon Oliver Cowdery and ordained him an elder of the Church of +Jesus Christ; after which he ordained me also to the office of an elder of +said Church. We then took bread, blessed it, and broke it with them; also +wine, blessed it, and drank it with them. We then laid our hands on each +member of the Church present, that they might receive the gift of the Holy +Ghost and be confirmed members of the Church of Christ. The Holy Ghost was +poured out upon us to a very great degree--some prophesied, whilst we all +praised the Lord and rejoiced exceedingly." + +Thus was the true Church of Christ again on the earth. During the hundreds +of years when the world had lain in darkness, not a man could have been +found who had the authority to confirm a member of the church; but now +there was a beginning, a very small beginning it is true, but the promise +is that it will grow and increase until it shall fill the whole earth. + +The first public meeting after the Church was organized was held five days +later at the same place. At this meeting Oliver Cowdery preached the first +public discourse. He explained the principles of the gospel, and quite a +number believed and were baptized. + +Shortly after this time Joseph went to a town called Colesville, in Broome +county, N.Y., not far from Pennsylvania to visit his friend Joseph Knight +who had aided him when he was at work on the Book of Mormon. Joseph held a +number of meetings in this place and made some friends. Among those who +attended these meetings was Newel Knight, son of Joseph Knight. This young +man had many talks with Joseph about the gospel, but still he kept putting +off doing his duty in being baptized. Because of this the evil one got +power over him and treated him so badly that the prophet was sent for. When +Joseph arrived he found his friend Newel acting strangely. His face and +body twisted in an awful manner and at last he was actually caught up from +the floor and tossed about. Many of the neighbors now came in, but they +could do nothing to help the suffering man. + +[Illustration: Map of Fayette and Kirtland] + +When Joseph managed to get hold of Newel's hand, he became still and spoke +to Joseph, asking him to cast the devil from him. + +"If you know that I can, it shall be done," replied Joseph, whereupon he +commanded the evil one in the name of Jesus Christ to depart. Newel became +all right again at once, and was greatly blessed by the Spirit of God. The +people present wondered greatly at what they had seen, and many of them +afterwards joined the Church. + +This was the first miracle performed in the Church. Jesus had said to his +apostles in his day: "He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved. * * +* And these signs shall follow them that believe: in my name shall they +cast out devils," etc. Thus we see the same signs following the believer in +our day the same as in the days of the first apostles. + +On the first of June, 1830, the first conference, of the Church was held in +Fayette. There were about thirty members present besides many others who +came to hear. The Spirit of God was greatly enjoyed at this meeting. Many +prophesied, while others had beautiful visions of the heavens opened to +their eyes. + +Topics.--1. Organization of the Church. 2. First meeting, sermon and +conference. 3. First miracle. + +Questions and Review.--1. When and where was the Church of Jesus Christ +of Latter-day Saints organized? 2. Name the first six members. 3. What was +done at that meeting? 4. How many members are there in the Church today? 5. +How did you become a member of the Church? 6. Describe the first miracle. +7. How was the evil one cast out in former days? (See Acts 16: 16, 18.) 8. +What proof was given that Joseph and his brethren were true believers. (See +Mark 16: 16, 17.) 9. When was the first conference of the Church held? + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +PERSECUTION OF JOSEPH. + + +By this time you will see that when the Lord set his hand to begin the +great latter-day work, the evil one was also present, trying to hinder its +progress. At the very beginning there were only Joseph and a few friends to +work against, but now the Church was fast becoming established in the land, +and if it were to be stopped some strong effort would have to be made. So +the evil one inspired men to gather in large crowds or mobs to annoy and do +harm to the members of the Church and their friends. + +Shortly after the conference mentioned in the last chapter, Joseph and a +number of other elders went to Colesville to hold meetings and baptize some +believers. The brethren built a dam in a creek on Saturday where they were +to baptize on Sunday, but during the night a mob tore the dam away. +However, meeting was held on Sunday, and early on Monday morning the dam +was repaired and the baptisms were attended to; but before they were +through, the mob gathered and followed the Saints to their homes, making +all kinds of threats. That evening as they were going to hold a meeting, a +constable arrested Joseph Smith on the charge of making disorder, setting +the country in an uproar by preaching the Book of Mormon, etc. + +The constable was a good man, and told Joseph that the mob was going to try +to take him and perhaps kill him; but he would protect Joseph. In driving +to another town where the court was to be held, the mob lay in waiting by +the road, but the constable whipped up his horse and they got away. + +The next day when Joseph was called to be tried, there was a large crowd +and much excitement as many wished to see and hear the young prophet. The +trial commenced and many persons who knew Joseph were called to tell +something about him. Among the number was Mr. Stoal, for whom Joseph had +worked. + +"Did not the prisoner, Joseph Smith, have a horse of you?" was asked of Mr. +Stoal. + +"Yes, sir," was the answer. + +"Did not he go to you and tell you that an angel had appeared unto him and +told him to get the horse from you?" + +"No; he told me no such story." + +"Well, how had he the horse of you?" + +"He bought him of me as another man would do?" + +"Have you had your pay?" + +"That is not your business." + +The same question was asked again. + +"I hold his note for the price of the horse," replied Mr. Stoal, "which I +consider as good as the pay, for I am well acquainted with Joseph Smith, +Jr., and know him to be an honest man, and if he wishes, I am ready to let +him have another horse on the same terms." + +Many other witnesses were called, but the above is a fair sample of the +questions and the answers received. Nothing wrong was proved against Joseph +and he was discharged. + +But no sooner was Joseph released than another constable appeared and +arrested him again. This officer mistreated Joseph shamefully. He would +give him nothing to eat, and he allowed a crowd of men to spit upon him and +otherwise abuse him. + +The next day Joseph was tried again, this time at Colesville. His friends +again gathered around to protect him while his enemies tried harder than +ever to have him convicted of some crime. Many witnesses were called who +told untrue stories of Joseph, but when they were questioned they +contradicted each other so that everybody, including the court, could see +they were not telling the truth. + +Newel Knight was called as a witness. + +"Did the prisoner, Joseph Smith, Jr., cast the devil out of you?" asked the +lawyer who was against Joseph. + +"No, sir," was the reply. + +"Why, have you not had the devil cast out of you?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"And had not Joe Smith some hand in its being done" + +"Yes, sir." + +"And did he not cast him out of you?" + +"No, sir; it was done by the power of God, and Joseph Smith was the +instrument in the hands of God to do it. He commanded him out of me in the +name of Jesus Christ." + +The lawyer could make nothing out of him or the others who were called to +tell of some supposed wrong Joseph had done. Nothing could be found against +him that would send him to prison, and I suppose the judge thought that +even casting the devil out of a man was not such a great crime. So Joseph +was once more released and a free man. + +But of course the mob was not satisfied, so they laid a plan to capture +Joseph and tar and feather him; but now the constable who had treated him +so badly, saw by the trial that he was innocent, and came to Joseph and +asked his forgiveness. He told the prophet of the mob's intentions and +helped Joseph to get safely away home. + +So the Lord was with his servants and helped them out of the hands of those +who would harm them. The Lord was also kind to the Saints and gave the +Church many revelations which you may find in the book called "Doctrine and +Covenants," which contains the revelations given to the Church through +Joseph the Prophet. + +Topics.--1. Persecution of the Saints. 2. The arrests and trials of +Joseph. 3. The Doctrine and Covenants. + +Questions and Review.--1. What did Jesus say about persecution? (See St. +Matthew 5:10, 12.) 2. Where is Colesville? 3. What was Joseph's errand in +Colesville? 4. What did the mob do? 5. For what was Joseph arrested? 6. +Tell about his first trial. 7. Who testified at the second trial? 8. After +his discharge what did the mob intend to do to Joseph? 9. Who helped him to +escape? 10. What is the Doctrine and Covenants? + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE MISSION TO THE INDIANS. + + +In the month of September, 1830, a young man came to the house of Joseph +Smith, at Fayette, and asked to see the prophet. As Joseph was absent, he +was referred to his brother Hyrum who explained to him what he wanted to +know about the Book of Mormon, the revelations of the Lord to his brother, +and the establishing of the Church. The young man was a preacher of the +sect called Campbellites, and his name was Parley P. Pratt. On his journey +from his home in Ohio to New York he had obtained a copy of the Book of +Mormon, had read it, and had been deeply impressed with its beautiful +truths. Wishing to know more about this new revelation of God, he had +sought out Joseph. + +Parley P. Pratt joined the Church and soon became one of its leading men, +working with Joseph and his brethren with great energy. He became one of +the Twelve Apostles, traveled in many parts of the earth preaching the +gospel, wrote many fine books, and at last was killed by a wicked man in +the state of Arkansas. + +Some day you will want to read a full account of this great man's history +as he wrote it himself, but here I will give you but a few of these +interesting events, because they have much to do with the Church at this +point of our history. + +You will remember that the Book of Mormon tells about the early history of +the Indians. In this book it is predicted that some day the gospel should +be preached to them, and the record of their forefathers should also be +brought to their knowledge. At the second conference of the Church held in +Fayette, September 1st, Oliver Cowdery, Parley P. Pratt, Ziba Peterson and +Peter Whitmer, Jr., were called to go on a mission to the Indians. They +were to go into the wilderness through the western states and into the +Indian Territory, preaching by the way whenever a chance afforded. + +It was late in October when these four elders started on this the first +important mission of the Church. They preached to some Indians near the +city of Buffalo, presented them with the Book of Mormon, and proceeded on +their journey into the state of Ohio. In the northeastern part of this +state is the town of Kirtland where Elder Pratt had some friends. They +stopped here for some time and preached the gospel to the people. Great +interest was aroused, many believed and were baptized. Among these was +Elder Pratt's former teacher, Sidney Rigdon, who also became one of the +Church's leading men. Others who joined the Church at this time were Edward +Partridge who became the first bishop in the Church, Newel K. Whitney who +became the second, Lyman Wight who became an apostle, and many others. In a +few weeks the missionaries had raised up a large branch of the Church at +Kirtland. + +Having done this good work, the elders went on their way westward. One +evening they were stopping at the house of one Simeon Carter not far from +Brother Pratt's old home. They were just about to read to him from the Book +of Mormon when an officer entered and arrested Elder Pratt. The elders left +their book with Mr. Carter and went with the officer to a sort of court, +where Brother Pratt was ordered to pay a large sum of money or go to +prison. The prisoner paid no attention to these demands, which made his +persecutors very angry. It was now about midnight, but the elders took it +quietly and sang a hymn or two. Then Elder Pratt said that if the witnesses +who had told false things about them and the judge who had abused and +insulted them, would repent of their evil words and acts and would all +kneel down together he would pray that God might forgive them. + +"My big bull-dog pray for me!" said the judge. + +"The devil help us!" cried another. + +Next morning as Elder Pratt and the man placed to guard him were walking in +the road, the elder asked the officer if he was good at a race. + +"No!" was the reply, "but my big dog is. I have trained him and he will +take any man down at my bidding." + +"Well," continued Bro. Pratt, "you have given me a chance to preach and +have given me lodging and breakfast. I thank you for your kindness, but I +must be going. Good-day, sir." + +With that Elder Pratt left the man and his dog, and had got quite a +distance before the officer had recovered from his surprise. Then he came +running after him, clapping his hands and shouting to his dog. + +"Stu--boy, stu--boy, take him Watch, lay hold of him! Down with him!" At +the same time pointing in the direction of the fleeing elder. Just as the +fierce animal was about to overtake him, Elder Pratt began clapping his +hands and shouting like the officer, pointing into the woods just ahead. +The dog bounded past him and was soon lost to sight in the forest, while +the missionary got safely away. + +Mr. Carter read the Book of Mormon the elders had left. He believed, went +fifty miles to Kirtland, was baptized, returned home, began to preach, and +soon there was a branch of sixty members in that place. + +In western Ohio the missionaries found another tribe of Indians with whom +they stayed a few days. They then went to Cincinnati and from that city to +the mouth of the Ohio river by boat. It was now very cold, and the river +was so blocked with ice that the boat could go no farther. The missionaries +therefore walked the rest of the distance to St. Louis and from there +across the state of Missouri to its western boundary. + +The snow was deep, there were no beaten roads, the houses were few and far +between, and the wind blew fierce and cold. For days they had nothing to +eat but corn bread and frozen pork; but at last they reached the town of +Independence, in Jackson county, Missouri, which was then near to the +Indian country. + +The elders now took up their labors among the Indians. They were kindly +received, and the chief called a council which Oliver Cowdery addressed. +The Book of Mormon was presented to them and explained, and they became +very much interested. The sectarian preachers heard about this and +complained to the Indian agent, who ordered the elders off the Indian +lands. So after but a few days of preaching the elders had to leave. They +went back to Jackson county and preached to the white settlers, some of +whom believed the word of God and were added to the Church. Four of the +elders remained at Independence, while Bro. Pratt was sent back to Kirtland +to report their labors. + +Topics.--1. Parley P. Pratt. 2. The first mission to the Indians. 3. At +Kirtland. 4. Journey to Independence and preaching to Indians. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who was Parley P. Pratt? 2. Name some of the +books he wrote. 3. Give a brief sketch of his life. 4. Name those who went +on the first mission for the Church. 5. What was the special object of this +mission? 6. About how far is it from Fayette to Independence, Mo.? 7. Where +is Kirtland? 8. What leading men were converted there? 9. How did Bro. +Pratt escape from the officer? 10. How did people travel in those days? 11. +Why were the missionaries forbidden to preach among the Indians? + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +REMOVAL TO OHIO. + + +The scriptures often speak of a time in the latter days when the people of +God shall be gathered together to build up the Lord's kingdom and prepare +for his second coming. The gospel should be preached to all the world, and +those who would believe should go out from Babylon, or the wicked world, +and came together with the people of the Lord. Every elder who has been on +a mission will tell you that as soon as persons accept the gospel, a desire +comes to them to gather with the main body of the Saints. Thus the Lord +puts the spirit of gathering into the hearts of the believers, and his +purposes are fulfilled. + +The Lord told the prophet Joseph that the time for this gathering had come, +and that the central gathering place for the Saints on this land was +somewhere in the West, though at first the exact location was not told him. + +In December, 1830, the word of the Lord came to Joseph that the Saints +should gather to Ohio. This was westward and in the proper direction. The +western missionaries had raised up large branches in Ohio, so it was not +like going into a new place. The Church was growing steadily, and many +revelations were given to the Saints. We might say the Lord was assigning +lessons for us, which we have not yet learned very well. + +Preparations were made for this removal by holding the third conference of +the Church at Fayette and setting its affairs in order. + +One day, about the 1st of February, 1831, a sleigh containing two men and +two women, drove through the streets of Kirtland, Ohio, and stopped at the +door of Gilbert and Whitney's store. One of the men alighted, and springing +up the steps, walked into the store where one of the owners was standing. + +"Newel K. Whitney, thou art the man!" exclaimed the visitor, extending his +hand as to an old friend. + +"You have the advantage of me," replied the storekeeper, "I could not call +you by name as you have me." + +"I am Joseph, the prophet," said the stranger, smiling. "You've prayed me +here; now what do you want of me?" + +Mr. Whitney, you will remember, had joined the Church sometime before, and +of course he was delighted to see the prophet. Joseph and his wife, Emma, +stayed at Brother Whitney's house for some time. Shortly after this, Newel +K. Whitney was called to be bishop at Kirtland, and later he became the +second presiding bishop of the Church. + +Early next spring, 1831, the Saints from New York began to come to Ohio, +buying land in and around the town of Kirtland. + +Before leaving Fayette, Joseph had been visited by a young man who had +walked two hundred miles to see him and have the prophet tell him what his +duty was. This young man was Orson Pratt, brother of Parley P. Pratt. +Joseph received a revelation in which Orson was called to preach the gospel +to the world; and this duty Orson Pratt did all his life. + +[Illustration: SIDNEY RIGDON.] + +Elder Pratt became one of the Twelve Apostles. He went on a great many +missions in this country and to Europe, during which time he crossed the +ocean sixteen times. He became one of the most learned men in the Church, +and wrote many books on gospel subjects. Read the title, or first page of +the Book of Mormon and the book of Doctrine and Covenants and see what they +say of Orson Pratt. Elder Pratt was one of the pioneers, he and Erastus +Snow being the first two men of that company to enter Salt Lake Valley. + +Another man who came to see Joseph while yet at Fayette was Sidney Rigdon, +a former Campbellite preacher whom Parley P. Pratt had baptized at +Kirtland. Elder Rigdon also became a prominent man in the Church, being +first counselor to President Joseph Smith during the life time of the +prophet. He took an active part in all the affairs of the Church up to +within a few months of the prophet's death. He was greatly disappointed +because he was not chosen to succeed Joseph as the leader of the Church, +and soon after apostatized. He died outside the Church. + +Thomas B. Marsh was the name of a man who came to Kirtland with the Church. +He became a leader among the Saints and was president of the first quorum +of Twelve Apostles. Elder Marsh did much missionary work and suffered with +the Saints in their persecution; but in 1838 he became dissatisfied and did +some wicked things against his brethren. He was therefore cut off from the +Church. Nineteen years after he came back and was baptized again. He came +to Utah and lived at Ogden, where he died, a poor, broken-down man. + +Topics.--1. The gathering. 2. The move to Ohio. 3. Orson Pratt. 4. Sidney +Rigdon. 5. Thomas B. Marsh. + +Questions and Review.--1. What is meant by the gathering? 2. Quote some +scriptural passage on the gathering. 3. Where was the first gathering +place? 4. Locate Kirtland. 5. Tell about Joseph's first visit to Kirtland. +6. Who was Newel K. Whitney? 7. When did most of the Saints move to +Kirtland? 8. Tell what you can about Orson Pratt? 9. Name some of his +books. 10. What high position did Sidney Rigdon hold? 11. Why did he leave +the Church? 12. Tell about Thomas B. Marsh. + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +THE LAND OF ZION. + + +The Book of Mormon (13th chapter of Ether) tells us that this land of +America is a "choice land above all other lands;" and the Lord has said +that the people who lived here must serve him or in time be destroyed. This +you will remember was proved so often in the history of the Nephites. + +Strictly speaking, the whole of America is the land of Zion, but the Lord +revealed to Joseph that there should be a "center place," where a great +city should be build which should be called the city of Zion, or the New +Jerusalem. This city will be the capital or in the center of a large +district of country full of people who serve the Lord. A grand temple will +be built in the central city, and the glory of the Lord will rest upon it +by day and by night. Then shall there be peace in the earth for a thousand +years, and the Saints will be busy working to save all the people who live +or have ever lived on the earth. Jesus with his angels will no doubt visit +the earth from time to time to look after his work at this glorious period. + +Now all this was to have a beginning, one of these small beginnings we have +spoken about. + +June 7th, 1831, the Prophet Joseph received a revelation instructing him +and twenty-eight other elders to go on missions. They were to travel two +and two by different routes through the Western states, preaching the +gospel and building up the Church on the way. They were to meet in the +state of Missouri about a thousand miles from Kirtland and there hold a +conference. At this time, if they were faithful, the Lord would reveal to +them the location of the central place and the spot where the temple should +sometime stand. + +The brethren went on their missions as they had been instructed, and Joseph +and his party arrived at Independence, Missouri, about the middle of July, +1831. Oliver Cowdery and the other brethren who had been sent on the +mission to the Indians, you will recollect, stopped at Independence. They +were very glad to meet Joseph and his companions again. + +Shortly after the prophet's arrival, the Lord made known the exact spot for +the city of Zion. It is where the town of Independence is located, in +Jackson County, Missouri, and the site for the temple was pointed out as +lying westward on a lot not far from the court house. + +Some of the Saints now moved to Jackson county, the first to arrive being +what was called the Colesville Branch of the Church. These Saints had come +from Colesville, State of New York, having stopped but a short time near +Kirtland. + +The first step towards the founding of Zion was taken on the 2nd day of +August, 1831. On that day twelve men, of which Joseph was one, carried and +placed the first log for the first house. This was in Kaw township, twelve +miles west of Independence, where the Colesville branch was locating. +Sidney Rigdon then dedicated the land. The next day eight of the brethren +went to the temple lot, and Joseph dedicated that sacred spot. + +Shortly after, Joseph with some of the other brethren went to Kirtland. + +The Saints were now instructed to buy land in the region around that they +might possess it for an inheritance. At that time Missouri was not thickly +settled. There was much government land which could be bought for one +dollar and twenty-five cents per acre. Sidney Gilbert was appointed an +agent to receive money and purchase land, and Bishop Edward Partridge was +chosen to divide the land among the Saints. The rich were told to divide +with the poor that all might have land. + +The Saints were especially warned that they must keep all the commandments +which the Lord gave to them or they would not be allowed to remain and +build up Zion at that time, but they first would have to go through much +tribulation, and be "scourged from city to city." You will see presently +how this prediction was fulfilled. + +The first winter the Saints were not very comfortably housed, as they had +arrived too late to raise crops or build good houses. The next spring, +however, many Saints arrived, and they soon had growing fields and gardens. +The Prophet visited them again early in the spring, held meetings, and +greatly encouraged the Saints. In June, 1832, the first paper published by +the Latter-day Saints was begun at Independence. It was called _The Evening +and Morning Star_, and was the only paper in that part of the country. + +Thus the Saints prospered; but a time of persecution, long and fierce, was +before them. + +Topics.--1. The center place of Zion. 2. Gathering to Missouri. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where is the land of Zion? 2. What is said in +the Book of Mormon about this land? 3. Where is Jackson county? 4. What +place is now nearly the center of the United States? 5. What river flows by +Jackson county? 6. Where will the New Jerusalem be built? 7. What kind of +city will it be? 8. When, where, and how was the foundation of Zion laid? +9. Where is the temple lot? 10. Who dedicated it? 11. What was the +Colesville Branch? 12. How were the Saints to obtain the land of Zion? 13. +What were the duties of Sidney Gilbert and Edward Partridge? 14. When did +Joseph visit Jackson county the second time? + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +PERSECUTION IN JACKSON COUNTY. + + +A great many of the old settlers of Jackson county, meaning those who were +there before the Saints, were of a shiftless, ignorant class from the +Southern States. They made but little improvement in their homes, being +content to live in small, log huts, many of them without windows or board +floors. They all believed it right to have negro slaves. They were also +eager to hold public office. + +At that time there were also many persons in western Missouri who had fled +from the east on account of crimes which they had committed. Being near the +boundary line of the United States, these persons would need only to cross +the line into Mexico to be safe if an officer should come after them. + +You will readily see by this what kind of neighbors the new settlers had. +Of course the Saints could not join with these wicked people in their horse +racing, Sabbath breaking, idleness, drunkenness, and other things which the +Missourians took delight in. Most of the Saints were from the Eastern and +Northern States and did not believe in slavery. They worked hard, and as +the land produced good crops, they were soon prospering, while their idle +neighbors remained in poverty. + +All this naturally led the Missourians to hate the "Mormons," and as early +as the spring of 1832 they began to molest them by throwing stones into +their houses, etc. That same fall mobs began to come against the Saints, +burning some of their hay and shooting into their houses. + +In April, 1833, the mobbers held a meeting at Independence to discuss plans +whereby they could rid the county of the "Mormons." However, the meeting +broke up in a row. July 20th, they held another meeting which was more +successful. An address was read to the people wherein the Saints were +falsely accused of all manner of wrong doings. It also set forth that no +more "Mormons" must settle in Jackson county; that the "Mormons" already +there should be given a reasonable time to sell their property and then +remove; that the printing of their paper must cease; that the stores of the +Saints must close up their business as soon as possible; and that the +leading brethren should use their influence to have the Saints comply with +these requests. The meeting agreed to all this and a committee was +appointed to wait on the leaders of the Saints to see what they would do +about it. When the committee called, the brethren asked for time to +consider the matter, but fifteen minutes only were given them. Nothing +could be done in that short time, so the committee went back to the meeting +and reported. + +The mob then broke loose, yelling like a band of wild Indians. They went to +the house and printing office of W.W. Phelps, forced Mrs. Phelps and the +children, one of whom was sick, out of the house and threw the furniture +out in the street. They then destroyed the printing press and tore the +office down. Then they went through the town hunting for the leading +brethren. They caught Bishop Edward Partridge and Charles Allen, dragged +them to the public square, stripped most of their clothes off, and then +smeared tar all over their bodies. This ended that day's work, and the +frightened women and children who had fled to the woods came back to their +homes. + +The third day after this a mob of five hundred men came into Independence. +They were armed with guns, knives, and whips, and they swore they would +kill or whip all who would not agree to leave. The leading brethren, seeing +that it was no longer of any use to plead or resist, made an agreement with +the mob that they with their families would leave the county by the first +of January, and that they would use their influence in trying to induce the +rest of the Saints to leave, one-half by January 1st, the rest by April +1st, 1834. They were also to use all the means they could to prevent more +of the Saints from settling in the county. The mob for their part agreed +not to persecute the Saints while this was being done. + +The mob, however, did not keep this promise, but daily broke into houses +and abused the inmates. + +The Saints now appealed to the highest officer of the state, Governor +Dunklin, for protection. He told them that the laws were able to protect +everybody in their rights, and advised the Saints to have those arrested +who threatened them, and have them tried in court for their misdeeds. + +This, seemingly, was very good advice, and would have worked all right +under other circumstances; but when it is remembered that the very +officers--the constable who would have to do the arresting, the judge who +would try the cases, and in fact all concerned--were men who were +themselves leaders of the mob, you will see how useless such a course would +be. However, the Saints engaged four lawyers to protect them in the courts. + +This made the mobbers more angry than ever, and they made preparation for +further action against the Saints. + +"We will rid Jackson county of the "Mormons"," they said, "peaceably if we +can, forcibly if we must. If they will not go without, we will whip and +kill the men; we will destroy the children, and abuse their women." + +The Saints now resolved to defend themselves, and the men gathered in small +bodies, armed with guns. + +On the night of October 31, 1833, a mob marched to the Whitmer settlement +of the Saints where they whipped several of the brethren to death, drove +the women and children into the woods, and tore the roofs from about a +dozen houses. + +The next night an attack was made upon the Saints living at Independence. A +party of brethren went to the aid of the Saints, and found a mob tearing +down the store of Gilbert, Whitney & Co. The mobbers fled, but the brethren +captured one of them in the act of throwing brick-bats through the window. +They brought him to a justice of the peace to have papers made out for the +mobber's arrest. The justice would not do it, so the man was released. +Three days after, this same mobber had the brethren arrested. It was no +trouble for him to get papers from the same justice. As one of the brethren +remarked at the time, "Although we could not obtain a warrant against him +for breaking open the store, he had gotten one for us for catching him at +it!" + +Topics.--1. The character of the early Missourians. 2. Mobbers' meetings +in Independence. 3. Work of the mob. + +Questions and Review.--1. From what sections did most of the early +settlers of Missouri come? 2. From what section did the Saints come? 3. +What difference of opinion existed between the people of the north and the +people of the south? 4. Why did the Missourians hate the "Mormons?" 5. Why +did many outlaws come to Missouri? 6. What did the mobbers want the Saints +to promise? 7. What advice did Governor Dunklin give? 8. Why did the law +not protect the Saints? 9. How was Bishop Partridge abused? 10. Tell about +the arrest of the four brethren. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +EXPULSION FROM JACKSON COUNTY. + + +In this small history, an account of all that happened in Missouri during +those cruel times can not be given; but enough can be told to show you what +the Saints had to endure in the early days of the Church. If you will but +think of the sufferings the boys and girls must have gone through when the +mobs tore the roofs from their houses, drove them out on the prairies to go +hungry and cold, and killed or whipped their fathers, you may then +appreciate God's blessings to you who live in peace and comfort. + +The persecutions, which began in earnest October 31st, 1833, continued day +after day. On November 2nd a mob attacked a settlement on Big Blue River. +They unroofed one house and were beating a brother by the name of Bennett, +who was sick in bed, when a party of brethren came to the rescue. There was +some firing of guns between them, and a mobber was wounded in the leg. + +On November 4th as a band of mobbers started out to make a raid on the +Saints, word was sent to the brethren, and thirty of them soon gathered to +withstand the mob. A battle ensued in which two of the mobbers were killed. +One of the brethren was so badly wounded that he died the next day. Brother +Philo Dibble was shot and severely wounded, but he was administered to and +soon got well. + +The whole country was now aroused. Word was sent broadcast that the +"Mormons" had got the Indians to help them, and that they had taken the +town of Independence. + +Next morning people flocked into the town and there was great excitement. + +And now we must name one of the most cruel and wicked men of that time, +Lilburn W. Boggs. He was lieutenant-governor, which is next to the +governor, the highest officer in the state. Boggs permitted the mob to +organize themselves into a militia and thereby become regular soldiers of +the state. The mob leaders seeing that the Saints had decided to protect +themselves and fight if necessary, raised this militia so that if the +Saints opposed them that they could be classed as law breakers. + +The branches of the Church west of Independence having heard that the mob +was going to kill some of the brethren in that town, raised about one +hundred men to go to their rescue. While on the way they heard that there +was no immediate danger, and that the militia had been called out. At this +they were going back to their homes; but just then the militia came up, led +by Colonel Pitcher. He demanded that the "Mormons" give up their arms, but +they would not unless the mob, or militia as it was called, would do the +same. This Colonel Pitcher agreed to have done, and then the brethren gave +up their arms, consisting of fifty-nine guns and one pistol. + +No sooner was this done than the most awful scene took place. The mob did +not give up a gun, but bands of them roamed over the country searching for +the Saints. Houses were torn down and burned, men were tied up and whipped, +women and children were driven out into the fields and forests. Many of the +county's leading men took part in these crimes, and even ministers, +preachers of the gospel as they called themselves, were seen leading mobs +from place to place. + +The cold winter was now coming on, it being the month of November. At one +place a company of one hundred and ninety--all being women and children +excepting three old men--was driven thirty miles across a burnt prairie, +the ground being coated with sleet. Their trail could be easily followed by +the blood which flowed from their feet. + +You will see by the map that Clay county lies north of Jackson, just across +the Missouri river. As the Saints were driven from their homes, most of +them made their way to Clay county whose people received them kindly. Soon +the shores of the river were lined with men, women and children, goods, +boxes, wagons, etc; The ferrymen were kept busy taking them over the river. +At night the place had a strange appearance. Hundreds of people could be +seen in every direction; some in tents and some in the open air around the +fires. The rain descended in torrents. Husbands were asking for their wives +and wives for their husbands, parents for children and children for +parents. Some had managed to escape with a little provisions; many had lost +all their goods. + +There were at this time about twelve hundred Saints in Jackson county, so +it took many days for them all to get away. Some of the poorest of the +Saints who could not get away at first were driven out during the cold +storms of that winter. + +Early next spring when nearly all the Saints had left, the mob set fire to +the deserted homes. One of the brethren reported that two hundred and three +dwellings and one grist mill were destroyed. + +Topics.--1. Contrast between present conditions and past. 2. Mobbing +continued. 3. Saints driven from Jackson county. + +[Illustration: Map of Missouri and Illinois] + +Questions and Review.--1. What experiences did the Latter-day Saint boys +and girls of Jackson county pass through? (Read the story, "Grandmother's +Rocking Chair," in the Contributor, Vol. 11, page 242.) 2. What happened in +November, 1833? 3. What is the state militia? 4. Why was the Jackson county +militia raised? 5. What happened after the brethren had given up their +arms? 6. Tell about the scene on the banks of the Missouri river. 7. Where +is Clay county? 8. What happened in the spring of 1834? + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +ZION'S CAMP. + + +In the spring of 1834 Parley P. Pratt and Lyman Wight were sent as +messengers from the Saints in Clay county to Kirtland to tell the Prophet +what had happened and to ask for further advice. Joseph, you may be sure, +was very grieved to hear about the sufferings of the Saints, and he +enquired of the Lord what should be done. In answer, a revelation was given +instructing Joseph to gather the young and middle aged men of the Church +and organize them into a company which was to march to Missouri to bring +aid to the Saints and to assist them to again get possession of their +homes. Five hundred men were to be obtained, but one hundred would do if no +more could be raised. + +Accordingly, Joseph and seven other brethren went two and two through the +various branches in the east asking for means and volunteers for this +mission. + +New Portage, a village about sixty miles south-west from Kirtland was +selected as a gathering place, and from this point on the 8th of May, 1834, +one hundred and fifty men started for Missouri. They were organized in +regular army order, having officers to see that everything on the march +was done properly. Joseph was the leader. + +The distance from Kirtland to Missouri is one thousand miles. That long +journey was not an easy one. The wagons were heavily loaded, and as the +roads were poor there was very little riding. Often the men would have to +help drag the loads over the bad places. Every Sunday the camp rested and +held meetings. Sometimes the people, suspecting they were "Mormons" would +annoy them, so that guards had to be placed around the camp. People were +also curious to know what this strange company of men was and where it was +going. Spies followed the company for many miles. There were some boys in +camp, and the inquisitive people thought it an easy matter to find out +everything from the boys. + +"My boy, where are you from?" they would ask. + +"From the east," was the answer. + +"Where are you going?" + +"To the west." + +"What for?" + +"To see where we can get land cheapest and best." + +"Who leads the camp?" + +"Sometimes one, sometimes another." + +"What name?" + +"Captain Wallace, Major Bruce," etc. + +The Prophet Joseph believed in being kind to all animals, and he instructed +his brethren in Zion's camp to kill none except for food. Man must first +become peaceful, before animals will lose their fierceness. Not long after +this instruction had been given, a brother became very tired by traveling +and lay down on the ground to sleep. When he awoke, what should he see but +a rattlesnake coiled up not more than a foot away from his head. Just then +some of the brethren came up and wanted to kill the snake; but the brother +said, "No, I'll protect him, for he and I have had a good nap together." He +remembered what Joseph had said. + +On June 7th the company having crossed the Mississippi river, camped on +Salt river in Missouri. More of the brethren had joined the company on the +way, and now it numbered two hundred and five men. From this point Parley +P. Pratt and Orson Hyde were sent to Governor Dunklin at Jefferson city, +asking him to use his power as the highest officer in the state to have the +Saints brought back to their homes in Jackson county. The governor said he +thought it right that the Saints should get back their lands, yet he was +afraid if they tried to go back or if he called out soldiers to help them +get their homes, there would be a terrible war and many people killed. So +the governor would do nothing to help them. + +While Zion's camp was making its way to the Saints in Clay county, a +meeting was held in Liberty where some mobbers from Jackson county tried to +arouse the people against the Saints. Nothing being done at this meeting, a +party of fifteen men started for Independence to raise an army large enough +to destroy Joseph and the camp. + +One of the leaders of this band was James Campbell. As he pushed his +pistols into the holsters before starting, he said with an oath: "The +eagles and turkey buzzards shall eat my flesh if I do not fix Joe Smith and +his army so that their skins will not hold shucks before two days are +passed!" As he and his companions were crossing the Missouri river their +boat sank. Seven of them were drowned and among them was Campbell. What was +left of his body was found three weeks after lodged on a pile of drift +wood. The "eagles and turkey buzzards" had eaten the flesh from his bones. + +On the 19th the camp passed through Richmond. They expected to reach Clay +county that night, but were so greatly hindered by accidents that they +camped for the night between two forks of Fishing river. A large mob had +gathered, bent on destroying the camp. A boat containing forty mobbers had +been sent over the river, when a storm arose. The rain fell in torrents, +the lightning flashed, the thunder shook the earth. Great hail stones +destroyed the corn in the fields and stripped the trees of leaves. The mob +scattered in confusion. The river rose nearly forty feet, which made it +impossible for anyone to cross. The brethren took shelter in a schoolhouse +and escaped the storm. Thus again the Lord preserved his people from their +enemies. + +The next day the camp moved five miles out on the prairie. While here, some +of the leading men of Ray county called on the brethren to learn what their +intentions were. Joseph told them how the Saints had been persecuted in +Jackson county; and that they had come one thousand miles with clothing and +provisions for their brethren; that they had no intentions of harming any +one, but their mission was to do good, and if possible help their brethren +to get their lands back again. At the close of their talk, the visitors +promised to do what they could to prevent the mobs from disturbing them, +which promise they kept. + +The next day, June 22nd, Sheriff Gillium of Clay county came into camp. He +also wanted to know what the camp was going to do. Joseph explained to him. +In order to get back their lands and live in peace, the Saints proposed to +buy the lands from those who could not live with them in Jackson county, +but nothing came of this and other offers that were made to settle the +trouble. + +This same day an important revelation was given through the prophet. The +brethren were told that the Lord did not want them to fight, and that they +must wait for a time before Zion should be redeemed. + +During the march of the camp, some of the brethren had found fault and had +not listened to the counsels of the prophet. Joseph had told them that if +they did not repent, sickness would come into the camp and many would die. +This was now fulfilled. On June 22nd, that dread disease called the cholera +appeared in the camp. When you are told that during the next four or five +days sixty-eight of the brethren took the disease and thirteen died, you +may perhaps imagine what a terrible time they had. + +On June 23rd they marched into Clay county and camped on Rush creek, where +two days later the camp was disbanded. For two weeks Joseph labored among +the Saints and then he returned to Kirtland. Most of the others also went +back to their homes in the east about the same time. + +Topics.--1. Organizing Zion's camp. 2. March of Zion's camp. 3. The camp +on Fishing river. 4. The scourge. + +Questions and Review.--1. What was Parley P. Pratt and Lyman Wight's +mission to Kirtland? 2. What instruction did the Lord give them? (See Doc. +and Cov., sec. 103.) 3. How was Zion's camp organized? 4. What was its +object? 5. Through what states did it march? 6. What were Joseph's +teachings about kindness to animals? 7. What was the fate of James +Campbell? 8. How were the brethren saved from their enemies on Fishing +river? 9. What did the brethren propose to the citizens of Jackson? 10. Why +did the scourge come upon the camp? 11. What revelation was given on +Fishing river? 12. Where and when was Zion's camp disbanded? + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE CHURCH AT KIRTLAND. + + +During the time that the Saints were having such a hard time in Missouri, +the Church in and around Kirtland was growing in numbers and strength. +Joseph with many of the elders went on missionary trips to various parts of +the United States and Canada, and many new branches of the Church were +organized. + +In September, 1831, Joseph moved to the town of Hiram, about thirty miles +from Kirtland. While living here, he was busy translating the scriptures, +preaching the gospel, and holding meetings. Thirteen of the revelations +found in the Doctrine and Covenants were given at Hiram. One of these +revelations, called the Vision, tells of the three glories which are in +store for the children of God, besides many other grand teachings which +some day you will want to read. (Section 76.) + +But wicked men continued to tell false things about Joseph and the Church. +Many people believed these stories, and the result was that the brethren +were often annoyed and badly treated. On the night of March 25th, 1832, +Joseph and Sidney Rigdon were dragged from their homes by an angry mob into +the woods. Sidney was so misused that he was left for dead. Joseph was +beaten and stripped of his clothes, and his body was covered with tar. The +mob also tried to force poison from a bottle into his mouth, but in this +they failed. Notwithstanding this ill treatment, Joseph was able the next +day, it being Sunday, to preach to a large meeting and to baptize three new +converts. + +Shortly after this, Joseph made his second visit to Missouri. After his +return, he settled again at Kirtland, where he continued to receive many +revelations and to do much for the building up of the Church. + +On December 25, 1832, Joseph received a revelation wherein it was stated +that the time would come when there would be a great war between the +Northern States and the Southern States. Even the place of its beginning +was told, namely, South Carolina. + +In February, 1833, a school was opened in Kirtland for the elders of the +Church. It was called the "School of the Prophets," and there the brethren +met and were instructed in the principles of the gospel. + +A revelation called the Word of Wisdom was given on the 27th of the same +month. You will find it in the Doctrine and Covenants, section 89, and +every one of you should read it. + +On March 18th a very important meeting was held in Kirtland. On that date +Joseph ordained Sidney Rigdon to be his first counselor, and Frederick G. +Williams to be his second counselor, and these three now became the First +Presidency, which is the highest authority in the Church. You have been +told something of Sidney Rigdon. Elder Williams held his position nearly +five years, when he apostatized, and Hyrum Smith was chosen in his stead. +At the death of Joseph Smith, Sen., who was patriarch of the Church, Hyrum +was chosen to fill his position and William Law was called to the office of +second counselor to Joseph. Law held this position until about two months +before the Prophet's death when he was cut off from the Church. + +February 17, 1834, the first high council of the Church was organized. This +body consists of twelve men who must be high priests, over which the stake +presidency presides. It is a kind of court. When members of the Church have +trouble one with another which neither they, nor the teachers, nor the +bishop can settle, it is brought before the high council to be adjusted. + +Each stake of Zion now has a high council. Here are the names of the first +one organized: besides the First Presidency, Joseph Smith, Sen., John +Smith, Joseph Coe, John Johnson, Martin Harris, John S. Carter, Jared +Carter, Oliver Cowdery, Samuel H. Smith, Orson Hyde, Sylvester Smith and +Luke Johnson. + +It was shortly after this that Zion's Camp was organized and made the trip +to Missouri, of which you were told in the last chapter. + +After his return Joseph was again busy performing his many duties as +president of the Church. + +Topics.--1. Joseph at Hiram. 2. Prophecy on War. 3. Word of Wisdom. 4. +The first presidency. 5. The high council. + +Questions and Review.--1. To what two places were the Saints now +gathering? 2. Where is Hiram? 3. What did Joseph do there? 4. Tell about +the mobbing at Hiram. 5. When was the prophecy on war given? 6. How long +after was it fulfilled? 7. What led to the war between the North and the +South? 8. What was the "School of the Prophets?" 9. In the Word of Wisdom, +what does the Lord say is not good for the body? 10. What does He say is +good? 11. What promise is made to those who keep the Word of Wisdom? 12. +What is the First Presidency? 13. Who were the first to fill this position? +14. Who are the present First Presidency? 15. What is the duty of the high +council? 16. Name some members of the high council of your stake. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +THE TWELVE APOSTLES--THE SEVENTIES--THE KIRTLAND TEMPLE. + + +[Illustration: PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG.] + +On the 14th of February, 1835, Joseph called together the brethren who had +gone with him to Missouri in Zion's Camp. He spoke to the meeting and told +the brethren the Lord had not forgotten them, but had remembered their +faithfulness in answering the call of duty, and now he had a blessing for +them. + +Joseph then said the time had come when twelve apostles should be called. +It was the duty of the three witnesses to the Book of Mormon to select +twelve men for this high calling, and these three brethren were then +blessed for this purpose by the First Presidency. The following were then +selected to be the first quorum of Twelve Apostles in the Church: Thomas B. +Marsh, David W. Patten, Brigham Young, Heber C. Kimball, Orson Hyde, Wm. E. +McLellin, Parley P. Pratt, Luke Johnson, William Smith, Orson Pratt, John +F. Boynton and Lyman E. Johnson. + +It is the duty of the Twelve Apostles to build up the Church and regulate +its affairs in all the world under the direction of the First Presidency; +also to open the door of the gospel to all nations. + +On the 28th of February there was another meeting held, at which the first +quorum of seventy was organized. You will remember that the Savior, after +He had chosen Twelve Apostles to preach the gospel, chose also seventy to +aid the Twelve in their work. So in our day, twelve men could not do all +the work of spreading the gospel, so it was necessary to call other men. In +this body of men seventy form a quorum. The first quorum was organized from +the brethren who were members of Zion's Camp. + +It is the special duty of the Seventies to travel and preach the gospel +under the direction of the Twelve. + +As early as May, 1833, the Lord told Joseph that the Saints should build a +house to his name. July 23, the foundation was laid. The Saints in Kirtland +were not many, neither were they rich, and it was therefore a great task +for them to build such a house as the temple. However, they gave donations +of what they had and worked willingly with all their might, until at last +it was finished and dedicated to the Lord on Sunday, March 27, 1836. + +[Illustration: THE KIRTLAND TEMPLE.] + +During the meetings many glorious blessings were received. Angels were seen +by many of the Saints, Brigham Young spoke in tongues, others prophesied, +and many saw glorious visions. At the evening meeting George A. Smith arose +and prophesied, when a noise was heard like the sound of a mighty wind +which filled the temple. All the people arose at once and the Prophet +Joseph told the Saints that the temple was filled with angels, as he could +see them. The people living near the temple, seeing a bright light resting +on the building and hearing a strange sound within, came rushing up to see +what was the matter. + +Nearly every day there were meetings held in the temple. The next Sunday +after the dedication, Joseph and Oliver were praying in the sacred house +when the Lord Jesus Christ appeared unto them. He stood on the breastwork +of the pulpit, and Joseph describes Him as a most glorious personage. Jesus +told them that He had accepted the temple and promised them great blessings +if they would continue to keep his commandments. + +After this vision had closed, Moses, Elias, and Elijah appeared unto them +and each of them gave to Joseph and Oliver many blessings concerning the +gospel. + +You would think that after all these blessings from the Lord the Saints +would never turn away from the truth; but sad to say this was not the case. +During the years 1837 and 1838 many of the brethren in Kirtland began to +buy and sell land and set up stores and banks for the purpose of making +money. Now, there would have been nothing wrong in all this if they had +done all their business honestly; but the trouble was that many wanted to +get rich so fast that oftimes they would cheat each other. This of course +was inspired by the evil one, who did his best to stop the progress of the +Church. It was a very hard trial for Joseph and those of his brethren who +stood by him to see so many leading men fall away into wickedness. + +Again, you may also wonder how men who have been in the company of the +Prophet and who have seen angels and heavenly visions can deny the faith, +but the fact is they sometimes do. The whole secret is this: + +No matter how much a person has seen or how much he knows, if he sins and +does not repent, the Spirit of God will leave him, and he will be in the +dark. It then becomes an easy matter for him to fall away from the Church. + +During the two years named above, four of the Twelve Apostles and many of +the leading men apostatized; and then, not satisfied with so doing, they +began to join the mobs who persecuted Joseph and the Saints. This led the +Church leaders to remove to Missouri, and soon after nearly all the Saints +followed them to the land of Zion. + +Topics.--1. The calling of the Twelve Apostles. 2. Calling of the +Seventy. 3. The Kirtland Temple. 4. The apostasy at Kirtland. + +Questions and Review.--1. From what body were the first Twelve Apostles +called? 2. Who chose the names? 3. Name the first Twelve Apostles? 4. Name +the present Twelve. 5. What is the duty of the Twelve? 6. What is the duty +of the Seventies? 7. How many Seventies' quorums are there in the Church? +8. Tell about the dedication of the Kirtland Temple. 9. Who appeared to +Joseph and Oliver in the temple? 10. What causes many to fall from the +Church? 11. What is the only safe way to remain faithful. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII. + +THE MISSION TO ENGLAND. + + +In the year 1837, when the evil one was trying with all his might to +overthrow the Church both at Kirtland and in Missouri, the Lord told Joseph +that the time had come for "something new" to be done. This was to send +missionaries to England and open the gospel door to that people. + +Elder Heber C. Kimball was chosen to take the lead of this mission, and +with him went Orson Hyde, Willard Richards, Joseph Fielding, John Goodson, +Isaac Russell, and John Snider. + +This was the first mission to any foreign country, and in those days of +slow travel, a trip to Europe was no small matter. The brethren set out on +their journey without purse or scrip, but the Lord opened up their way, and +at last they landed in Liverpool, England, July 20, 1837. + +They were in a strange country, had no money, no friends. + +[Illustration: PRESIDENT HEBER C. KIMBALL] + +"Go to Preston," said the Spirit of the Lord to them. Preston is a city +thirty miles from Liverpool, and there they went. Joseph Fielding had a +brother living in the city, who was a preacher, and on his invitation the +missionaries held their first meeting in his chapel. This was the first +Sunday after their arrival. The people listened eagerly to what the elders +said, for it seems that a great many honest souls had been waiting for just +such a message. + +After the third meeting, the Rev. Mr. Fielding would not let the elders use +his church, as he was afraid they would take away his congregation. From +that time he opposed the missionaries, and was soon joined in this by other +preachers. + +However, the people had received a taste of the gospel and they wanted +more, so meetings were held in private houses. On the eighth day after the +arrival of the elders in England, nine persons were baptized into the +Church by Elder Kimball. + +Thus was the door opened, and the gospel soon spread in a wonderful manner. +The elders now separated and went to different towns, preaching, baptizing, +and organizing branches of the Church. Great crowds came out to hear them, +especially in and around the city of Preston. It was a most glorious time +and full of interesting events which this little book cannot tell you +about; but here is a sample: + +One day Elder Kimball told some of the brethren that he thought of going to +a place called Chatburn, to hold meetings. He was told that it would do no +good, as it was a very wicked place, and the people there would have +nothing to do with preachers. Elder Kimball went, however, and large crowds +came out to hear him. While teaching the people the need of repenting of +their evil doings and being baptized for the remission of their sins, +Brother Kimball felt someone pulling at his coat: + +"Please sir, will you baptize me?" asked one. + +"And me, and me!" exclaimed a dozen voices. + +So Elder Kimball went down into the water and baptized twenty-five persons. +As the elders were walking out of the village, the young folks of the place +ran to meet them, the older people stood in their doors to greet and bless +them, while the children ran ahead, hand in hand, singing their songs of +gladness. + +At a conference held in Preston, April 8, 1838, there were reports from +twenty-six branches of the Church. The total number of souls in the Church +was reported to be about two thousand; and all this was done in the short +space of eight months. + +The next day Elders Kimball, Hyde, and Russell left for home, leaving +Willard Richards to preside over the mission. Many were the sad partings +these brethren had with the Saints, for a great love grows up between the +Saints in the world and the elders who have brought them the gospel. + +January 11, 1840, Elders John Taylor and Wilford Woodruff landed in +England. Brother Woodruff was led by the Spirit to go into a part of +England called Herefordshire. Here he found a religious body of people +called United Brethren. They had withdrawn from the Church of England, and +were now praying that the Lord would send them more light. These people +heard Elder Woodruff gladly, and with joy they received the gospel. Within +one month he baptized all their preachers, forty-five in number, and one +hundred and sixty of their members. In eight months time Elder Woodruff +brought eighteen hundred souls into the Church, including all the six +hundred United Brethren, save one. + +At one time just as Elder Woodruff was about to begin a meeting, a +constable came to arrest him for preaching. The officer was asked to take a +seat, and was told that after the meeting Elder Woodruff would be at his +service. The constable was very much interested in the sermon. At the close +of the meeting seven persons asked for baptism, and the constable was one +of the number. After this, two clerks of the Church of England were sent as +spies to find out what the Mormon elders preached. Both of these men +believed and joined the Church. + +Now came others of the Apostles to England to roll on the work. Brigham +Young, Heber C. Kimball, Parley P. Pratt, Orson Pratt, and George A. Smith +arrived on April 6, 1840. At a conference held in Preston on the 14th, +Willard Richards was ordained an Apostle, so that now there were eight of +the Twelve together. At this meeting it was decided to print a paper to be +called _The Latter-day Saints' Millennial Star_. This paper has been +published from that day to this, it being the oldest publication in the +Church. + +The Church now grew rapidly. Branches were organized in Scotland, Ireland, +Wales, and in many of the large cities in England. At a conference held in +the city of Manchester, April 6, 1841, it was found that there were about +six thousand members of the Church in Great Britain. Eight hundred Saints +had emigrated to America during the year. At this conference, nine of the +Twelve were present, Orson Hyde having arrived on his way to Palestine, +where he was going to dedicate that land for the gathering of the Jews. + +Shortly after this conference, the apostles left England to return home, +leaving Parley P. Pratt in charge of the mission. From that time the work +has continued in Great Britain, and many honest souls have come to the +knowledge of the gospel. + +Topics.--1. The first mission to England. 2. Wilford Woodruff's +experience. 3. Mission of the eight Apostles. + +Questions and Review.--1. When were the first missionaries sent to +England? 2. Who were they? 3. Where was the first sermon preached? 4. How +did the people receive the elders? 5. What happened at Chatburn? 6. What +was accomplished in eight months? 7. Who were the second missionaries to +England? 8. Who were the United Brethren? 9. Tell of President Woodruff's +work among them. 10. Who composed the third party of missionaries? 11. What +was done at the conference held April 14, 1840. 12. What is the Millennial +Star? 13. What was Orson Hyde's mission to Palestine? + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +FAR WEST. + + +We must now leave the pleasant scenes of preaching the gospel in England, +and go back to the more troubled times among the main body of the Saints in +the State of Missouri. + +You will remember that when the Saints were driven from Jackson county, +they found a place to rest in Clay county just north across the river. The +people of Clay received them kindly, and the Saints stayed for about three +years in that county. During this period, they tried many times to regain +their homes by asking the governor and even the president of the United +States to enforce the laws and see that their lands and homes were given +back to them. Governor Dunklin talked very pleasantly about the rights of +the Saints, but in the end he did nothing to protect the people or help +them to gain possession of their property. + +At a large meeting held in Liberty, the county seat of Clay county, on the +16th of June, 1834, in order to try to settle the trouble between the +Saints and the Jackson county people, the following offer was made by the +Jackson men to the Saints: + +The Jackson people offered to buy all the land of the "Mormons" in Jackson +county, paying them a high price for it within thirty days, or the people +of Jackson offered to sell all their lands to the "Mormons" at the same +high price to be paid for in thirty days. This offer may seem to be fair, +but when it is remembered that the Lord had revealed to them that the city +of Zion should be built in Jackson county, and had told the Saints to buy +and not sell, it will be seen that this offer was not meant in good faith. +Again, the Saints could not buy out all the mobbers' land in Jackson, much +as they would have liked so to do, as there was so much of it, and they had +no money to pay for it in thirty days. The Saints therefore could not agree +to this, but they made an offer to buy out the lands of those who could not +live in peace with them, and pay them in one year. + +Nothing came of these offers. + +And now the people of Clay county asked the Saints to remove from their +midst. The country was again getting excited about the "Mormons," and the +Clay county people were afraid that the mobs would come to disturb them; so +in order to be on good terms with the people who had been friends to them, +the Saints again left their homes and traveled north-east, away out into +the country where there were hardly any settlers. Here they began to build +a city which they called Far West, and after a time they had a county laid +off which was named Caldwell. + +This movement began in September, 1836, and by the next summer nearly all +the Saints had left Clay county. + +You will call to mind that the Prophet Joseph, with the brethren in Zion's +Camp had visited the Saints while in Clay county. In the spring of 1838 +Joseph arrived at Far West from Kirtland, and from that time on the Prophet +remained with the main body of the Saints in Missouri and Illinois. + +The Saints now had peace again for a season. They gathered to Far West and +surrounding places from Kirtland and other eastern localities. Farms were +made, houses built, towns laid out, and it seemed as if the Saints could at +last live and enjoy their rights as Americans. + +Joseph was busy setting the Church in order and in receiving the word of +the Lord for the guidance of the Saints. + +One of the most important revelations given at this time was regarding the +law of tithing. This law says that the Saints should first put all their +surplus property into the hands of the bishop to be used for the benefit of +the Church, and then after that, they should pay one tenth of all they +made, as a tithing to the Lord; and the Lord further said that if the +Saints did not keep this law, the land whereon they dwelt should not be a +land of Zion unto them. + +In the year 1838 the Saints in and around Far West numbered about twelve +thousand. Thus you see they began to be a power in the land, especially +when it came to voting for officers of the state and county. At these times +the Saints would of course vote for good men, men who were their friends, +and this often made the Missourians angry. + +At an election in Gallatin, the county seat of Daviess county, August 6, +1838, a mob of Missourians tried to prevent the brethren from voting. A +general fight was the result, in which the "Mormons" defended themselves +with umbrellas, sticks, whips, and their stout fists. + +Reports came to Joseph and the people in Far West that some of the brethren +had been killed and that the mobbers would not let their bodies be buried. +At this, Joseph, with about twenty armed men, rode towards the scene of +trouble. On the way he learned that the report was not true. They then +called on a justice of the peace, named Adam Black. Mr. Black promised +Joseph that he would not aid the mob, but would enforce the laws justly. +Next day Joseph and his party held a meeting with some leading men of the +county, wherein both parties promised to keep the peace, and if any person +broke the law in this respect he was to be given up to the officers of the +law and punished. + +Some twenty days after Mr. Black had made such good promises, he and some +others had papers made out for the arrest of Joseph Smith and Lyman Wight +for coming into Daviess co., and doing all kinds of wicked deeds. When the +constable called on Joseph at Far West, Joseph said he was willing to stand +trial, but he wanted it to be in Caldwell, instead of Daviess county, as in +the latter there existed too much excitement and ill-feeling. The officer +did not arrest the Prophet at this time, but the report spread that Joseph +had resisted the officer and would not be arrested. To prove how false this +was, Joseph with his brother Hyrum and some others, went to Daviess county +for trial. At this trial Mr. Black swore to some wicked falsehoods, and +although four witnesses told the truth of the matter, Joseph and Lyman were +bound over, that is, they were to be ready to stand trial when the regular +court should meet. + +False reports now flew far and wide again, and the mobs began to gather +from other counties to "help drive the Mormons from the State." Some of the +mob painted and dressed themselves up as Indians. The Saints, especially in +the smaller settlements, were attacked, until they had to flee to Far West +for protection. The Saints now thought it time to protect themselves from +the mobs, so they organized a company of state militia. Lyman Wight was an +officer in this militia and he commanded the men. He succeeded in driving +the mob from Daviess county, but this of course, only made the excitement +the greater. + +On the evening of October 24, 1838, news reached Far West that a Methodist +preacher by the name of Bogart was leading a mob to destroy the property of +the Saints on Log Creek. That same evening a company of about seventy-five +men led by Captain David W. Patten mounted their horses and rode to the +scene of trouble. Early the next morning, just as it was getting daylight +the mob was found encamped on Crooked River. The Far West Militia +dismounted and marched on to the enemy. A battle took place. The mob took +refuge behind the river bank, while the brethren charged them sword in +hand. The enemy was soon put to flight across the river. As they were +fleeing, one of the mobbers wheeled around from behind a tree and shot +Captain Patten, who instantly fell. A number of brethren were badly +wounded, and two died the next night. One was Patterson O'Banion, and the +other Captain Patten. + +Brother Patten was a member of the first quorum of Twelve Apostles. He had +taken an active part in the affairs of the Church up to the time of his +death, having filled many missions and done many great works in the name of +Jesus Christ. Apostle Patten was one of the first martyrs of the Church. Of +him Joseph the Prophet said at his funeral: + +"There lies a man who has done just as he said he would; he has laid down +his life for his friends." + +Topics.--1. The Saints in Clay county. 2. Removed to Caldwell county. 3. +The beginning of trouble. 4. The Crooked River battle. 5. Apostle David W. +Patten. + +Questions and Review.--1. From Jackson county where did the Saints go? 2. +How did they try to get their homes again? 3. What did Governor Dunklin do? +4. What offer did the Jackson people make to the Saints? 5. Why did not +the Saints accept this offer? 6. What did the Saints offer to do? 7. Why +did the people of Clay county wish the Saints to leave them? 8. When and +where did the Saints then go? 9. What is the law of tithing? 10. What was +the case of the new trouble between the Saints and the Missourians? 11. +What came of Joseph's trip to Daviess county? 12. Describe the Crooked +River battle. 13. Tell about David W. Patten. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +THE HAUN'S MILL MASSACRE. + + +In this chapter I wish to tell you about one of the saddest events that +happened in all that sad time of persecution in Missouri. + +It occurred on October 30, 1838, during the time of great excitement, when +bands of armed men roamed over the country doing what damage they could to +the homes of the Saints. + +At a point on Shoal Creek, about sixteen miles from Fat West, a brother by +the name of Haun had built a flour mill. Besides the mill there were a +blacksmith shop and half a dozen houses. About thirty families lived here, +some of which had just arrived from the Eastern States and were yet camping +in their tents. + +This little body of Saints had been threatened by mobs a number of times, +but on the 28th, a treaty of peace was made in which each party agreed not +to molest the other. Before this, however, Joseph had advised the Saints at +Haun's Mill to move into Far West, which advice they had not taken. + +October 30th was a beautiful autumn day. The air was warm, and the breeze +stirred the fields of wheat and rustled the corn. The children were playing +on the banks of the creek, and their merry laugh was echoed by the birds in +the forest close at hand. All seemed peaceful and lovely. + +[Illustration: HAUN'S MILL.] + +About four o'clock in the afternoon, a company of two hundred and forty +men dashed up to the clearing. Brother David Evans who had command of the +few brethren, ran out to meet them, swinging his hat and crying, "Peace, +peace." The leader of the mob told all who desired to save their lives and +make peace to run into the blacksmith shop. Some of the brethren did this, +but in a few seconds after, a volley was fired into the shop. The bullets +went between the logs, which were far apart, and in at the open door, +killing and wounding the brethren within. Some few shots were fired back, +but the brethren soon saw it was useless to resist, so they tried to save +themselves as best they could. Men, women and children scattered in every +direction taking refuge in the woods, while the bullets of the mobbers flew +thick and fast among them, wounding and killing. + +The mob kept on firing at the shop until they thought all within were +killed; then they went about the place killing all they could find alive, +and robbing the houses of everything they could carry off. They even +stripped the dead and dying of their clothes. They went into the blacksmith +shop for this purpose, and there they saw dead men lying in piles, and +wounded men groaning in pain, while pools of blood stood on the floor. A +little ten year old boy named Sardius Smith had crawled under the bellows, +trying to hide from the wicked mobbers; but one of them saw him and dragged +him out. Then putting the muzzle of his gun to the boy's head he killed him +instantly. Sardius' little brother, Alma, seven years old had a great hole +shot in his hip; but he lay still, fearing that if he moved they would +shoot him again. Another boy by the name of Charles Merrick was discovered. +He pleaded with the mobbers not to kill him: "I am an American boy," he +said "O! don't kill me!" The mobber heeded not, but blew out his brains. + +Thomas McBride, an old, gray-haired man who had fought in the +Revolutionary War under Washington, gave up his gun to a mobber, and then +pleaded for his life. The cruel mobber took the gun and shot the old man +dead, and then another mobber cut him to pieces with an old corn cutter. + +Thus it continued. I cannot tell you half of the horrible things which +happened. At last the mobbers departed, and night came on. Then, lowly and +fearfully, the women and children and what few men were left crept out of +their hiding places to see what had been done and to help as best they +could. Perhaps you can imagine what they saw and how they felt during that +long, dark night in the midst of dead and dying husbands, brothers and +sons. + +Next morning it was found that nineteen men and boys were dead, or wounded +so badly that they could not live, and about fifteen others were wounded. +What to do with the dead was the question. There were not men enough to dig +graves; besides, the mob might come back again and finish their awful work; +so the best they could do was to put the nineteen bodies into a large, dry +well that was close by. This was done, and straw and earth placed on top. + +Sister Smith, mother of Sardius and Alma, has told some of the experiences +which she passed through during that awful time. Her husband and one son +were killed, while another son had his hip nearly shot away. During that +first night she says that she prayed to God to know what to do for her +wounded boy, and the Lord distinctly whispered to her what kind of poultice +to put on the wound and how to treat him. + +"I removed the boy to a house next day," she says, "and dressed his hip, +the Lord directing me as before." + +"'Alma, my child,' I said, 'you believe that the Lord made your hip?' + +"'Yes, mother.' + +"'Well, the Lord can make something there in place of your hip, don't you +believe he can, Alma?' + +"'Do you think that the Lord can, mother?' + +"'Yes, my son,' I replied, 'He has shown it all to me in a vision.' + +"And then I laid him comfortably on his face and said: 'Now you lay like +that and don't move, and the Lord will make you another hip.' + +"So I laid Alma on his face for five weeks, until he was entirely +recovered, a flexible gristle having grown in place of the missing joint +and socket." + +Alma grew up to be a man and became a useful member of the Church. + +Topics.--1. The massacre at Haun's Mill. 2. Sardius and Alma Smith. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where was Haun's Mill. 2. What advice did +Joseph give the Saints who lived there? 3. What happened October 30, 1838? +4. Tell about the Smith boys and Charles Merrick. 5. Tell about Thomas +McBride. 6. How many were killed? + + + + +CHAPTER XXI. + +DRIVEN FROM MISSOURI. + + +Wild reports now went over the country about the "Mormons;" and to make +these reports seem true some of the mobbers actually set fire to their own +log cabins and then accused the Saints of the act. + +In a previous chapter, mention was made of Lilburn W. Boggs. This man was +now governor of the state, and we shall see how he used his power against +the "Mormons," whom he hated so much. + +The reports that the "Mormons" were burning houses and driving people from +their homes, reached the governor, and he believed, or pretended to +believe, all these false stories. So he gave orders to the officers of the +state militia to organize an army of 2,000 men, march to the scene of the +trouble, and see that the people whom the "Mormons" had driven from their +homes were returned to them. Note how eager the governor was to restore +these few presumably abused people to their lands--but it was all right +that twelve hundred "Mormons" should be driven from their property! + +The next day after the governor had issued this order, the news of the +Crooked River battle reached him, so he changed his instructions to the +commanding officer, General Clark. This order, given October 27, 1838, is +known as Governor Boggs' exterminating order, and is one of the most +disgraceful and wicked commands known in history. Exterminate means to +destroy utterly, to root out completely, and this is what a governor of a +state said should be done to twelve thousand innocent people if they did +not leave the state. + +Companies of Missouri militia now came marching from various parts of the +state into Caldwell and other counties nearby. Soon Far West was surrounded +by an army. Niel Gillium was there with his band of men in Indian costume, +who whooped and yelled like true savages. On the evening of October 30th, a +party of men came fresh from the awful massacre, at Haun's Mill, eager for +more blood. Thus the town was surrounded, and as it seemed, doomed to +destruction. + +The few brethren in Far West prepared to defend themselves as best they +could. It might appear useless for a handful of men to oppose an army, but +when men are fighting for their homes, their liberty, their wives and their +children, a few can do mighty deeds. + +But they were not to fight. Traitors were in the camp of the Saints and +they now betrayed their brethren into the hands of the enemy. Colonel +George M. Hinkle was the commander of the Far West militia, and he went to +the mob commanders and promised to deliver up to them the Church leaders. +He also made an agreement with them that the Saints would deliver up their +arms, sign away their property to pay the expenses of the war, and then +leave the state. This was all done without the knowledge of the "Mormons" +or their leaders. + +On the evening of October 30th, Colonel Hinkle told Joseph Smith, Sidney +Rigdon, Parley P. Pratt, Lyman Wight, and George W. Robinson that the +officers of the mob-militia wanted to consult with them and try to arrange +matters. Next morning these brethren went with Hinkle some distance out of +Far West where they were met by General Lucas, and soon most of the mob +came up. Lucas ordered his men to surround the brethren, when Hinkle +stepped up and said: + +"General Lucas, these are the prisoners I agreed to deliver to you." + +The brethren were then marched into the camp of the mob-militia where they +were received with great shouts, curses, and yells. All that night they +were compelled to lie on the cold ground, and it rained before morning. The +next day Hyrum Smith and Amasa M. Lyman were brought as prisoners into +camp. + +That day General Lucas demanded the arms of the "Mormons," promising them +protection, and the return of their guns after the trouble was over; but no +sooner had the mob obtained possession of the arms then they began stealing +and carrying away everything they could lay their hands on. They also +destroyed much property and abused innocent women and children. Those of +the brethren that had property were compelled to sign it away to the mob. + +On the evening of November 1st, General Lucas held a court in which Joseph +and his brethren were to be tried. This court was composed of seventeen +preachers and some army officers. None of the prisoners were present, and +knew nothing of what was going on. The brethren were found guilty and +sentenced to be shot next morning at eight, o'clock, on the public square +in Far West. When the sentence was passed Generals Doniphan and Graham said +it was murder, and they would have nothing to do with it. This checked +Lucas in his evil designs and so they decided to take the prisoners to +Jackson county and kill them there. Before starting, they were allowed to +go to their homes and see their families, but they were not permitted to +speak to them. Their wives and children clung to them, crying in their +despair, and were only separated by the cruel swords of the guards. + +Fifty-six of the leading brethren were now taken prisoners and sent to the +town of Richmond. Most of them were released shortly after. + +On November 6th General Clark made his famous speech to the Saints in Far +West, wherein he told them that he had come to carry out the governor's +orders to destroy them, but he would be lenient and give them a little time +to get out of the state. He advised the Saints to be like other people and +not organize themselves with bishops, presidents, etc. It was a very +foolish, conceited speech. + +About twenty-five miles north of Far West was a beautiful settlement of +the Saints. Joseph said it was the place where our father Adam had blessed +his children, and where he will come again to visit his people. So the +place was called Adam-ondi-Ahman. The people here had suffered with the +rest of the Saints, and now in the cold month of November they were driven +from their homes and took refuge for the winter in Far West. + +During that hard winter and time of trial when Joseph and many of his +brethren were in prison and many others had apostatized, one name comes to +the front as that of a faithful man. It is Brigham Young. He was ever true +to the Prophet, and Joseph could rely on him. With him were such noble men +as Heber C. Kimball, John Taylor, and many others. Brigham was now +president of the Twelve, and it was his duty to take the lead in looking +after the affairs of the Church during the absence of the First Presidency. + +In January, 1839, Brigham Young called a meeting to consider what should be +done in aiding the poor Saints to remove from Missouri. President Young +presented a resolution that the brethren should never desert the poor +Saints, but that they should help them to escape from their persecutors. A +great many brethren agreed to this, and that winter and spring the move +eastward to Illinois continued. They did not travel in large bodies, but in +small companies as they got ready. Not one family who wished to go was left +behind. + +The sufferings of that winter journey cannot be told you here. Many died on +the way through exposure and hardships. The mobs would not let them alone +even when they were leaving as fast as they could. Mobs often rode into Far +West, abused the people, stole horses, drove off cattle and took anything +that pleased them. The Saints traded their farms for horses and wagons in +which to get away. Sometimes fine farms were nearly given away. It is told +of one brother that he sold forty acres of good land for a blind mare and a +clock. + +July 8, 1838, the Lord gave a revelation wherein he called the Twelve +Apostles to go on a mission to England. The Twelve were to take leave of +the Saints at the temple site in Far West, April 26, 1839. (Doc. and Cov., +Sec. 118.) This time had now come, but it seemed impossible that it could +be carried out, as most of the Saints had left Far West and the mobbers +swore that this was a revelation that should not be fulfilled. They would +kill the first Apostle that came into the place, they said. + +However, seven of the Twelve arrived at Far West the night before the 26th, +and early next morning they went to the temple lot, rolled a large stone to +the southeast corner of the temple grounds as a foundation, and then +proceeded to hold a meeting. Elders Wilford Woodruff and George A. Smith +were then ordained Apostles, the brethren prayed and sang and then +dismissed the meeting, bidding good-bye to the eighteen Saints present. Not +a mobber was astir that morning, and the word of the Lord was again +fulfilled. + +Topics.--1. Governor Boggs' exterminating order. 2. Betrayal of Joseph +and his brethren. 3. Adam-ondi-Ahman. 4. Departure from Far West. 5. The +meeting of the Twelve at Far West. + +Questions and Review.--1. How did the mob make the people believe that +the "Mormons" were burning houses, etc.? 2. What reports were brought to +Governor Boggs? 3. What was the exterminating order? 4. What kinds of +"soldiers" surrounded Far West? 5. What did Colonel Hinkle do? 6. What kind +of court did General Lucas have to try Joseph and his brethren? 7. What was +their sentence? 8. Why was it not carried out? 9. What did General Clark +say in his speech? 10. Where was Adam-ondi-Ahman? 11. Why was it so called? +12. What did Brigham Young now do? 13. Tell about the meeting held at Far +West, April 26, 1839. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +IN MISSOURI PRISONS. + + +From Far West Joseph and his brethren who had been taken prisoners were +marched towards Jackson county. At first General Wilson who had them in +charge treated the brethren badly, but as they proceeded on their journey +he became quite friendly, and told the prisoners that he was just going to +show the people of Independence what a "set of fine fellows you are." + +While on the march the Lord comforted Joseph, and he spoke to the other +prisoners as follows: "Be of good cheer, brethren; the word of the Lord +came to me last night that our lives should be given us, and that whatever +we may suffer during this captivity, not one of our lives shall be taken." + +After they had crossed the Missouri river into Jackson county, many people +came to see these wonders, the "Mormons." One lady came up and asked the +guards which of the prisoners the "Mormons" worshiped. Joseph was pointed +out to her. She then asked the Prophet if he professed to be the Lord and +Savior. Joseph said he was only a man sent by Jesus Christ to preach the +gospel. Quite a crowd had gathered around, and Joseph went on explaining +the principles of faith, repentance, etc. Thus Joseph preached a sermon in +Jackson county in fulfillment of a prediction he had made some months +before. + +At Independence their treatment was not bad. The people seemed curious to +see them, and the brethren spent their time in talking with people who came +to them. + +General Clark, who also wanted some of the "honor" of having these noted +prisoners, now ordered them to Richmond, in Ray county, where the general +had a talk with them. Shortly after this, some guards came into the jail +house and fastened the seven prisoners together by means of a chain and +pad-locks. In this way they lived in a room without chairs or beds, +sleeping on the hard, cold floor at nights. Guards with loaded guns stood +watch over them, and talked to each other of the wicked deeds they had done +at Far West and other places near by. About these horrible acts they +boasted in glee while the prisoners had to lie and hear it all. + +One night, says P.P. Pratt, he lay next to Joseph, listening to all this +vile talk, when suddenly Joseph arose to his feet and spoke in a voice of +thunder, or as the roaring lion, these words: + +"'_Silence! ye fiends of the infernal pit! In the name of Jesus Christ I +rebuke you, and command you to be still. I will not live another minute and +hear such language. Cease your talk, or you or I die this minute_' + +"He ceased to speak. He stood erect in terrible majesty, chained and +without a weapon; calm, unruffled, and dignified as an angel, he looked +down upon the quailing guards, whose weapons dropped to the ground, whose +knees smote together." The ruffians instantly became still, and were very +glad when a change of guard came so that they could get away. + +General Clark tried hard to find some law by which he could have Joseph +tried by an army court, but he failed in this and therefore he handed the +prisoners over to the civil authorities. + +Another farce of a trial was now had. About forty men, mostly apostates, +testified against the prisoners. The brethren had no witnesses, and when +the mobber Bogart was sent to Far West for some, he simply arrested them +and put them in prison. The result of the hearing was that Joseph Smith, +Hyrum Smith, Sidney Rigdon, Lyman Wight, Alexander McRae, and Caleb Baldwin +were sent to Liberty, Clay county, to jail. Parley P. Pratt and others were +to remain in Richmond jail, while some others were released. + +Joseph with his fellow-prisoners remained in Liberty jail from November 28, +1838, to April 6, 1839. During all this time they suffered the hardships of +prison life, together with abuses not usually imposed on common prisoners. +It is claimed by some that they were offered human flesh to eat. During +this time of trial Joseph was cheerful and told the brethren they would get +out safe. He wrote many letters of instruction to the Saints, bidding them +to be faithful to their religion. The brethren who were at liberty were not +idle. They were appealing continually to the judges and the governor for +justice for their brethren, but it was of little use. At one hearing, +Sidney Rigdon was released but he had to go back to jail for a time because +the mob threatened to kill him. + +Seeing that it was useless trying to be released lawfully the brethren +decided to try to escape. The evening of February 7, 1839, when the guard +should come with their supper, was fixed as the time to try; but Hyrum +wanted to be sure about the matter so he asked Joseph to enquire of the +Lord if it was wisdom for them to make the attempt. Joseph did so and was +informed that if they were all united they would be able to escape that +evening. Therefore all but Lyman Wight agreed to the plan. He wanted to +wait till the next day, and as the brethren would not go without him, they +decided to wait. + +That evening the guard left the door wide open and gave them a good chance +to escape, but they did not try. The next evening the jailor brought a +double guard with him, and six of the brethren came to see the prisoners. +Though it was a very poor chance to escape, they meant to try. When the +guard went to close the door the prisoners followed and tried to prevent +him, but they did not succeed. All but one of the visiting brethren were +also locked in, and he had a narrow escape from the mob outside who soon +collected and made all kinds of threats against the prisoners. + +The visitors now thought that they also were in great danger, but Joseph +told them not to fear, as not a hair of their heads would be injured. This +promise came true, because at a trial they had next day they were all set +free and nothing was taken from them. + +April 6, 1839, the prisoners were ordered to Gallatin, Daviess county. +After their long confinement the brethren were weak, and it was hard to +stand the long journey. On the 9th they had another trial or hearing. The +jury consisted mainly of men who had taken part in the Haun's Mill +massacre, and most of the time during the trial they were drunk. The +presiding officer, Judge King, was also as bad as the jury. This mock trial +continued for several days. Men who sat on the jury during the day acted as +guards at night, where they boasted of their murders, thefts, etc., to the +prisoners. This trial resulted in the brethren being held for "murder, +treason, burglary, arson, larceny, theft, and stealing." + +The prisoners now asked for a change of venue, that is, a change of place +of trial. This was granted, and on April 15 they started for Boone county +under guard of the sheriff and four men. On the night of the 16th the +sheriff told them he was going to take a drink of grog before going to bed +and they could do as they pleased. The sheriff and three of the guards went +to bed drunk, and the other guard helped the brethren saddle the horses and +get away. They traveled day and night, and after much suffering Joseph +arrived at the city of Quincy, Illinois, April 22, 1839, where he was +gladly welcomed by his family and friends. + +Topics.--1. Prisoners taken to Independence. 2. In Richmond jail. 3. In +Liberty jail. 4. The attempt to escape. 5. Their last trial and escape. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who were taken as prisoners to Independence? 2. +What prediction did Joseph make while on the way? 3. How did Joseph fulfill +his own prophecy in Jackson county? 4. Where were they taken next? 5. How +were they treated in Richmond jail? 6. Describe Joseph's rebuke. 7. Where +next were they sent? 8. How long were they in Liberty jail? 9. Why was the +attempt to escape a failure? 10. Where were they next taken? 11. Describe +their last trial. 12. How did they escape? + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII. + +NAUVOO. + + +From his prison in Missouri, Joseph had advised his brethren to buy land in +the state of Illinois and Iowa. Towards these states, therefore, the Saints +had fled, leaving merciless, blood-stained Missouri to the judgment of God. + +Twenty years afterwards when the great war broke out between the North and +the South, Missouri was one of the fiercest battle grounds, and its people +suffered terribly for the misery and bloodshed they had brought upon the +Saints. + +The people of Illinois received the homeless Saints kindly, and sold them +land upon which to live. At a small place called Commerce, situated on the +east bank of the Mississippi river, Joseph bought land, and there he +decided to locate the headquarters of the Church. The place was beautifully +situated in a bend of the river. Here a city was laid out and called +Nauvoo, meaning beauty and rest, and Joseph invited the Saints to settle +and build up the place. It was no small task to gather the scattered Saints +into one body again, but early in the summer of 1839 a number of houses +were erected in the new city. + +[Illustration: THE NAUVOO HOUSE.] + +Now came another trouble. Commerce was not a healthful place, but the +Saints were promised that that would be changed; however, it was not long +before a great many of the Saints became sick. Nearly every house was +afflicted, and Joseph himself also took the fever. On the morning of July +22nd, Joseph arose from his bed and commenced administering to the sick. He +began with those in his own house, then went to some camping in his yard. +The Prophet commanded the sick in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ to +arise from their beds and be made whole, and the sick were healed on ever +side. He then went from house to house and from tent to tent upon the bank +of the river, healing the people. Many wonderful healings were performed. +Joseph would take the sick person by the hand, or stand in the door of the +tent and command the afflicted person to arise and be made whole. The +Prophet with some of the brethren who were now with him crossed the river +to the place where Brigham Young was lying ill. President Young was soon +healed and followed with the rest. As there were many whom the Prophet +could not reach, the Twelve were sent to administer to them. Joseph gave +Wilford Woodruff a silk handkerchief which he was to use in healing some +children. President Woodruff kept the handkerchief to the day of his death. + +After this, there was very little sickness in Nauvoo. During the summer and +fall of 1839 the city grew rapidly. About this time seven of the Twelve +left for their mission to England, of which you have been told, and the +English Saints soon began to gather to Nauvoo. + +Late in October, 1839, Joseph went to the city of Washington to lay the +troubles of the Church before the authorities of the nation. Joseph made +the acquaintance of many leading men, among them John C. Calhoun, and +Henry Clay. Martin Van Buren was president, and to him Joseph told of the +wrongs they had suffered from the people of Missouri. It was then that the +president made the famous remark: "Your cause is just, but I can do nothing +for you." His meaning, no doubt, was that the president of the United +States had no right to interfere with the affairs of a state; but that all +such troubles should be settled by the state itself. + +[Illustration: THE NAUVOO MANSION.] + +So Joseph returned without any help. Meanwhile, Nauvoo grew into a large +city. Ten wards were laid off and organized. April 6, 1841, the corner +stone of the temple was laid. Many public buildings were erected. Good +houses were built, and beautiful gardens soon bloomed around them. On the +outskirts of the city, fields of grain stretched as far as the eye could +reach. In 1842 there were 20,000 people in the city, and Nauvoo promised to +be one of the largest cities in the West. + +The fame of Joseph and the "Mormon" city spread, and many people came to +see the wonder. Missionaries were sent out to preach, the _Times and +Seasons_ published by the Church, printed many Gospel truths and much +important history. The militia was organized and the city had a +well-drilled body of men called the Nauvoo Legion. Peace and prosperity +smiled upon them for a season, and it seemed that at last there would be a +permanent stake of Zion established. + +But it was not to be. The hate that burned in the hearts of evil men had +not grown less, but was only waiting for a chance to show itself. Trouble +again arose. It would not be easy to understand the many causes that led to +these troubles, but a few may be noted. + +The Saints now had great power at the polls, the same as in Missouri. The +"Mormons" would not vote for men who would not give them their rights, and +so many of these politicians became their enemies and stirred up the people +against the Saints by their many lies. Then, there were the jealousies of +the sectarian preachers; and perhaps worse than all, the evil work of +apostates. Then it happened that a band of thieves troubled the +neighborhood, and of course the "Mormons" were blamed. It was not a hard +matter to find excuses for a further persecution of the Latter-day Saints. + +And now came again Governor Boggs, of Missouri. He, it seems, had not had +enough, so he asked Governor Carlin to deliver to him Joseph and the other +brethren who had escaped from Missouri. Governor Carlin of Illinois, made +out the papers for the brethren's arrest, but the officer could not find +them when he went to Nauvoo. He therefore returned without his prisoners, +and nothing more was done in the matter until nearly a year later, when +Joseph was visiting the governor at Quincy. Governor Carlin treated Joseph +kindly, but as soon as the Prophet had left, some of the officers were sent +after him. They overtook Joseph and arrested him on the old charge from +Missouri. However, they went on to Nauvoo, where the sheriff, being sick, +was taken good care of by his prisoner. As it was Joseph's right by law to +be tried in Illinois, he was permitted to have a hearing before Judge +Stephen A. Douglas, in Monmouth, Illinois. There was great excitement at +the trial, some of his enemies trying to excite a mob against him. At the +close of the hearing Joseph was set free by the judge. + +Dr. J.C. Bennett was the mayor of Nauvoo, and held other high positions; +but he proved to be a very wicked man. At one time, when the Legion was +having a sham fight, Bennett tried to get Joseph into a position that he +might be shot without anyone knowing who did it. This did not succeed. Then +he began to commit sin, and say that Joseph upheld him in it. Bennett was +of course cut off from the Church, after which he wrote many false things +against Joseph and the Saints and was the means of bringing much +persecution on them. + +In May, 1842, Ex-Governor Boggs of Missouri was shot at and wounded by some +person in Independence. Although at this time they were hundreds of miles +from Independence, Joseph Smith and O.P. Rockwell were charged with this +crime, and again papers were issued for their arrest. They were tried in +Nauvoo and acquitted. As the Missourians were trying many schemes to take +Joseph to Missouri and there kill him, he went in hiding for a time. Every +effort was made to take Joseph, and rewards were offered for his capture. +Elder Rockwell was kidnapped and taken to Missouri, where he was +ill-treated, but at last escaped. + +Thomas Ford now became governor of Illinois and to him Joseph went. The +governor prevailed upon Joseph to stand another trial, which was held at +Springfield, Illinois. Joseph was again proved innocent and released. + +But the fiends from Missouri would not give up. Once again he was taken +while away from Nauvoo, by two officers, who abused him shamefully. I +cannot tell you all about his exciting adventures--that you must read in a +larger history--but at last he arrived safe again in Nauvoo. + +Persecution continued. Mobs now gathered around Nauvoo. Threats were made +that mobs would come from Missouri, and join with those of Illinois, +against the "Mormons." There was great unrest. When Joseph was spoken to +about the danger he was in, he said he was not exposed to as much danger +from outside enemies as from traitors within. "_We have a Judas in our +midst_," he said. + +Thus ended the year 1843. + +Topics.--1. Settlement at Nauvoo. 2. The healing of the sick. 3. City of +Nauvoo. 4. Attempts to take Joseph to Missouri. + +Questions and Review.--1. Locate Nauvoo. 2. What was its name before it +was called Nauvoo? 3. Relate how Joseph healed the sick. 4. When did Joseph +go to Washington? 5. What was his mission there? 6. What answer did +President Martin Van Buren make? 7. Why was it useless to expect justice +from Missouri? 8. What kind of city did Nauvoo become? 9. What was the +Times and Seasons? 10. What was the Nauvoo Legion? 11. Name some of the +causes that led to the new persecution. 12. Who was Dr. Bennett, and what +did he do? 13. Tell of the efforts to get Joseph to Missouri. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV. + +THE MARTYRDOM. + + +On January 29, 1844, Joseph Smith was nominated for President of the United +States. Neither he nor his friends had much hopes of his election, but it +gave the citizens of Nauvoo at least a chance to vote for an honest man who +was their friend. Brethren were sent to various parts of the country to +make speeches in his favor, and Joseph published his views on how the +government should be conducted. One of his ideas was that the government +should set the negro slaves free, paying their masters for them. President +Abraham Lincoln, twenty years later, also favored this plan. + +Meanwhile, Nauvoo prospered and the Church grew. When the weather would +permit, meetings were held in a grove near the temple, there being no room +large enough to hold the large crowds of people. Joseph continued to give +many glorious truths to the Church about the nature of God, the land of +Zion, baptism for the dead, and many other things. + +The Prophet's prediction that there was a Judas in their midst soon proved +too true; and there were more than one. William Law, Joseph's second +counselor, William Marks, president of the Nauvoo Stake, with many other +leading men proved themselves false to Joseph and the Church. They even +planned with Joseph's enemies to have him killed. They were also proved +guilty of other sins and were therefore cut off from the Church. After +this, these men said Joseph was a fallen prophet, and so they organized a +church of their own. It did not amount to anything, however. + +Joseph's periods of peace were not many. Apostates were his worst enemies, +and they were all the time annoying him by having him arrested on all +manner of false charges. These men were very bitter, and they howled around +him like a pack of wolves, eager to devour him; but Joseph trusted in the +Saints and they in him, for those who were faithful to their duties knew by +the Spirit of God that Joseph was not a fallen prophet. + +In June, 1844, the enemies of the Saints began to publish a paper in +Nauvoo, called the _Expositor_. Its purpose was to deprive the people of +Nauvoo of their rights, so it boldly said. One paper was printed, and that +was so full of false statements and abuse against the city officials that +the city council declared it a nuisance and had the press, type, etc., +destroyed. + +This raised great excitement among the enemies of the Church. Joseph and +seventeen others were arrested, tried before a court in Nauvoo, and +acquitted; but this did not satisfy the mobbers. On the advice of the +United States judge for that district, Joseph and his brethren allowed +themselves to be arrested again and have a trial before Justice Daniel H. +Wells, then not a "Mormon." They were again discharged as innocent of +crime. + +Now mobs began to threaten again, but the Nauvoo Legion was ready to defend +the city. As the Legion was drawn up in front of Joseph's house one day--it +was the 18th of June--he got upon a platform and spoke to the soldiers. +That speech was long remembered by those who heard it. It thrilled them +through and through and at the word they would gladly have marched and met +the mob in battle; but that was not Joseph's way. He was always willing to +have the laws carried out even if he suffered thereby, so that his enemies +could have no just excuse. That was the Prophet Joseph Smith's last public +speech. + +During the excitement Governor Ford arrived at Carthage, a town about +eighteen miles from Nauvoo, and the county seat of Hancock county. The +governor sent word to Nauvoo that he wanted some explanation of the +trouble, so Joseph sent some of the brethren to him. The governor treated +his callers rudely. Carthage was full of mobs, and the governor seemed to +believe all they told him about the "Mormons." He organized the mobs into +troops. Joseph asked the governor to come to Nauvoo and investigate the +whole matter; but no: Joseph must go to Carthage. The governor said he +would protect him if he would go. + +It was on the evening of June 22nd. Joseph and Hyrum had called some +brethren together: "All they want is Hyrum and myself," said the Prophet. +Joseph and Hyrum both seemed certain that if their enemies got them in +their power again they would be killed. Joseph then proposed that he and +Hyrum should escape to the Rocky Mountains. Preparations for this trip were +made and they were rowed over the river to Iowa, when Joseph's wife sent +some of the brethren to plead with him to return. Some brethren also found +fault with him in running away to "leave the flock to the wolves." + +Joseph replied, "If my life is of no value to my friends, it is of none to +myself." So they went back, Joseph saying, "We shall be butchered." + +On the morning of June 24th Joseph and eighteen brethren set out for +Carthage to be tried again on the old charge. As he rode out the Prophet +made many expressions of goodby to his friends. Four miles from Carthage +they met a company of militia going to Nauvoo with an order from the +governor that the Nauvoo Legion give up its arms. Joseph rode back with +them to see that this was done. Twice he bade his family farewell. His face +was pale, and he was suffering. + +"I am going like a lamb to the slaughter," he said, "but I am calm as a +summer morning." + +At Carthage they were received with oaths and threats by the troops. +Apostates and soldiers swore that the brethren would never leave Carthage +alive. + +The next day the governor paraded the prisoners before the troops, who +insulted them as they passed along. Then they were placed in the jail +awaiting their trial. + +[Illustration: CARTHAGE JAIL.] + +The day following, the prisoners were marched to the court house, guarded +by the troops; but the trial was postponed until the next day, and the +brethren were taken back to jail. + +This was the 26th of June. That night Joseph was lying on the floor with +some of the brethren. Brother Dan Jones was on one side and Brother John S. +Fullmer on the other. + +"Lay your head on my arm for a pillow, Brother John," said Joseph, and +then he talked with him in a low tone. Joseph expressed a desire to see his +family again and preach to the Saints once more. + +To Brother Jones he whispered, "Are you afraid to die?" When Brother Jones +said he was not, Joseph replied, "You will yet see Wales, and fulfill the +mission appointed you, before you die." (Dan Jones did a wonderful +missionary work in Wales.) + +The next morning the guards frequently told some of the brethren that if +they did not wish to be killed they had better get away from Joseph. This +was told to Governor Ford, but he paid no attention to it. + +At 10:30 that morning, June 27, the governor with the most friendly of the +troops left for Nauvoo, and the brethren were left to their fate. + +In an upper room of Carthage jail, Joseph, Hyrum, John Taylor, and Willard +Richards were spending their time in writing letters, singing, talking, and +praying. In the afternoon Joseph asked Elder Taylor to sing the hymn, +commencing: + +"A poor wayfaring man of grief." + +And when it was done he asked him to sing it again. Brother Taylor said he +could hardly sing it, he felt so sad, but he sang the hymn again. + +About 5 o'clock in the afternoon a mob of about two hundred men surrounded +the jail. They had blackened their faces with powder and mud. Then the +firing began. The mob rushed up the stairs, shooting into the room where +the four brethren were. The prisoners sprang to the door to close it but +the guns of the mob forced it open. Elders Taylor and Richards tried to +push the guns aside with their canes. The bullets flew like hail into the +room. One ball came through the door and struck Hyrum in the head. Four +others hit him, and he fell back saying: + +"_I am a dead man_." + +Joseph gazed on his brother and exclaimed: "Oh! dear brother Hyrum!" + +Elder Taylor now tried to jump from the window. A ball struck him, and he +was about to fall from the window, when another bullet from the outside hit +his watch in his vest pocket and threw him back into the room. Here he was +hit by two more balls, and he rolled under the bed. + +Then Joseph went to the open window intending to leap out. Two bullets +struck him and he fell outward, exclaiming: + +"_O Lord, my God_!" + +As soon as he had struck the ground a mobber set him against a well curb a +few feet from the jail, and then, by order of Col. Levi Williams, a mobber +and Baptist preacher, four men sent bullets into his body. + +Then the mob fled, and the whole town of Carthage with them, fearing the +vengeance of the people of Nauvoo. But vengeance is the Lord's. + +Willard Richards was not hurt. That night he spent in attending to his +wounded brother, John Taylor, and watching over the dead bodies of the +Prophet and Patriarch. + +Joseph's earthly work was done, and the Master had called him away from the +haunts of mobs and wicked men. He sealed his testimony with his blood. He +had spent his life in working for the salvation of his fellowman, and even +yet in a freer and grander sphere he is working for the cause of Christ and +the Church. + +Topics.--1. Joseph nominated for president. 2. Traitors. 3. The +Expositor. 4. Joseph goes to Carthage. 5. The martyrdom. + +Questions and Review.--1. When was Joseph nominated for President of the +United States? 2. What were his ideas of slavery? 3. Where were the large +meetings in Nauvoo held? 4. Who proved false to Joseph? 5. How did the +Saints know that Joseph was not a fallen prophet? 6. What was the Nauvoo +Expositor? 7. Why was it destroyed? 8. Why did Joseph object to being tried +in Carthage? 9. On what occasion did Joseph deliver his last speech? 10. +Why did not Joseph go west to the mountains? 11. What did Governor Ford +promise? 12. Give some expressions of the prophet on going to Carthage. 13. +Who were with Joseph in jail? 14. Tell about the martyrdom. 15. When did it +take place? 16. How old was Joseph when he was killed? + + + + +CHAPTER XXV. + +EXPULSION FROM ILLINOIS. + + +When the bodies of the martyred Prophet and Patriarch were brought from +Carthage, they were met by thousands of the Saints from Nauvoo who wept +aloud for the loss of their beloved leaders. The scene was a very sad one. +Elder Willard Richards spoke to the people and advised them to remain +peaceable as they had always been, and let the Lord avenge the murder of +their loved ones. + +The bodies of Joseph and Hyrum were buried privately at Nauvoo so that +their enemies might not disturb them. + +And now the Saints were a little confused about who should be their +leaders. Joseph, the President of the Church, and Hyrum, one of his +counselors, were dead, and Sidney Rigdon, the other counselors, had some +months before got tired of affairs at Nauvoo and had gone to Pittsburg, +Pennsylvania. He was an apostate at heart, though he had not yet been cut +off from the Church. Most of the Twelve Apostles were away on missions, and +word was sent for them to return as soon as possible. + +Though at first there was some misunderstanding among the Saints, the Lord +did not intend his Church should go to pieces because its leader had been +taken away. The Church had been set up never to be thrown down or left to +other people. The Gospel had been given to the earth "for the last time and +for the fullness of times." The Saints had a promise that the kingdom was +theirs "and the enemy shall not overcome." It would be a poor church, +indeed, that would go to pieces every time its chief officer died. No; the +Lord, through Joseph, had organized the Church so well that this could not +be. There was a quorum in the Church that had been given all the power +necessary to carry on the work of the Church in case the First Presidency +was taken away. That quorum was the Twelve Apostles. Now that there was no +First Presidency, it was the duty of the Twelve to preside and regulate the +affairs of the Church until such time that there should be another +president appointed. Brigham Young was the president of the Twelve, so in +reality he was the leading man in the Church. + +But now came Sidney Rigdon from Pittsburg. He wanted to be appointed the +leader of the Church, or as he called it, a "guardian." He, with some +others, tried to have a meeting of the Saints before the Twelve could get +home. This meeting was appointed for the 8th of August, 1844. On the 6th of +August President Young and five of the Apostles arrived at Nauvoo. + +The meeting was held at the grove, and Sidney Rigdon and some of the +Twelve spoke. When Brigham Young arose to address the meeting, it seemed to +the Saints that both in appearance and speech he was like the Prophet +Joseph. This certainly was a sign to them. At this meeting Sidney Rigdon +was rejected and the Twelve Apostles were upheld as the quorum to lead the +Church. + +Sidney Rigdon did not like this. He got a few followers and tried to +organize another church. A number of others did the same, but all these +movements did not amount to much. The Saints kept on under the direction of +the Twelve, building the temple and other public edifices in Nauvoo. + +The enemies of the Church were disappointed. They had thought that if they +could get Joseph out of the way that would be the end of "Mormonism." Of +course they did not understand that "Mormonism" is the Lord's work and does +not depend for its success on one or two men. He can raise up any number of +men to carry on his work, and now Brigham Young and his brethren were the +men who could and would carry it on. + +In May, 1845, some of the murderers of Joseph and Hyrum were tried, and by +a jury pronounced innocent. This gave the mobbers more courage, and they +gathered again. In the small settlements outside of Nauvoo many houses were +burned and the inmates driven into the fields. These Saints were advised to +move into Nauvoo for protection. + +Some time before his death, Joseph had predicted that the Saints would yet +move to the Rocky Mountains; and he had even begun the movement by holding +councils and asking for volunteers from the brethren to go ahead and locate +a place to which the Church might gather. President Young and the Twelve +now began preparing to carry this plan out. They could plainly see that it +was useless to try to live in peace in Illinois. The mobs grew larger and +fiercer. The people living in the counties surrounding Hancock county, +threatened to drive the "Mormons" from the state; and the officers whose +duty it was to enforce the laws would not do so if it was to protect the +"Mormons." + +So in August, 1845, it was decided to select three thousand men who, with +their families, were to go to Upper California. All this western country +was then called Upper California. The authorities of the Church promised +the mob leaders that if they would not molest them they would all leave the +state early the next spring. + +But the mobbing did not cease at this; so the sheriff of the county, a Mr. +Backenstos, organized a posse, that is, a company of men to help him +enforce the laws and keep order. The sheriff kept after the mob to prevent +them from burning houses, etc., and this made the mobbers very angry. One +day some of them tried to kill the sheriff, but he was saved by two +"Mormons" coming to his rescue. Thus during the summer and fall of 1845 +there was much trouble between the mobs, the "Mormons," and the militia. + +All this time the Saints had worked hard to finish the temple. It had been +decided to do this even if they had to work with the "trowel in one hand +and a sword in the other." October 5th the temple was near enough finished +that a conference was held in the building. No general conference had been +held for three years, as Joseph had said none should be convened until it +could be held in the temple. + +After this the work on the building still went on, and in a short time it +was so far completed that it was dedicated, and a great many of the Saints +received their endowments within its sacred walls. + +All that winter, (1845-46) Nauvoo was like a big workshop. Everybody that +could was preparing for the great move westward. Farms and houses were +offered for sale. Wagons were built, and as iron was scarce, many of them +had wooden tires. Horses and cattle were gathered. It was to be the sixth +move of the Saints from their homes, and it was no small undertaking now as +there were many thousands of people, and they were to go to a wild, unknown +land among the deserts and mountains of the West. + +The move began on February 4, 1846, and from that date on there was a +continuous stream of wagons crossing the Mississippi river to the Iowa +side. A camp was made on Sugar creek, nine miles from Nauvoo, where the +Saints gathered. Towards the last of the month the weather became very +cold, the river froze over so that teams could be driven across on the ice. +It was a bad time of the year to begin such a move. Many of the Saints were +poorly clad, some had no tents or wagon covers, and in the snow and cold +there was much suffering; but on the Saints went, looking with sad hearts +on their deserted homes; but rather would they face the winter storms and +cold than to live in constant dread of cruel mobs. + +Topics.--1. Presiding authority in the Church. 2. The Twelve sustained. +3. Action of Sidney Rigdon. 4. Mobbings. 5. The removal. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where were Joseph and Hyrum buried? 2. What +were the feelings of the Saints? 3. Why were the Saints troubled about a +leader? 4. Where were most of the Twelve at the time of the martyrdom? 5. +When the First Presidency is taken away, what is the next presiding +authority in the Church? 6. What did Sidney Rigdon want? 7. What testimony +was given the Saints at the meeting on August 8th? 8. What became of Sidney +Rigdon? 9. What did the enemies of the Church expect to do by killing +Joseph Smith? 10. Who first planned the move to the mountains? 11. Tell +about the work of the mobs. 12. Why did the Saints work so hard to finish +the temple, knowing they would have to leave it? 13. When did the move +westward begin? + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI. + +THE BATTLE OF NAUVOO. + + +Leaving the main body of the Saints traveling westward, in this chapter I +wish to tell you about what happened to those who remained in Nauvoo; and +by the way, this is the last chapter of this little history in which mobs +will play an important part. + +In the summer of 1846 there were about six hundred Saints in Nauvoo, most +of whom had been unable to get away. Many were poor, some were sick, and +there were many old people and children. Many non-"Mormons" had bought +property from the Saints who had left, and had moved into the city. The mob +called these friendly citizens "Jack Mormons." + +Naturally, one would think that these few Saints would be left to get ready +to move in peace; but not so. If there is any doubt of the brutal character +of the mob, what they now did will remove that doubt forever. + +On July 11, eight brethren were engaged in cutting grain in a field twelve +miles from Nauvoo. A mob surrounded them, and then taking them one by one, +whipped them severely. Two of these mobbers were afterwards arrested, and +to get even for this, the mob carried away five other brethren who were +abused by the mobbers for twelve days before they were released. + +The next move of the mob was to get writs of arrest for many persons in +Nauvoo. A John Carlin was unlawfully appointed a constable to serve these +writs, that is, make the arrests, and he raised a large body of men to help +him; but behind all this, the real object was to drive the remaining +"Mormons" from the city. + +Governor Ford was now notified of the actions of these mobbers, and he sent +Major Parker to Nauvoo, who was to raise volunteers and defend the city. +Four companies of troops were organized by the governor's order; but +instead of treating the invaders as they truly were, a mob, Major Parker +made a treaty with their leader in which it was agreed that the "Mormons" +would leave the state within sixty days. The mob leader thought this fair +enough, but the mobbers did not. At this, their leader resigned and a man +by the name of Brockman took command of the crowd. He gave the order to +march towards Nauvoo, which they gladly did. + +On the morning of September 10th, 1846, the watchman in the tower of the +temple gave notice that the enemy were coming 1,000 or 1,500 strong. They +had cannon, plenty of ammunition, and came like an army ready for battle. +Many of the new citizens fled, and the little band of defenders numbered +only one hundred and twenty-three men. + +Meanwhile, a committee had come from Quincy to try to settle the troubles +without bloodshed. Although with them were Major Flood, sent by the +governor, and Mr. Wood, mayor of Quincy, the mob paid no attention to them, +and so they could do nothing. + +There seemed no prospect but that the citizens would have to defend +themselves as best they could. Benjamin Clifford took command of the +volunteers, and Captain William Anderson organized a small body of +sharpshooters called the Spartan Band. As cannon were badly needed, the +brethren got two hollow steamboat shafts, cut them in two, plugged up one +end, and thus made some cannon. They had no cannon balls, but they used +scraps of iron and lead tied up into bags. + +On Friday, the 11th, the mob drew up to the city and began firing. They +were met by the "Mormon" troops with their home-made cannon, which +surprised the mobbers very much, and they were compelled to stop their +advance. + +On Saturday, the 12th, a flag of truce was brought into the city, and with +it a note to the commander at Nauvoo, stating that if they did not +surrender they would have to take the consequences. Major Clifford replied +that he had been sent by the governor to uphold the laws and that he was +going to do it, advising Brockman to disband his men. + +The Nauvoo citizens had held their position during the night and had thrown +up some breastworks. The next day the battle waged fiercer than ever, but +the Nauvoo boys held their ground and the mob could not get in. Twelve +mobbers were wounded. The first one killed among the defenders was Augustus +Anderson, a "Mormon" boy fourteen years old. He left his mother that +morning saying he would fight for her, and went along with his father, +Captain William Anderson. Augustus was struck by a cannon ball, and died in +a few minutes. Shortly after Captain Anderson was also hit. + +"I am wounded," he cried. "Take my gun and shoot on." + +David Norris was also killed, and a number of other brethren wounded. + +For six days that little band of brave defenders kept the mob at bay; and +even when it was seen to be useless to keep the fight up longer, many were +in favor of doing so. + +On the 16th a treaty was made. The city was to surrender. The citizens were +not to be molested, and the sick and helpless were to be protected. The +"Mormons" were to leave as soon as possible. + +The mob forces entered the city on the 17th; but it was the same old story. +They thought no more of promises or of the treaty. Bands of men went +through the city, stealing, insulting, and in every way abusing the people. +A gang went through the temple and up to the tower where they rang the +bell, yelled and shouted. A preacher who was in the mob went up to the top +of the tower and cried in a loud voice: + +"Peace! peace! peace! to the inhabitants of the earth, now the 'Mormons' +are driven!" + +The poor Saints had to get away as fast as they could. Some went north, +some south, but most of them crossed the river and camped on the low +bottoms of the Mississippi in Iowa. I shall not attempt to tell you of the +sufferings of these poor people; weak, sick hungry, cold, and wet. It would +make your heart ache to see the picture, one of the saddest in all our +history. + +At this time, when it seemed as though these people would starve to death, +a strange thing happened. Great flocks of quail came flying into camp. They +flew against the wagons with such force that they were killed or stunned, +so that they could be picked up. They also alighted all over the camp and +were so tame that they could be taken by the hand. Thus the Lord sent food +to his hungry children. + +If you wish to read a very interesting account of this removal from Nauvoo, +read Colonel Kane's lecture, found in many of our larger histories.[2] + +Topics.--1. Nauvoo after the main body of Saints had left. 2. The Battle +of Nauvoo. 3. The remnant driven out. + +Questions and Review.--1. About how many Saints were left in Nauvoo? 2. +Who were the "Jack Mormons?" 3. Tell of the mob's doings. 4. Who was John +Carlin? 5. What did he do? 6. Who was Major Parker? 7. What did he have +orders to do? 8. Describe the mobbing party. 9. Tell about the Nauvoo +volunteers. 10. Who were William and Augustus Anderson? 11. How long did +the defenders hold out? 12. What was agreed upon in the treaty of peace? +13. Describe the actions of the mob in Nauvoo. 14. To where were the Saints +driven? 15. What was their condition? 16. How were they fed? 17. Who wrote +an interesting account of this exodus? + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII. + +WESTWARD. + + +The moving of a nation! What a task it must have been! + +Most of you have had some experience in moving, it may be only a family +moving from one house to another, and you know what a lot of worry and work +there are in such a small affair; but here was a nation moving! + +This great exodus was very much like the time when the children of Israel +went from under the oppression of Egypt out into the wilderness to journey +to the promised land. When at Nauvoo, Brigham Young said to the Saints: "To +your tents, O Israel," they knew they had another Moses to lead them from +their persecutors. + +The camp at Sugar creek grew larger every day through the arrival of exiles +from Nauvoo. Many did not bring provisions enough with them, so that they +were forced to go to the neighboring farms and settlements and work for +corn. + +The first move the camp made was on March 1, 1846, when four hundred wagons +started forward. Five miles only was traveled that day, and when they +camped, the snow had to be shovelled away where they pitched their tents. + +From that time the Saints moved slowly westward across the territory of +Iowa. As they advanced, the spring rains came and often drenched the +travelers through. The ground now became very muddy, and it was so hard for +the poor teams that some days only a few miles were traveled. Sometimes +their camping places were so wet that they who slept on the ground would +have to lay on branches of trees so that they would not sink into the mud. + +At first there was very little feed for their animals, and they had to live +on the bark and twigs of trees, with what, corn could be spared for them. +Many horses were traded for oxen, as they could stand such hardship better. +Trips were made to the nearest settlements to buy food. Those who had no +money traded what they could spare, such as dishes and feather beds for +corn. + +For the first few weeks there was not much order in their way of traveling; +but on March 27th the Saints were more perfectly organized. Brigham Young +was sustained as president of the whole camp. Then captains were appointed +over hundreds, over fifties, and over tens. Clerks were chosen to keep the +records, etc., and men were called to see to the buying and distributing of +the food. Thus every one had something to do and everything was done in +order. + +[Illustration: A PIONEER TRAIN.] + +Often in the evening when supper had been eaten, the logs were piled on the +bonfire, a space was cleared, the musicians brought out their instruments, +and the sorrows and hardships of the day were forgotten in the innocent +dance. + +The camp always rested on Sundays, and if the weather would permit, +meetings were held. + +On April 24th a point on Grand river was reached, one hundred and +forty-five miles north-west from Nauvoo. Here it was decided to form a +settlement--to build houses and plant crops, that those who came after +would have food and a stopping place. The settlement was called Garden +Grove. Soon it was as lively as a hive of bees. Hundreds of men were busy +making fence rails and fences, building houses, digging wells, clearing +land, and plowing. Meetings were held often and the people were instructed +and encouraged. Parley P. Pratt and a small company were sent ahead to find +another location for a settlement. They found a beautiful place about +thirty miles from Garden Grove, which they called Mount Pisgah. Here houses +were also built, and farms and gardens planted. As many of the Saints were +poor and sick they rested at these two settlements while the main body went +on. + +From Mount Pisgah the country was wild Indian lands, there being no white +settlements or roads. The spring rains had now moderated so that the roads +were better. On June 14th President Young and the leading companies arrived +at the Missouri river, where a stop was made. Most of the companies came up +in July. A camp was made on the east side of the river on some high land +called Council Bluffs. + +This was on Indian land, but the travelers were received kindly and given +permission to stop. + +President Young intended to send a body of picked men into the Rocky +Mountains as soon as possible to locate a gathering place. They were to +push on ahead that summer and put in crops. Arrangements were being made +to this end, when something happened that put a stop to the plan. This was +the call for the Mormon Battalion, about which I will tell you in the next +chapter. + +After five hundred of their best men had marched away to fight the battles +of their country, it was impossible for the Saints to get to the mountains +that year. So it was decided to make a third stopping place and remain +there during the winter. + +There being a good location for a town on the west bank of the Missouri +river, that place was selected and named Winter Quarters. The town was laid +out regularly into streets, and log houses were built. Some made dugouts in +the sides of the hill, which were quite comfortable during the cold winter. +As the Indians were troublesome on that side of the river a stockade was +built around the town. By December, 1846, five hundred and thirty-eight log +houses and eighty-three sod houses were built, inhabited by three thousand +four hundred and eighty-three people. The town was divided into twenty-two +wards, each presided over by a bishop. A large log house was built in which +meetings and parties were held. + +The food of the people that winter consisted largely of corn-bread and +pork. President Young had a grist mill built, but before that time many ate +boiled wheat, and ground their corn in coffee mills. + +Because of hardships and poor food there was much sickness at all the +settlements. Graves marked the prairie for hundreds of miles. At Winter +Quarters alone over six hundred were buried. + +The poor Saints who were left at Nauvoo were not forgotten. After they had +been driven from Nauvoo, they were met by teams from Winter Quarters, and +all who wished to go were taken to the camps of the Saints. + +Perhaps you may get an idea of this great move when you are told that +during that summer there were about two thousand wagons and ten thousand +Saints on the way between Nauvoo and Council Bluffs. + +Topics.--1. From Nauvoo to Garden Grove. 2. Garden Grove and Mount +Pisgah. 3. Winter Quarters. + +Questions and Review.--1. What might this last move of the Saints be +likened to? 2. After leaving Nauvoo where was the first stopping place? 3. +When did the camp start west? 4. What hindered the traveling? 5. How was +the camp organized? 6. What did the Saints do for amusement? 7. Where were +Garden Grove and Mount Pisgah? 8. What was the object in making these +settlements? 9. What prevented a band of pioneers from going to the +mountains that summer? 10. Where was Winter Quarters? 11. Describe the +place. 12. About how many people were traveling across Iowa that summer? + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII. + +THE MORMON BATTALION. + + +During the summer of 1846 the United States was at war with the republic of +Mexico. A number of battles had been fought in Texas. What is now +California, Nevada, Utah, and Arizona belonged to Mexico, and as President +Polk desired to get this large district of country for the United States, +he sent soldiers westward to the Pacific ocean. + +The "Mormon" people traveling from Nauvoo had asked President Polk for +assistance in their journey to the west. They said they wanted to remain +under the protection of the government, and were willing to aid in holding +the western country for the United States. + +In the month of June, 1846, Captain James Allen, an officer of the United +States army arrived at Mount Pisgah, Iowa. What he wanted was five hundred +men with which to form a battalion and march across the continent to +California, and take part in the war with Mexico. + +This was startling news indeed. The Saints had not expected this kind of +"help" in their journeying through the wilderness. Many of the Saints +looked upon the call as a plan to destroy them. You can hardly blame them +for that, can you, knowing some of their past history? + +But President Young and the leading brethren told the officer he should +have his men. They thought it was a test to see if they were true to their +country. Though it was a pretty hard test, thus to take their best and +strongest men away from such a camp as theirs, yet the "Mormon" people +would show to the government and to the whole world that they were loyal to +their country, even though that country had failed to protect them in their +rights to live in peace and worship God. + +At a meeting held at Council Bluffs it was decided to raise the men asked +for. Brigham Young and the Twelve took an active part in getting +volunteers. Word was sent to the different settlements of the Saints. The +stars and stripes were hoisted to a tree top, and the work of enrollment +began. Within three days the little army was organized and ready for the +march. Then they had a grand farewell party, held, not in some beautifully +lighted ball room, but in a bowery, where the ground had been packed hard +by the tread of many feet. There fathers and mothers and brothers and +sisters and sweethearts said their goodbyes to each other. + +And then the long, dreary march began. The story of that march would fill +a book, so of course very little of it can be told here. If you would like +to read more about it, you will find it in Brother Tyler's "History of the +Mormon Battalion." + +There were five hundred and forty-nine souls in the Battalion. Captain +James Allen was the commander. They started on their march July 20, 1846, +to Fort Leavenworth, where they received their guns and other things +necessary for an army. At this point Captain Allen died, which made the men +feel bad, as he was a good, kind officer. + +The Battalion began to move from Fort Leavenworth on the 12th of August. +You may see their line of march by looking at the map on page 128. After +suffering much hardship, they reached Santa Fe, October 9th. Here Colonel +Cooke took the command. As many of the soldiers as were too sick to go on +were sent to Pueblo, where they remained all winter, and traveled to Salt +Lake valley the next summer. The main body of the Battalion left Santa Fe, +October 19th, for California. At Tucson they expected to have a battle with +some Mexican soldiers, and prepared for it, but they marched through the +city without being disturbed. From Tucson they continued over the deserts, +and arrived at San Diego, January 29, 1847, where they saw the broad, blue, +ocean, many of them for the first time. + +The Battalion remained in and around San Diego for about two weeks. As +there was no fighting to be done, the men built houses, dug wells, made +brick, and helped build up the town. On March 19th most of them marched to +Los Angeles, and on the 16th of July they were mustered out, having served +their full time--one year. + +Of this great march Colonel Cooke their commander wrote: + +"History may be searched in vain for an equal march of infantry; +nine-tenths of it through a wilderness, where nothing but savages and wild +beasts are found, or deserts, where for want of water, there is no living +creature. There, with almost hopeless labor we have dug deep wells. Without +a guide we have crossed the wilderness, we have ventured into trackless +prairies, where water was not found for several marches. With crowbar and +pickax in hand we have worked our way over mountains, which seemed to defy +aught but the wild goat, and hewed a passage through a chasm of rock, more +narrow than our wagons." + +After their release, most of the men took up their march for home. Perhaps +it would be more correct to say to find their families and friends, as they +did not have any home yet. They journeyed northward in California and then +crossed the mountains to Salt Lake valley where most of them arrived in +October, 1847. From there many went right on to Winter Quarters to their +families. + +A number of the Battalion men remained in California to earn a little +money. Some got work with a Captain Sutter who had a large ranch on the +American fork of the Sacramento river. The "Mormons" with some others were +set to work building a mill, and it was here while digging in the mill race +that gold was discovered in California. Some of the brethren carried away a +few hundred dollars' worth when they went to Salt Lake Valley the next +summer. + +Topics.--1. The call for the Mormon Battalion. 2. Its march. 3. Discovery +of Gold. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who was Captain James Allen? 2. What did he +want of the "Mormons?" 3. What was the Battalion wanted for? 4. What did +President Young say? 5. What did many of the Saints think of the call? 6. +Why was it a hardship on the Saints at that time to furnish five hundred +soldiers? 7. Describe the line of march of the Battalion. 8. How long did +it take them? 9. How far was it? 10. What kind of journey was it? 11. What +did Colonel Cooke say about it? 12. What did the Battalion men do in +California? 13. What happened at Nauvoo in the summer of 1846, when the +Battalion was on the march? + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX. + +THE PIONEERS. + + +While the Saints were in Winter Quarters during the winter of 1846-7 they +were busily preparing for the march to the mountains next spring. Men for +the advance company were selected, and on April 7, 1847, they began to move +out of Winter Quarters to a place westward, where they were to gather. Ten +days later the first or pioneer camp, was ready for marching. The idea was +to have twelve times twelve men, but one became sick and had to return, so +that left one hundred and forty-three. There were besides the men three +women and two children. They had seventy-two wagons, ninety-three horses, +fifty-two mules, sixty-six oxen, nineteen cows, seventeen dogs, and some +chickens. + +For three months and seventeen days this company traveled westward over +plains and mountains. During the first part of their journey they sometimes +followed a wagon road to Oregon, and sometimes they made new roads. The +shallow rivers they forded, the deep ones they built bridges over, and the +large ones they crossed in ferry boats which they built. After these +ferries had been built the pioneers sometimes took over companies on their +way to Oregon and received provisions for their pay. + +[Illustration: MAP OF PIONEER ROUTE.] + +The map will show you the route they took better than can be told here. + +The pioneers did not know exactly where they were to locate. It was to be +in some valley of the Rocky mountains where they could live in peace, free +from mobs. When President Young was asked as to their destination, all he +could say was that he would know the place when he should see it, and that +they should continue to travel the way the Spirit of the Lord directed +them. + +On their journey they often met scouts and trappers. One of the best known +of these was Col. James Bridger. He had been all through the valley of the +Great Salt Lake, he said, and he told the pioneers that they could not live +there, as nothing would grow. So sure was he of this that he offered to +give a thousand dollars for the first bushel of corn they could raise in +that valley. President Young simply said, "Wait a little and we will show +you." + +When they left the plains and got up in the mountains some of them became +sick with the mountain fever. Among those ailing was President Young. He +became so bad that he could not travel, so when they were in Echo canyon he +instructed Orson Pratt to take the main company on and he with a few men +would remain for a few days. + +The main company, therefore, went on down Echo canyon, up Weber valley, and +across the mountains, coming down into Salt Lake valley through Emigration +canyon. President Young had told them that when they got to the open +country on crossing the mountain they were to go to the north and stop at +the first convenient place for putting in their seeds. This the company +did, and on the 23rd of July they camped on the ground where now stands the +beautiful city and county building in Salt Lake City. After offering up +their thanks to God for his preserving care, they at once got out their +tools and began to work. The season was so far advanced that if they were +to raise anything they must hurry. When they tried to plow the land, they +found it so dry and hard that some of the plows were broken. What could +they do? Then the thought came to turn the water in the creek over the land +and soak it up. This was done, and then there was no trouble to plow and +plant. This was the beginning of irrigation in this western part of the +United States. + +President Young and his party followed the next day. President Wilford +Woodruff was with him and we will let him tell of it: + +"On the 24th I drove my carriage, with President Young lying on a bed in +it, into the open valley. When we came out of the canyon into full view of +the valley, I turned the side of my carriage around, open to the west, and +President Young arose from his bed and took a look at the country. While +gazing on the scene before us, he was enwrapped in vision for several +minutes. He had seen the valley before in vision, and now he saw the future +glory of Zion and of Israel as they would be, planted in the valleys of +these mountains. When the vision had passed, he said: + +"'It is enough. This is the right place. Drive on.'" + +On August 26th, President Young and a company of one hundred and seven +persons, started on the return trip to Winter Quarters. On the Sweetwater +river they met two large companies of Saints on the way to the valley, +following the trail of the pioneers. There was great rejoicing, as the +Saints now for the first time knew where they were to locate. These +companies arrived safely in Salt Lake valley in September and October. + +President Young and company arrived at Winter Quarters October 31. All was +well with the Saints, and they were prospering. + +And now a very important event took place. From the death of Joseph the +Prophet up to this time the Church had been led by the Twelve. Now it was +decided to reorganize the First Presidency, and at a meeting held in Winter +Quarters, December 5, 1847, the Twelve chose Brigham Young as President of +the Church. He chose Heber C. Kimball and Willard Richards as his +counselors, and these now became the First Presidency. This action of the +Twelve was sustained at a conference of the Church on the 27th. + +Thus the work prospered. Many meetings were held, and the Church was set in +order. Missionaries were sent to the world, and the Saints, now that they +had another gathering place, began to flock towards the new Zion in the +mountains. Winter Quarters was deserted and a new settlement founded across +the river. It was called Kanesville (now Council Bluffs) in honor of Thomas +L. Kane who did many kind acts for the Saints. + +In the spring of 1848 the Saints on the Missouri river were busy getting +ready for the move to the mountains. They started about the beginning of +June, organized into three large companies, all led by President Young. +Altogether there were 2,417 people, 793 wagons, herds of horses and cattle, +a great many sheep, pigs, chickens, etc. Here was surely, if not a nation, +a whole city moving. They followed in the trail of the first companies and +arrived in Great Salt Lake valley in September and October. + +Topics.--1. The march of the pioneers. 2. Arrival in Salt Lake valley. 3. +The reorganization of the First Presidency. 4. The main companies. + +Questions and Review.--1. How many persons were in the first or pioneer +company? 2. What was the object of the company? 3. How long were they on +the journey? 4. Describe their route. (See map). 5. What did trappers and +hunters say of Salt Lake valley? 6. When did the main body reach Salt Lake +valley? 7. When did President Young arrive? 8. What did he say about the +place? 9. Why did the pioneers know very little about irrigation? 10. Who +returned to Winter Quarters? 11. Whom did they meet? 12. What took place +December 5, 1847? 13. Where was Kanesville? 14. What took place during the +summer of 1848? + + + + +CHAPTER. XXX. + +GREAT SALT LAKE CITY. + + +The 25th of July, 1847, came on a Sunday, therefore the pioneers rested and +held meetings. + +Monday morning work began in earnest. Plowing and planting had to be +hurried. Exploring parties were also sent out in different directions to +become acquainted with the country. + +On the evening of July 28th President Young, accompanied by the Apostles, +went some distance from the camp to select a spot from which to begin +building the city. Arriving at a good location, President Young stopped, +and, striking his cane in the earth, he said: "Here will be the temple of +our God"--and on that spot the temple stands today. It was then decided to +lay out the city north, east, south, and west from the temple site, in ten +acre blocks, the streets to be eight rods wide and the sidewalks twenty +feet. Some time after this it was named Great Salt Lake City. + +You will call to mind that some of the Mormon Battalion, owing to sickness, +did not march through to California. This company, together with some +Saints from the state of Mississippi, arrived at the pioneer camp on July +29th, thus making quite an addition to the company. The first building of +any kind erected in the valley by the Saints was a bowery built on the +temple block by the Battalion men. This was used for some time in which to +hold meetings. + +It was decided not to settle on the city lots at first, but build a fort +with houses in as a protection from the Indians. The houses were built of +logs, and stood in a row, close together, which formed one side of the +fort. The other three sides were built of adobe walls. The roofs of the +houses were made of soil. The windows and doors faced the inside. Though +better than living all the winter in tents and wagons, you may imagine +these houses were not very comfortable, especially when the rain came +through the roofs onto beds, tables, stoves, etc. + +[Illustration: SALT LAKE VALLEY IN 1847.] + +A conference was held in the bowery on Sunday, August 22nd, where +considerable business was attended to. The Salt Lake Stake of Zion was +organized, with John Smith as president. It was shortly after this that +President Young and his company went back to Winter Quarters. + +The next addition to the settlement was the Mormon Battalion from +California. + +At the coming of winter all moved into the fort. That season the winter was +mild, so quite an amount of work was done outside. + +The spring of 1848 opened with fine prospects ahead. Five thousand acres of +land were planted, and the grain was growing rapidly; but another trial was +at hand. In May and June great swarms of crickets came from the mountains +and began to devour every growing thing. The settlers fought them as best +they were able, but what could be done with such countless millions of +insects! It seemed hopeless. Their crops were fast disappearing, and with +them their means of living through the next year. Remember, they were a +thousand miles from any other people, with mountains and deserts between +them. They could not get food from other places. They would have to raise +it or to starve. + +When they had about given up hope, there came great flocks of white birds +from the lake. They settled on the fields and began eating the crickets. +They would eat all they were able, then vomit, and eat again. This they did +day after day until the crickets were destroyed and part of the crop was +saved. + +[Illustration: IN THE OLD FORT.] + +That fall President Young with the main body of Saints arrived from the +East. There were now about five thousand people in the valley, and +prospects were not very encouraging, owing to the small crop raised. Food +was scarce, as also was clothing. Many people lived for weeks on "greens" +and the roots of the sego and thistle. A kind of soup was made by cooking +raw-hides. Yet in the midst of these times Heber C. Kimball declared in a +public meeting that it would not be three years before "states goods" would +be sold in Salt Lake cheaper than in St. Louis. No one at that time could +see how it could be possible, but the prophecy was fulfilled within a year, +and it was in this way: That winter gold was discovered in California, and +early the next summer great companies of men came flocking from the east on +their way to the gold mines. Salt Lake City was a sort of half way house. +These gold seekers were heavily laden with all manner of goods, but being +anxious to get to California as soon as possible they traded to the people +in Salt Lake City their goods for lighter wagons, fresh horses, etc. Thus a +great deal of merchandise was brought to the valley, and Brother Kimball's +prophecy was fulfilled. + +The city had now been laid out into blocks, and lots were given to the +settlers. Some built houses and moved in that fall, but most of the people +remained in the fort until the spring of 1849. + +The city now began to grow rapidly, as companies of Saints were continually +coming from the east. In February, 1849, the city was divided into nineteen +wards and a bishop appointed over each. On the 12th of the same month the +four vacancies in the quorum of the Twelve Apostles were filled by the +calling of Charles C. Rich, Lorenzo Snow, Erastus Snow, and Franklin D. +Richards to the apostleship. + +Thus the Church was firmly established again, this time in the peaceful +valleys of the mountains, away from the persecution of its enemies and the +anger of mobs. + +Topics.--1. Locating the temple and city. 2. The fort. 3. The crickets +and gulls. 4. Hard times. 5. Heber C. Kimball's prophecy. + +Questions and Review.--1. How did President Young locate the temple +spot? 2. How was the city laid out? 3. What was the first building in the +valley? 4. Describe a bowery. 5. What was the fort? 6. Describe it. 7. Who +was the first stake president in Utah? 8. What happened in the spring of +1848? 9. How were the crops saved? 10. Why was food so scarce in 1848? 11. +What kinds of food were eaten? 12. What was Heber C. Kimball's prophecy? +13. How was it fulfilled? 14. How was the city built up? 15. What apostles +were chosen February 12, 1849? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI. + +GROWTH OF UTAH AND THE CHURCH. + + +As you were told in the last chapter, among the first things done by the +pioneers was to send exploring parties out to find other locations for +settlement. They knew that thousands of Saints would follow them to their +new home, and room must be had for them. + +In the first company that followed the pioneers was Peregrine Sessions. He, +with some others, moved north from the pioneer camp and settled in what is +now Davis county. Further north, at the junction of the Weber and Ogden +rivers, there lived, before the pioneers came, a trapper and trader by the +name of Goodyear. He claimed a large area of land, nearly all of what is +now Weber county, saying that the Mexican government had granted it to him. +This claim he sold in 1847 to Captain James Brown of the Mormon Battalion +for the sum of $3,000. In the spring of 1848, Captain Brown with his sons +moved to the new location and began putting in crops. They were told that +frost would kill the corn before it could ripen, but they worked on, and in +the fall reaped a large harvest. Soon other families moved in, to whom +Captain Brown gave land. Thus Ogden city and Weber county had their +beginning. + +Early in the spring of 1849, the first settlers moved south from Salt Lake +City. They consisted of thirty families led by John S. Higbee, one of the +pioneers. They settled on Provo river, built a fort for protection, and +then began plowing and planting. There were quite a number of Indians in +that part. Their head chief was Sowiette, and under him was Chief Walker. +The first was a kind Indian who wished to live in peace with the whites; +but not so with Walker who delighted in stealing and fighting. + +For some months everything went well with the Provo settlers, but in the +fall the Indians began stealing, and once in awhile an arrow came +uncomfortably near some settler when away from the fort. At length a party +of men who were out searching for stolen cattle, had a fight with a band of +Indians in which five of the savages were killed. + +The settlers in the fort were now continually annoyed, until in February, +1850, a company of militia was sent from Salt Lake City to their aid. A +fierce battle ensued, in which a number were killed on both sides, and the +Indians were scattered to the mountains. + +It was President Young's policy not to harm the Indians if possible, saying +that it was cheaper to feed them than to fight them. But even this kind +policy did not altogether prevent trouble with these wild people. In 1853, +the Indians, led by Chief Walker, made war on the southern settlements, +with the result that about twenty whites and a great many Indians were +killed. + +At the close of the war with Mexico all this western country became a part +of the United States. At a convention held in Salt Lake City, March 4, +1849, the people asked Congress for a territorial organization. Later, a +petition was sent asking to be admitted into the Union under the name of +"The State of Deseret." Until Congress could act, a temporary government +was formed which existed for nearly two years. President Young was elected +governor, and there were the other officers usually found in a state. +September 9, 1850, Congress passed an act organizing Utah Territory. +President Millard Fillmore appointed Brigham Young as governor. Out of the +six other officers, three were "Mormons," and three non-"Mormons" from the +East. + +At a conference held in Salt Lake City, October 6, 1849, a number of elders +were called to new mission fields. John Taylor, Curtis E. Bolton, and John +Pack were sent to France; Erastus Snow and Peter O. Hansen to Denmark; John +Forsgren to Sweden; Lorenzo Snow and Joseph Toronto to Italy; Addison +Pratt, James S. Brown, and Hiram H. Blackwell, to the Society Islands. +Brother Pratt had but recently returned from a five years mission to these +islands, where twelve hundred souls had been baptized into the Church. + +At the April conference, 1851, Edward Hunter was chosen to succeed Newel K. +Whitney as bishop of the Church. There were at that time about thirty +thousand people in Utah. + +President Young and the Apostles traveled much throughout the Territory, +locating settlements, organizing wards and putting the Church in order. At +the October conference, 1853, some of the leading brethren were called to +locate in different parts of the Territory. Among them were Elders George +A. Smith and Erastus Snow with fifty families who were called to strengthen +Iron county, and Elder Lorenzo Snow with fifty families to go to Box Elder. + +In the summer of 1854 the grasshoppers did much damage to the crops, and +again in 1855 in many parts these insects took every green thing. This +brought on another scarcity. There was much suffering and again the people +were compelled to live on roots. A number of the brethren had stored up +some grain which they now shared with those who had none. In this way all +fared very much alike and the hardships were shared by all. + +In the winter of 1856 a very sad thing happened. That year some emigrants +came to Utah in handcart companies. Small, two wheeled carts were made at +the place of starting in Iowa. On these carts were loaded baggage and +provisions, and the men and boys pulled them across the plains. Sometimes +the women and girls helped. A few ox teams usually hauled the heaviest +loads in wagons, and in this way the Saints walked and pulled their carts +over the thirteen hundred miles of their journey. This plan succeeded very +well for those who started early and reached the valley in good time, but a +number of companies started too late and were caught in fierce snow storms +in the mountains. Many of these poor travelers died from hunger and cold, +and if it had not been for some of the brethren who came out from Salt Lake +to their help, no doubt most of them would have perished. + +Topics.--1. Making settlements. 2. Trouble with the Indians. 3. +Organizing Utah Territory. 4. Famine of 1855-6. 5. The handcart companies. + +Questions and Review.--1. Where was the second settlement in Utah made? +2. When and by whom was Ogden settled? 3. Tell about the settlement of +Provo. 4. What trouble did the Provo settlers have? 5. What was President +Young's Indian policy? 6. Who was Chief Walker? 7. What was done March 4, +1849? 8. What did the people wish to name the state? 9. When was Utah +Territory organized? 10. Who was the first governor? 11. Name the first +missionaries to France; to Denmark; to Sweden; to Italy; to the Society +Islands. 12. Tell something about these missions. 13. Tell about the work +of the Church leaders in making settlements, etc. 14. What was the cause of +the famine in 1855-6? 15. What were the handcart companies? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXII. + +THE "UTAH WAR." + + +The president of the United States appoints the leading officers of a +territory. Many of the officers sent to Utah by the president were good men +and did justice to "Mormon" and Gentile alike; but some were men who could +see no good in the Saints, and were therefore always trying to oppress +them. Such men were Judges Stiles and Drummond, and Secretary Ferris, who +were in Utah in 1856. At last they left the territory and sent in a report +to the president. In it Judge Drummond said that the "Mormons" were +traitors to the United States, and would not obey its laws; that they had a +secret organization whose duty it was to murder all who opposed them; that +the court records had been burned; that the government officials were in +danger of their lives, etc. Like reports were made by other persons, and +the result was that a strong feeling was created in the East against the +people of Utah. + +On the 24th of July, 1857, the people of Salt Lake City were having a grand +celebration in Big Cottonwood canyon. They were having a happy time. The +band played, the choirs sang, the cannon roared, while the Stars and +Stripes waved from trees and mountain peaks. Suddenly four dusty travelers +rode into the camp. They brought news from the East, and startling news it +was: the president of the United States had sent an army to Utah to +establish law and order among the "Mormons!" + +In the evening the Saints were called together, and the news was told them. +President Young spoke with power. "We have transgressed no law, neither do +we intend to," said he; "but as for any nation coming to destroy this +people, God Almighty being my helper, it shall not be." + +Two thousand five hundred soldiers were on the march to Utah. General +Harney was appointed commander, but he was succeeded by Colonel Albert +Sidney Johnston. With the army came the new set of officers which the +president had appointed for the territory. + +In the commander's orders it was stated that the people of Utah were in +rebellion against the United States, and that it was the duty of the army +to restore the authority of the government and aid and protect the new +officers in the discharge of their duties. On the 8th of September Captain +Van Vliet arrived in Salt Lake City from the army. He told President Young +that their intentions were not to harm the people in any way. President +Young replied that he had had experience with military bodies in Missouri +and Illinois, and he knew what the "Mormons" could expect. The captain +tried to show President Young how useless it would be for a few "Mormons" +to resist a nation like the United States. Even if they prevented the army +from entering the valley that year, more soldiers would be sent in the +spring. + +"We are aware that such will be the case," replied the president; "but when +those troops arrive they will find Utah a desert; every house will be +burned to the ground, every tree cut down, and every field laid waste." + +The captain was deeply impressed, but such were really the intentions of +the Saints. They could not trust the troops, and they did not intend to +submit tamely to such scenes as they had passed through in Far West and +Nauvoo. They were not in rebellion, and if the president had simply sent +some one to investigate, he would have found out that truth; but he had +acted on the spur of the moment, and the troops were already far on the +way. If they could be checked for a time until the truth could be learned, +the danger of a conflict might be averted; but if not, then, said President +Young, and the people were with him, their homes, fields, and gardens would +be destroyed by fire and the Saints would flee to the mountains. + +The army continued its march towards Utah. Col. R.T. Burton was now ordered +by Gen. Daniel H. Wells, commander of the Utah militia, to take a small +body of men and guard the emigrant trains that were coming in. The militia +to the number of 2,500 men was called into service, and in September, 1857, +Gen. Wells and staff went to Echo canyon and there made their headquarters. +Active preparations were now made to stop the enemy. Echo canyon, through +which the troops would have to pass, was fortified by trenches and the +loosening of rocks on the hill sides. + +By this time the army was in what is now Wyoming, and was making for Echo +canyon. Small companies of Utah men were sent out to meet them. They were +instructed to annoy the invaders as much as possible, to burn the grass, +drive off their cattle, etc., but they were to shed no blood if it were +possible to prevent it. These orders were followed, and many exciting +encounters and narrow escapes took place. Major Lot Smith, with a small +company of men, at one time rode up to a large wagon train carrying +supplies for the army. After capturing the drivers, they set fire to and +destroy the whole train. Herds of cattle were driven off to Salt Lake +valley, where they were kept during the winter and taken back to the +soldiers in the spring. + +Winter came early that year, and in the mountains where the armies were, +the weather became very cold, with snow and sleet. The government troops +made but little progress. They tried hard to reach the valley; but at last +they were compelled to stop for the winter in the mountains of western +Wyoming. + +This was all the Utah leaders wanted. Now there would be time for finding +out the truth. Most of the militia returned home, leaving fifty men as a +guard in Echo canyon. + +When the government at Washington heard the news from the seat of the "war" +there was considerable excitement, and Congress voted to send another army +to aid the first one. Meanwhile the people of Utah were anxiously waiting +for spring and preparing for the conflict which they thought must then +come. + +Topics.--1. Character of some territorial officials. 2. The army for +Utah. 3. What the "Mormons" thought of the army. 4. How the army was +stopped. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who was Judge Drummond? 2. What report did he +make to the government about Utah affairs? 3. What led President Buchanan +to send an army to Utah? 4. What was the object of sending this army? 5. +When did the Saints first hear of it? 6. What did the "Mormons" resolve to +do? 7. Why could they not trust the army? 8. What did the Utah militia do? +9. What was the object in annoying the troops? 10. What hindered the troops +from entering Salt Lake valley that year? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII. + +THE "UTAH WAR," (CONCLUDED.) + + +When that friend of the Latter-day Saints, Colonel, afterwards General +Thomas L. Kane, heard of the troubles in Utah, he left his home in +Philadelphia and went to Washington to see the president. Though feeble in +health, he offered to go to Utah and try to settle the difficulties in a +peaceable manner. The offer was accepted. Colonel Kane arrived in Salt Lake +City in February, 1858, where he was gladly received. In the cold and snow +of that winter he went to the camp of the army and had a talk with the new +governor whom the president had appointed to take Brigham Young's place. +Colonel Kane told the officers with the army that they would be welcomed in +the valley and kindly treated, but the troops must not locate in or near +any settlement of the territory. The Colonel also convinced Governor +Cumming that he had no need of an army to help him take charge of his +office, and even prevailed on him to go back to Salt Lake City with him. + +To this, General Johnston of the army was very much opposed. The president +had sent him with an army to put the governor into his office, aided by +sword and cannon; but now, if the governor could enter peaceably upon his +duties there would be no need of him or his soldiers. The general didn't +like it a bit; but nevertheless, Governor Cumming went with Colonel Kane to +Salt Lake City in charge of some of the Utah militia. + +Governor Cumming was received with the respect due such an officer, and +duly installed into his position. He found the records and books of the +courts safe, and learned that the reports which had led the president to +send the army were not true. + +The new governor was a good man. He said the troops would have to come into +the valley in the spring, but the people's rights would be respected, and +no harm should be done to any of them. The Saints, however, could not trust +the army. They remembered the scenes of the past, and resolved that they +should not be enacted over again in the valleys of Utah. So, early in the +spring, the order came for all the Saints to pack up their goods, get +together their stock, and move southward, leaving their deserted homes in +the care of a few guards who were to set fire to everything should the army +attempt to locate in the settlements. + +On seeing the Saints thus leaving their hard-earned homes, the kind-hearted +old governor entreated them not to do so, promising them full protection. +When his wife arrived from the camp of the army and saw the towns lonely +and deserted, she burst into tears and pleaded with her husband to bring +the people back. The governor, however, could do nothing. The 30,000 people +in Salt Lake City and northward took all their goods and moved south, most +of them into Utah Valley. + +President Buchanan, now having learned the true condition of affairs, sent +two gentlemen to arrange for peace. They arrived in Salt Lake in June and +had a number of meetings with the leading brethren who came from the south +for that purpose. A letter was read from President Buchanan which, after +telling of the many crimes committed by the "Mormons" against the +government, offered to pardon all who would submit to the laws. In reply +President Young said that he and his brethren had simply stood up for their +rights, and they had done nothing to be pardoned for, except, perhaps the +burning of some government trains, and for that act they accepted the +President's pardon. President Young then said they were willing the troops +should come into the country. They might march through the city but they +were not to make a camp less than forty miles away. "No mobs shall live in +the homes we have built in these mountains," said the president. "That's +the program, gentlemen, whether you like it or not. If you want war, you +can have it; but, if you want peace, peace it is; and we shall be glad of +it." After the meetings the brethren went back to the Saints in the south. + +June 26, 1858, "Johnston's Army," marched through Salt Lake City. All day +long the troops and trains passed through the city. The only sounds heard +was the noise made by the horses' hoofs and the roll of the wagons. The +city seemed as if dead. Hardly a person was seen on the streets. Quietly +and orderly the soldiers marched on. Colonel Cooke, once the commander of +the Mormon Battalion, bared his head as he rode through the streets in +honor of the brave "Mormon" boys who had marched under his command. + +The army camped that night across the Jordan, and then continued its march +to Cedar Valley, thirty-six miles south of the city. About two years later, +the soldiers went back to the east where they took part in the great Civil +War. The commander, Albert Sidney Johnston, fought on the side of the +south, and fell in the great battle of Shiloh. + +The Saints returned to their homes in July, 1858. Thus again, the Lord +preserved his people, and protected them from their enemies. + +Topics.--1. The mission of Colonel Kane. 2. Governor Cumming installed. +3. Meeting with peace commissioners. 4. The move south. 5. The entrance of +the army. + +Questions and Review.--1. What did Colonel Kane do at Washington? 2. +What was his mission to Utah? 3. Where was the army camped? 4. Who was +Governor Cumming? 5. What did Colonel Kane get the governor to do? 6. What +did the governor find in Salt Lake City? 7. Why did the Saints move south? +8. What did they propose doing if the army came to harm them? 9. What were +Governor Cumming's feelings? 10. Tell about the meeting with the peace +commissioners. 11. Describe the march of the army through Salt Lake City. +12. Where did the soldiers camp? 13. When did they leave Utah, and where +did they go? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV. + +PROSPERITY. + + +The action of the "Mormons" in again leaving the homes they had newly made +in the wilderness of the West, called the whole world's attention to them. +Many honest people began to see what a mistake it had been to send armed +soldiers against an innocent people. + +When the army was withdrawn, peace once more prevailed, and the Church was +again busy preaching the Gospel to the world and gathering the honest from +the nations. Many missionaries were sent out and new fields were opened. + +From Europe the Saints came by the thousands. Sometimes a whole ship would +be engaged to take a company of Saints across the ocean, in charge of one +of the Apostles or some leading elder. From the sea, they would travel in +train loads to the end of the railroad, where companies of teams and wagons +would take them the remainder of the journey to Utah. + +Now came the telegraph line westward. October 17, 1861, it was completed +to Salt Lake City, and the next day President Young sent the first message +east. At this time the war between the north and the south was beginning, +and in this first telegram President Young said that Utah had not seceded, +but was firm for the Union. + +[Illustration: SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (INTERIOR.)] + +Following the telegraph came the railroads. The Union Pacific was being +built from the east, while the Central Pacific came from the west. May 10, +1869, the two roads met in Northern Utah near the Promontory, and the last +spike was driven with much ceremony. Thus was completed the first iron road +across the continent. + +But true to the past history of the Latter-day Saints, peace was not a +blessing they were permitted to enjoy for many years at a time. + +[Illustration: SALT LAKE TABERNACLE (EXTERIOR.)] + +In the year 1869 a number of prominent elders in the Church opposed +President Young and the authorities, and were cut off from the Church. One +of these elders was Wm. S. Godbe, therefore those who followed him were +sometimes called "Godbeites." These men joined with the anti-"Mormons" and +formed what was called the Liberal Party. It was the object of this +organization to oppose the "Mormons," and they were aided in this by the +officers sent to Utah by the government. It had been the policy of +Presidents Lincoln and Johnson to let the "Mormons" alone, but when General +Grant became president he changed the program and at once sent officers to +Utah to "straighten out" the "Mormons." President Grant, no doubt obtained +much of his information about the "Mormons" from his friend, the Rev. J.P. +Newman. This minister had held a three days' discussion in the Tabernacle +at Salt Lake City with Apostle Orson Pratt on the subject of polygamy. +Elder Pratt seems to have got the better of the argument, and it can well +be imagined what kind of information this preacher gave to the president. + +The Saints never had more bitter enemies than some of these territorial +officers, especially Governor Shaffer and Chief Judge McKean. For years +these officials, aided by the Liberal Party, tried to run affairs their own +way; and you can easily understand that they could do a great many hateful +things against the "Mormons," having the officers of the law, if not the +law itself, on their side. Especially was their hate directed towards +President Young and the leading brethren who were accused of all manner of +crimes. They were arrested, tried, and placed in prison in many unlawful +ways. + +Notwithstanding all these annoyances, the Church continued to grow in +strength and numbers. The Sunday Schools, the first of which was organized +in 1849, by Elder Richard Ballantyne, in the Fourteenth Ward of Salt Lake +City, had by this time grown to be a strong institution. The Mutual +Improvement Associations were organized in 1875, and soon did much good +among the young. + +President Young and his brethren were busy organizing stakes of Zion, +setting the quorums of the priesthood in order, directing the building of +temples, laying out towns and cities, and attending to the general duties +of the Church. Thus Zion grew and became stronger day by day. + +Brigham City is named after President Young. August 19, 1877, the +president was at that place and the Box Elder Stake of Zion was organized. +Shortly after his return home, he was taken ill and died August 29th, at +the age of seventy-six. + +Thus passed away the second president of the Church. Joseph had laid the +foundation deep and strong. Brigham had built upon it. For thirty years he +had stood at the head of the Church and had led the Saints through some of +the most trying scenes of their history. Brigham Young was the leading +spirit in the removal from Nauvoo, in the march across the wild prairies +and mountains, in the building up of a great state in the desert valleys of +the Rocky Mountains; and his name will be ever honored as the great pioneer +of the west. + +Topics.--1. Prosperity of the Saints. 2. The telegraph and railroad. 3. +The Liberal Party. 4. Death of President Young. + +Questions and Review.--1. How did the Saints come from Europe in early +days? 2. Tell about the overland telegraph line in Utah and the first +telegram. 3. Tell about the railroads. 4. Who composed the Liberal party? +5. What was its object? 6. How did President Grant treat the "Mormons?" 7. +Tell about the Newman-Pratt discussion. 8. Why could the Utah officials +greatly annoy the Saints? 9. Who organized the first Sunday School? 10. +Where and when was it? 11. Tell of the death of President Young. 12. Tell +what you can of his life. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV. + +THE "CRUSADE." + + +Those who did not understand the true nature of "Mormonism" thought that at +the death of Brigham Young, the Church would go to pieces; but they soon +found out that the work of God does not depend on any one man. The Twelve +again became the leading quorum in the Church, with John Taylor at its +head. Three years after the death of President Young, October 10, 1880, the +First Presidency was again organized. John Taylor became President, and he +chose George Q. Cannon as first and Joseph F. Smith as second counselor. + +[Illustration: PRESIDENT JOHN TAYLOR.] + +President Taylor was seventy-two years old at this time. He had been with +the Church nearly from the beginning, having been an Apostle for forty-two +years. He had filled many missions both in the United States and in Europe, +had written much on gospel subjects, and was in reality as some called him, +the "Champion of Liberty." You will remember that he was with Joseph and +Hyrum at the time of their martyrdom in Carthage jail and was then severely +wounded. + +The year 1880 was the jubilee year of the Church, being fifty years since +it was organized. As was the custom in ancient Israel, it was a time of +forgiveness. The Church remitted many debts of the poor, besides giving +them many sheep and cattle. "While God is blessing us, let us bless one +another," said President Taylor; and thus much good feeling was manifested +among the Saints. + +But another storm was coming. A trial of another kind was in store for the +Church. + +In the days of Nauvoo, in 1843, Joseph the Prophet had received a +revelation from God, saying that it was right for good men holding the +priesthood to have more wives than one. By the time the Church had been in +Utah a few years, quite a number of the Saints had obeyed this law and +entered plural marriage. The enemies of the Church call this practice a +great sin, even though they can read in the Bible that good men of old whom +the Lord loved had many wives. In 1862 Congress passed a law against plural +marriage or polygamy. As many thought it was an unjust law, it was not +enforced for many years. Elder George Reynolds offered to be arrested and +tried under the law in order to have it tested. This was done, and Elder +Reynolds was convicted and sent to prison. His case was taken to the +Supreme Court of the United States where the law was decided to be +constitutional. + +But this law was not hard enough on the "Mormons" to suit their enemies. +Sectarian preachers and politicians who wanted some office began to spread +falsehoods all over the country about Utah and its people, all of which had +its effect on Congress. Notwithstanding the protest of the "Mormons," +another law was passed against them, (March, 1882), called the Edmunds Act. +This law provided that no polygamist should vote or hold office; and if +found guilty of polygamy a man might be fined five hundred dollars and put +in prison for three years. If a man lived with more than one wife, he could +be fined three hundred dollars and imprisoned for six months. + +Officers were now sent to Utah to enforce this law, and what is called the +"Crusade" began in earnest. "Mormons" were not allowed to sit on juries or +have anything to do with the courts, so it was an easy matter to convict +all "Mormons" who came to trial. + +Arrests now followed fast, and it was indeed a sad time for many of the +Saints. Officers, called deputy marshals, were sent into all the +settlements of the Saints to spy out and arrest those supposed to be +guilty. Many of the brethren left the country or went away in hiding to +avoid being arrested, leaving the women and children to manage as best they +could. In Idaho no "Mormon" was allowed to vote or hold office, no matter +whether he had broken the law or not. Three brethren were sent from Arizona +to the penitentiary at Detroit, Michigan. Nearly all the leading brethren +were in hiding; and, as they could not speak to the people in their +meetings, they wrote epistles which were read to the Saints at their +conferences. + +For a number of years this persecution went on. Seemingly, the strongest +anti-"Mormons" should have been satisfied. But no; they asked Congress to +make yet stronger laws to put down the "Mormons." Accordingly, in 1887, +another law was passed, called the Edmunds-Tucker Bill. This law, among +other things, provided that the property of the Church should be +confiscated, that is, taken from the Church. United States officers went to +work at once and took from the Church nearly $800,000 worth of property. +After the officers had gotten some good salaries out of it, the property +was at last given back to the Church. + +During the time of this crusade thirteen hundred persons suffered from +fines or imprisonment. + +July 25, 1887, President John Taylor died at Kaysville, Davis County, Utah. +He had been in exile for over two years; but the brave spirit was now away +from under the power of persecutors, and the Saints could but look on the +peaceful form and face of their beloved leader. + +Topics.--1. President John Taylor. 2. Plural marriage. 3. The Edmunds +Bill. 4. The "Crusade." 5. The Edmunds-Tucker Bill. + +Questions and Review.--1. Why was there no danger to the Church at the +death of President Young? 2. When was the First Presidency organized again? +3. Who composed it? 4. Tell what you can about John Taylor. 5. Tell about +the Jubilee year. 6. When and where was plural marriage revealed to the +Church? 7. When was the first law passed against this practice? 8. What is +meant by a law being constitutional? 9. What was the Edmunds Bill? 10. How +was it enforced? 11. What was the Edmunds-Tucker Law? 12. When and where +did President Taylor die? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI. + +PRESIDENCY OF WILFORD WOODRUFF. + + +At the April conference, 1889, the First Presidency was again organized. +Wilford Woodruff was chosen president and he called the former counselors +to act also with him. President Woodruff was eighty-two years old when this +high calling was placed upon him, but he was still quite strong and +active. His life had been devoted to God and his cause. He joined the +Church in 1833, so you see he had been with it from the beginning. He had +been an Apostle for fifty years. It will give you an idea of how busy +President Woodruff had been when you are told that from 1834 to 1895 he had +traveled through twenty-eight States of the Union, three of the countries +of Europe, and six islands of the sea. He had held 7,555 meetings, preached +3,526 discourses, organized fifty-one branches of the Church, besides doing +a great deal of other work in the Church. + +[Illustration: PRESIDENT WILFORD WOODRUFF.] + +President George Q. Cannon, first counselor in the presidency, came with +his father's family from England to Nauvoo in the year 1842, and from that +time had been an active worker in the Church. In 1850 he, in company with +other missionaries, went to the Sandwich Islands. Here Elder Cannon +translated the Book of Mormon into the native language, and sometime after +he had it printed. He labored as an editor and a publisher of Church papers +in San Francisco, in Liverpool, and at home with the _Deseret News_. In +1860 he was ordained an Apostle. In 1866 he began to publish the _Juvenile +Instructor_. He spent many years in Washington as delegate from Utah. +President Cannon was the General Superintendent of Sunday Schools to the +time of his death. + +The second counselor in the presidency, Joseph F. Smith, was born November +13, 1838, in Far West, Missouri, a few days after the time when his father +Hyrum Smith was taken by the mob and ordered to be shot. As a nine-year-old +boy he drove his mother's yoke of cattle across the plains with an emigrant +train. President Smith has filled many missions to Europe, to the Sandwich +Islands and to various parts of the United States. + +He was ordained as one of the Twelve Apostles July 1, 1866. + +During the first few years that Wilford Woodruff was president of the +Church, the persecution against those who had more than one family +continued to rage; yet the enemies of the Saints were not satisfied. Though +many of the people had been deprived of the right to vote and hold office, +yet there were enough left to outvote the anti-"Mormons," many of whom were +eager to get into some office. These kept urging Congress to pass other +laws against the "Mormons," and at last a number of bills were introduced +in Congress for the purpose of disfranchising the "Mormons," that is, +taking away from them the right to vote and to hold public office. + +During all this trouble the authorities of the Church were asking the Lord +to show them the right thing to do. In answer to these pleadings, the Lord +inspired President Woodruff to issue what is called the manifesto. In this +document President Woodruff, among other things, said: + +"Inasmuch as laws have been enacted by Congress forbidding plural +marriages, which laws have been pronounced constitutional by the court of +last resort, I hereby declare my intention to submit to those laws, and to +use my influence with the members of the Church over which I preside to +have them do likewise. + +"... And I now publicly declare that my advice to the Latter-day Saints is +to refrain from contracting any marriage forbidden by the law of the land." + +At the general conference of the Church held October 6, 1890, President +Woodruff's action was sustained by the vote of the conference. + +The enemies of the Church now had no excuse for their persecutions, so, +after a time, peace came once more. The two political parties, the +"Liberal" and "People's" which had been for many years fighting each other +at the polls, now disbanded, and "Mormons" and non-"Mormons" joined either +the Democratic or the Republican party. + +In 1893 the great World's Fair was held in Chicago. In September of that +year the Tabernacle choir of Salt Lake City, led by Evan Stephens, went to +Chicago, accompanied by the first presidency and others. The choir gave +concerts in some of the large cities on the way, and at Chicago carried off +the second prize of one thousand dollars for the best singing. + +During the World's Fair there was held what was called a Parliament of +Religions. Meetings were convened where people of all religions were +invited to speak and tell of their beliefs. Men came from every part of the +world. There were Catholics and Protestants; there were followers of Brahma +and Buddha from India; there were Greeks and Mohammedans; there were +Japanese, Chinese, and negroes--but, among them all there was one religion +and one church lacking, and that was the Church of Jesus Christ of +Latter-day Saints. It had not been invited, and when Elder B.H. Roberts was +sent to Chicago to get a hearing for the Church of Christ, he was treated +in an ungentlemanly manner and was not allowed to properly present the +claims and doctrines of the Church. The Savior once said: "Blessed are ye, +when men shall hate you, and when they shall separate you from their +company, and shall reproach you, and cast out your name as evil, for the +Son of Man's sake." May we not draw a great lesson from all this? + +On January 4, 1896, President Grover Cleveland signed the paper which +admitted Utah into the Union as a state. Celebrations in honor of the +event were held in all the towns and cities of the State. + +Fifty years from the time the pioneers entered Salt Lake Valley, July 24th, +1897, a grand celebration was held in Salt Lake City to honor the event. + +[Illustration: THE PIONEER MONUMENT.] + +This celebration began Tuesday, July 20, 1897, and closed on the night of +Saturday 24th. On the 20th the Pioneer Monument, which is surmounted by a +bronze statue of President Brigham Young, and situated near the Southeast +corner of the Temple block, Salt Lake City, was dedicated by President +Wilford Woodruff. The same day, at a reception held in the Tabernacle, all +surviving pioneers of 1847, were presented with a golden badge. Memorial +services in honor of the deceased pioneers were held in the Tabernacle on +Sunday 25th. + +When the war with Spain broke out the next year, a call was made on Utah +for five hundred volunteers. Utah's young men, many of them sons of the +pioneers and old settlers, heeded the call, and the men were promptly +raised and sent to the seat of war. + +President Wilford Woodruff while on a visit to the Pacific coast, took +suddenly ill and died in San Francisco, September 2, 1898. + +Topics.--1. Wilford Woodruff. 2. George Q. Cannon. 3. Joseph F. Smith. 4. +The "Manifesto." 5. The Parliament of Religions. 6. Death of President +Woodruff. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who constituted the fourth First Presidency of +the Church? 2. Tell something of President Woodruff. 3. Name some positions +President Cannon has held. 4. Tell about President Smith's boyhood. 5. What +further laws did the enemies of the "Mormons" wish passed against them? 6. +What is the "manifesto?" 7. How came it to be issued? 8. When was it +accepted. 9. Tell about the Tabernacle choir's trip to Chicago. 10. What +was the Parliament of Religions? 11. How was the Church treated in that +body? 12. Give some reasons for this treatment. 13. When was Utah admitted +as a state? 14. Tell about the Utah volunteers. 15. When and where did +President Woodruff die? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVII. + +TEMPLE BUILDING. + + +God's goodness, mercy, and watch-care reach to all his children, whether +they be white or black, bond or free; whether they live now or lived +thousands of years ago; yes, whether they are alive or dead. Death is but a +change from one sphere of action to another, and as God is everywhere, it +is not alone in this life that his loving care is manifested. The gospel +also is everlasting. It did not begin with this world, neither will it end +with this life, but its purifying, uplifting power is felt throughout all +time and place. + +Salvation is to get from under the powers of sin and death, and live +forever in the hereafter, growing in wisdom and in power, and becoming more +and more like unto our Great Father, God. This salvation is obtained by +obeying the principles of the gospel and performing the ordinances required +therein. You all know what the first of these principles and ordinances +are. One of the ordinances is that a person must be baptized by water for +the remission of sin. "He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved," +said the Savior. This must of course be performed here on earth, and by a +servant of God having authority to do so. + +Now, by thinking about it a moment, you will know that there are a great +many of the human race who have not been baptized with this kind of +baptism. Millions there are and have been who never heard of the gospel or +of Jesus Christ. Many others there are and have been who have had a kind of +baptism but not performed by one with authority. What will then become of +all these people? + +Many religions of the day teach that there is no chance for people after +they leave this life; if they are not saved when they die, they never can +be afterwards. Can you not see what a cruel thought that is? Think of the +millions who have not had a chance! Surely God would not punish people for +not doing something they had no chance to do. + +[Illustration: THE TEMPLE BLOCK.] + +Now all this was made plain to the Prophet Joseph Smith. The Lord told him +that all those who died without repentance and baptism would have a chance +in the next world. Christ, while his body lay three days in the tomb, went +and preached to the spirits in prison. Likewise, many of the servants of +God have, and are now preaching the gospel to the children of God in the +spirit world. They can there believe and repent, but can not be baptized. +That must be done for them by someone on the earth. This ordinance can be +performed in any place that God directs, but he has commanded that holy +buildings be erected wherein baptisms for the dead can be performed. This, +then, is one use of our temples. Marriages, sealings and other holy +ordinances are also performed in these buildings. + +The first temple site was dedicated in Jackson county, Missouri, August 3, +1831, but, as you have been told, no work was done to erect a building. The +Kirtland temple you also have been told about. After the Saints left +Kirtland the building was neglected. Then it came into the possession of +the Reorganization or "Reorganites," as they are sometimes called, a +religious body founded, and built up for the most part by apostates from +the Church. The Kirtland temple is still standing. + +Ground was dedicated for a temple at Far West July 3, 1837, but owing to +the Saints being driven away, no work other than digging the foundation was +done. + +The next effort was at Nauvoo. This temple was begun April 6, 1841, and +dedicated April 30th and May 1, 1846. You will remember how the Saints +toiled to complete this building. It was a large, beautiful structure, one +of the finest in the west, and cost about one million dollars. About two +years after the Saints had left Nauvoo, the temple was destroyed by fire. + +The Salt Lake temple was begun in 1853, but while it was being built three +others were completed. The first of these is the St. George temple. It was +begun the 9th of November, 1871, and dedicated April 6, 1877. The Logan +temple was begun May 18, 1877, and completed May 17, 1884. The corner +stones of the temple at Manti were laid April 14, 1879, and the building +was dedicated May 21, 1888. All these temples are beautiful buildings, and +many are the blessings the Saints have received in them. + +Those of you who have not seen the Salt Lake temple may get a good idea of +its beauty by the picture. It is built of hewn blocks of gray granite, a +hard, beautiful stone. It was forty years in building. The last top stone +on the towers, called the capstone, was laid April 6, 1892. There were at +least forty thousand people on the temple grounds on this occasion. A +platform had been erected on the south side of the temple, whereon the +authorities of the Church were seated. There were services of singing, +prayer, and speaking, and then President Woodruff touched a button which +sent an electric current up a wire to the top of the tower. The electricity +set free the capstone which settled into its place. President Lorenzo Snow +led the vast audience in giving the grand Hosanna shout. + +President Woodruff was anxious to live to see the completion of the temple. +It was therefore voted by the large audience present that the inside of the +building be finished in one year. + +To accomplish this, means were donated liberally by the Saints, and the +work went on rapidly. On the 6th of April, 1893, the temple was completed, +and on the morning of that day the first meeting was held in the building. +President Woodruff offered the dedicatory prayer. In the afternoon another +meeting was held, and this continued day after day until thirty-one +meetings had been held. Seventy thousand of the Saints witnessed the +dedication exercises, besides thirteen thousand Sunday School children, for +whom special services were held. + +Some of you who read this book may have been in one of our temples. Did you +not notice what a calm, sweet feeling came over you while there? Surely, +the Spirit of God is in these sacred buildings, and those who labor therein +for the living and the dead enjoy its blessed influence. Let every one of +you so live that your life may be pure and clean, so that some day you may +be worthy of entering the House of God and partaking of the blessings in +store for you. + +Topics.--1. Salvation for the dead. 2. The temples. 3. Salt Lake temple. + +Questions and Review.--1. What is salvation? 2. Is salvation limited to +this life? 3. How is salvation obtained? 4. Name some of the first +principles of the gospel. 5. Name some of its first ordinances. 6. What +have some preachers of religion taught regarding salvation? 7. What did the +Lord reveal to Joseph Smith on this subject? 8. Where did Jesus go while +his body lay in the sepulchre? (I Peter 3:18, 20.) 9. What are some of the +uses of temples? 10. How many temples have been built by the Church? 11. +Locate each. 12. Tell something about the Nauvoo temple. 13. Describe the +Salt Lake temple. 14. When was it dedicated? 15. What great blessings are +to be had in a temple? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVIII. + +PRESIDENCY OF LORENZO SNOW. + + +September 13, 1898, the quorum of Twelve Apostles met at Salt Lake City and +chose Lorenzo Snow President of the Church. President Snow chose George Q. +Cannon and Joseph F. Smith as his counselors. + +President Snow was born in Ohio, April 3, 1814. While yet a young man, he +went to Kirtland, where he became acquainted with the Prophet Joseph. +Joining the Church, he was soon in the field as a missionary, traveling +through the States preaching the gospel. From Nauvoo, he went on a mission +to England, returning in 1843 with a large company of Saints. He was +ordained a member of the Twelve Apostles, February 12, 1849, at Salt Lake +City. Shortly afterwards he was called on a mission to Italy. His labors, +however, were not confined to that country, as he organized many branches +of the Church in other European lands. + +[Illustration: PRESIDENT LORENZO SNOW.] + +In 1853, President Snow removed to Brigham City, where for many years he +united the people in a system of co-operation, which rapidly built up the +country. At the completion of the Salt Lake temple he was called to preside +in that sacred building. + +Though so far advanced in years when called to stand at the head of the +Church, President Snow was quite strong in body and in mind. During the +summer of 1899, with a party of Apostles and, other leading men, he visited +many of the stakes of Zion in their conference gatherings. President Snow +said he had a special message to deliver to the Saints which was that they +should in the future more fully observe the law of tithing. This law had +been neglected in the past, but now, the Prophet said, the Lord expected +the Saints to observe this commandment. It is pleasing to state that most +of the Saints heeded the timely instruction and warning, and there was +great improvement in keeping this law of the Lord. + +When President Snow took charge of the affairs of the Church, it was +largely in debt, owing to the troubles incident to the confiscation of its +property by the government some time before. Now, because of the +improvement in the payment of tithes and offerings, the First Presidency +were able to pay some of the debts of the Church, and make arrangements for +the payment of others as they became due. + +President Snow put new life into many departments of the Church. The School +system which the Church had established received much attention. The +Latter-day Saints' University at Salt Lake City was established, and one of +its buildings was erected. Many other Church buildings were planned and +begun. + +At an election held in the fall of 1898, Brigham H. Roberts was elected to +represent Utah in Congress. At this election the people, as they had done +many times before, voted as either Democrats or Republicans, and both +"Mormons" and non-"Mormons" were elected to office. Now, however, some +anti-"Mormon" newspapers, assisted by many of the Utah sectarian preachers, +made a great stir. The enemies of the Saints continued to send a flood of +falsehood all over the country. Much excitement was worked up and a +determined effort was made to keep Utah's representative out of Congress. + +Representative Roberts fought bravely for his own and his people's rights, +but once more hatred against "Mormonism" overcame better judgment, and he +was refused admission to the seat to which he was fairly elected, on the +ground that he had obeyed the law of plural marriage. + +August 19, 1899, the Utah volunteers returned from the Philippines where +they had proved themselves valiant soldiers in the service of their +country. A grand celebration was held in Salt Lake City in their honor. + +On April 12, 1901, President George Q. Cannon died at Monterey, California, +where he had gone for his health. This great and good man had done much for +the Church, and he was greatly beloved by the Saints. + +Elder Heber J. Grant, with Horace S. Ensign, Louis A. Kelsch, and Alma O. +Taylor, left Salt Lake City July 24, 1901, for a mission to Japan. They +landed in that country August 12, and at once set to work learning the +language. September 1, of that year, Elder Grant dedicated the land for the +preaching of the Gospel. Since that time a good beginning has been made in +the distribution of the printed word, and the Book of Mormon has been +translated into Japanese and printed. + +President Snow died after a brief illness at his home in Salt Lake City, +October 10, 1901. He was not president of the Church long, but during the +three years of his presidency, the Lord blessed him and gave him power to +do much good. + +Four days before he died, President Snow addressed the Saints assembled in +conference in the Tabernacle at Salt Lake City. The burden of this, his +last message was, "God bless you." He urged the presidents of stakes and +the high counselors to take upon themselves more of the responsibility of +looking after the affairs of the Church, so that the Twelve could devote +their time to their special work of preaching the gospel. + +Topics.--1. Lorenzo Snow as President. 2. Election of B.H. Roberts to +Congress. 3. The Mission to Japan. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who constituted the fifth Presidency of the +Church? 2. Tell what you can about Lorenzo Snow. 3. What is the law of +tithing? 4. What message did President Snow deliver regarding the law of +tithing? 5. Why was the Church in debt? 6. Who opened the Japanese mission? + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIX. + +PRESIDENCY OF JOSEPH F. SMITH. + + +The First Presidency of the Church was reorganized for the sixth time +October 17, 1901. Joseph F. Smith was chosen president, and he selected for +his counselors, John R. Winder and Anthon H. Lund. At a special conference +held in Salt Lake City November 10, 1901, this presidency was sustained by +the vote of the Church. + +From his boyhood President Smith has been an active, earnest member of the +Church over which he now presides. His father was Hyrum Smith the +Patriarch, brother to the Prophet Joseph. You will remember how these two +brothers were so closely together in the beginning of the Church, and how +they were both killed in Carthage jail. + +Joseph was thus left fatherless when he was a boy six years old. As a boy +he had not the privilege of going every day to school or of playing +peacefully in the door-yard of his home. Mobs drove them out of Missouri, +and then out of Nauvoo. They had little peace. Two years after his father +had been killed, Joseph's mother, with her family, had to leave her home, +along with the Saints, and undertake the long westward journey. Although +Joseph was only eight years old at the time, he successfully drove a team +of oxen for three hundred miles over the rolling prairies of Iowa. This was +not an easy task for the boy, for the road was often steep or muddy, and +many older drivers had breakdowns on the way. + +In chapter 27 of this history you are told of the Saints stopping for a +time at Winter Quarters, getting ready to move westward. Joseph and his +mother were with them. Most of his time was spent in herding his mother's +cattle. And he was a good herdboy, too. He saw to it that none of them was +lost. There were Indians in that country then, and often they would steal +cattle and horses. One day Joseph had a narrow escape. It happened this +way: + +Joseph and another boy had driven their cattle to the herd-grounds, and +they were having a good time on their horses which they rode. Suddenly, +they heard the whoop of Indians. On looking up, they saw a band of about +thirty savages riding toward them. They were naked, their bodies daubed +with clay and their hair and faces painted! Joseph's first thought was not +about himself, but about his cattle. If the Indians should drive off his +cattle, the family would not be able to go to the Valley next spring. So, +off he rode to try to save his stock, the Indians coming in the same +direction. They whooped and yelled so that the cattle ran off in great +fright. Then the Indians singled out Joseph, for they wanted his horse, +which was a good one and could run. The chase was now on in earnest. Joseph +turned. Some of the Indians followed, while others slacked to head him off. +Soon he was between two parties of Indians. After a time they closed in on +him. One of the Indians took him by the arm, and another by the leg, and +lifted him from his horse, letting him fall to the ground. The horses +jumped over him, but did not hurt him. The Indians rode off with the horse, +but did not get the cattle. + +This is only one of the many thrilling incidents in the life of President +Smith as a boy. When his mother was ready to move West, Joseph drove two +yoke of oxen hitched to a heavily loaded wagon across the plains, a +distance of one thousand miles. He drove into Salt Lake City September 23, +1848. + +In those early days, even the boys had to work hard to help make a living +in the new country. Joseph again herded cattle, besides doing work on the +farm and in the canyon. How, then, did the boy get his education? Crossing +the plains, when they were resting in the tent or by the camp fire, +Joseph's mother taught him to read the Bible, and from that day to this, he +has been reading good books. You see, he started early in the reading of +the best books, and that means a lot. Joseph's mother was a very good and +wise woman, and he says that much of his success in life is due to her +teachings, and the fact that he heeded her counsels. + +[Illustration: ANTHON H. LUND, JOSEPH F. SMITH, CHARLES W. PENROSE + +THE FIRST PRESIDENCY, 1916] + +When Joseph was fourteen years old his mother died. When he was fifteen he +went on a mission to the Hawaiian Islands. He worked a number of months in +California to earn money to pay his passage to the Islands. He was greatly +blessed on this mission. + +This small history cannot tell you of the many missions President Smith has +filled since that first one. Many times he has been back to the Hawaiian +Islands, and many times to the States and to Europe. Every boy and girl +ought to read the detailed story of President Smith's life. President Smith +is still with us. Most of the Sunday School boys and girls have seen him +and heard him speak. He is a great and good man. He is the prophet of the +Lord to us. Let us be thankful that we live in a day when we can have such +men with us to show us by the example of their lives how to be good boys +and girls, good men and women. + +President John R. Winder was born at Biddenden near London, England, +December 11, 1821. He joined the Church when he was a young man and +emigrated to Utah in 1853, since which time he took an active and leading +part in Church matters. In the year 1877 he was chosen to be the second +counselor to Presiding Bishop Wm. B. Preston, which position he held until +he was called to the First Presidency. When the Salt Lake Temple was +nearing completion, he was given special charge of the work, and at the +dedication of the Temple he became the first assistant to President Snow. +He died March 27, 1910. He lived to a good old age, active and strong to +the last. He claimed that this was due to his having obeyed the laws of +God, especially those contained in the Word of Wisdom. + +President Anthon H. Lund came from Denmark. He was born in the city of +Aalborg in that far-away country May 14, 1844. Many interesting stories are +told of him as a boy-preacher of the gospel in his native land. When he was +called upon to give his first report at conference he was lifted upon a +table that he might be better seen and heard. He came to Utah when eighteen +years old, and settled in Sanpete county. He was made an Apostle in 1889. +He has filled a number of foreign missions, and at one time he presided +over the European mission. He has also been president of the Manti Temple. + +At the death of President Winder, President Lund was chosen First Counselor +to President Smith, and Elder John Henry Smith, one of the quorum of the +Twelve, was called to be the Second Counselor. He was born at Carbunca, +near Council Bluffs, Iowa, September 18, 1848. His father was George A. +Smith, at one time Counselor to President Brigham Young. He came to Utah in +early days, and filled many missions at home and abroad. He died Oct. 13, +1911. President Smith, during his life, became known and well-beloved far +and near. He was always kind and cheerful, and he had a way with him which +won the hearts of all who came to know him. + +Elder Charles W. Penrose, of the Council of the Twelve, was chosen to +succeed John Henry Smith in the First Presidency, December 7, 1911. +President Penrose was born February 4, 1832, at Camberwell, London, +England. When he was four years old he could read the Bible. At eighteen he +joined the Church, and being so well versed in the scriptures he was soon +called on a mission. For ten years he traveled about his native land +preaching the gospel, healing many of the sick and organizing branches of +the Church. He suffered from hardships and persecution, but he kept right +on until he was released, when he emigrated to Utah. Since then President +Penrose has filled many missions. He is a clear, forceful speaker, and he +has written much on doctrinal subjects. He was for many years editor of the +_Deseret News_. He wrote a number of our best songs. He was called and +ordained to be an apostle and set apart as one of the Twelve, July 7, 1904. +He presided over the European Mission from December, 1906, to June, 1910. + +In January, 1903, Reed Smoot was elected Senator to represent Utah in the +Congress of the United States at Washington. As he is a leading official in +the Church, some anti-"Mormons" objected to his retaining the office to +which he was elected. They sent a protest to the Senate, and that body +appointed a committee to investigate the charges made. President Smith and +many of the brethren were summoned to Washington to give their testimony. +All of this led to much agitation and misrepresentation against the Church. +Senator Smoot retained his seat. + +During recent years the Church has been growing both at home and abroad. +Property is being acquired in many parts of the world, and mission houses +are being erected. Carthage Jail, in Illinois, the farm containing the +birthplace of the Prophet Joseph Smith, and a large part of the Temple +grounds at Independence, Missouri, have been purchased by the Church. + +In the year 1905 a monument of polished granite was erected and a +comfortable and commodious cottage was built on the site of the Prophet's +birth, on the farm purchased by the Church, in Sharon, Windsor County, +Vermont. The monument is 50 feet and 10 inches high and weighs nearly 100 +tons. The shaft is 38-3/4 feet long, each foot corresponding to one year +of the Prophet's life. The cottage is built around the original hearthstone +of the old Smith home. On December 23rd, 1905--the one hundredth +anniversary of the birth of the Prophet--this cottage and monument were +dedicated by President Joseph F. Smith, who, with a number of the leading +brethren of the Church and a few Saints, had gone to Vermont for that +purpose. The monument contains a written description of the Prophet's +testimony and stands as a silent witness of the great work he was called +upon by the Lord to perform. + +[Illustration: JOSEPH SMITH MONUMENT AND MEMORIAL COTTAGE.] + +For many years past, the Saints had been making settlements in Mexico, and +establishing themselves there in good homes. In the year 1912 the +disturbances in the country broke out into civil war, and because of the +dangers attendant on the fighting between various factions, most of the +Latter-day Saints had to leave the country and their possessions and come +to the United States. + +Two new Temples are now being erected, one in Alberta, Canada, and another +at Laie, on the island of Oahu, Hawaiian or Sandwich Islands. Work on the +Canadian Temple was begun in 1913, and the one at Hawaii was commenced in +the summer of 1915. The building of these Temples indicate that the great +work for the dead is being energetically carried out by the Church. + +In the summer of 1914, the great European war broke out, which has caused +the death and crippling of millions, and brought misery untold to the +nations engaged in it. Very likely this war is the greatest the world has +ever known. Nearly all our missionaries have had to be withdrawn from +Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Holland, and France, and very few +have been left in Great Britain and the Scandinavian countries. We +sympathize with all these nations, and can only hope that the Lord will +make it possible, after the war, that the missionaries will be better able +to reach the people with the gospel of peace and salvation. + +At this writing (December, 1916) there are seventy-three stakes of Zion in +the Church, and over eight hundred wards. The quorums of the Priesthood +have been more thoroughly organized, and have regular courses of study in +their classes. The helping organizations of the Church, such as the Sunday +Schools, the Mutual Improvement Associations, and others are doing a +splendid work. The Church has recently completed a beautiful Church office +building in Salt Lake City. The first and second floors of this building +are occupied by the First Presidency and other Church officials. The third +floor is devoted to the Historian's work, and the large collection of books +and Church records. The fourth floor is used by the Genealogical Society, +an organization whose purpose is to help people with their records, and +gather a library of genealogical books, which will help them do the work in +the Temples for their dead. + +[Illustration: CHURCH OFFICE BUILDING] + + * * * * * + +Here ends our history for the present. The little tree (mentioned in +Chapter I) planted by God and nurtured by his servants, has in the space of +eighty-six years grown to a large, beautiful tree, whose branches, as it +were, protect thousands of people, and whose fruit nourishes a multitude. +The enemy has striven hard to uproot and destroy it, but every effort has +only made it cling more firmly to the nourishing earth. + +The Church is growing in strength and power to save the human family. That +is its mission. It will never be overcome, or left to other people. "No +unhallowed hand can stop the work from progressing," said the Prophet +Joseph, "persecution may rage; mobs may combine; armies may assemble, +calumny may defame, but the truth of God will go forth boldly, nobly, and +independently till it has penetrated every continent; visited every clime, +swept every country; and sounded in every ear; till the purposes of God +shall be accomplished, and the Great Jehovah shall say the work is done." + +And now let all the boys and girls who read this book remember what the +Lord expects of them. He must have men and women to carry on the great work +begun so nobly and so well. If He is to use you, you must make your lives +worthy; you must grow in wisdom and power and faith and goodness; be pure +and strong in mind and body; be studious, earnest, prayerful, noble, and +brave to do the right; then God will be pleased to use you, and you +yourselves will become makers of a glorious future history. + +Topics.--1. President Joseph F. Smith. 2. John R. Winder. 3. Anthon H. +Lund. 4. John Henry Smith. 5. Charles W. Penrose. 6. The trouble in Mexico. +7. The great war in Europe. 8. Progress of the Church. + +Questions and Review.--1. Who was President Joseph F. Smith's father? 2. +Describe some of his boyhood surroundings. 3. Tell about his adventure with +the Indians. 4. How did he cross the plains? 5. Tell of his missions. 6. +How long has he been President of the Church? 7. How many of you have seen +him and heard him speak? 8. Name President Smith's counselors. 9. Tell +something about each of them. 10. What historical places has the Church +purchased and improved? 11. Why have the Saints had to leave Mexico? 12. +Review the great European war. 13. What might be the outcome of this war? +14. Where are new temples being built? 15. How many stakes and wards are +there now in the Church 16. What did the Prophet Joseph Smith say about the +future of the Church? + + + + +FIRST PRESIDENCIES OF THE CHURCH. + + First.--1833-1844. + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ + Frederick G. Williams. +Joseph Smith. Sidney Rigdon. Hyrum Smith, + William Law. + + Second.--1847-1877. + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ + Heber C. Kimball, Willard Richards, +Brigham Young. George A. Smith, Jedediah M. Grant, + John W. Young. Daniel H. Wells. + + Third.--1880-1887. + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ +John Taylor. George Q. Cannon. Joseph F. Smith. + + Fourth.--1889-1898. + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ +Wilford Woodruff. George Q. Cannon. Joseph F. Smith. + + Fifth.--1898-1901. + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ + +Lorenzo Snow. George Q. Cannon. Joseph F. Smith. + + Sixth.--1901- + +_President._ _First Counselor._ _Second Counselors._ + John R. Winder. Anthon H. Lund. +Joseph F. Smith. Anthon H. Lund. John Henry Smith. + Charles W. Penrose. + + + + +NAMES OF THE TWELVE APOSTLES. + +SINCE THE ORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH. + + +1 Thomas B. Marsh, +2 David W. Patten, +3 Brigham Young, +4 Heber C. Kimball, +5 Orson Hyde, +6 William E. McLellin, +7 Parley P. Pratt, +8 Luke S. Johnson, +9 William Smith, +10 Orson Pratt, +11 John F. Boynton, +12 Lyman E. Johnson, +13 John E. Page, +14 John Taylor, +15 Wilford Woodruff, +16 George A. Smith, +17 Willard Richards, +18 Lyman Wight, +19 Amasa M. Lyman, +20 Ezra T. Benson, +21 Charles C. Rich, +22 Lorenzo Snow, +23 Erastus Snow, +24 Franklin D. Richards, +25 George Q. Cannon, +26 Joseph F. Smith, +27 Brigham Young, Jun., +28 Albert Carrington, +29 Moses Thatcher, +30 Francis M. Lyman, +31 John Henry Smith, +32 George Teasdale, +33 Heber J. Grant, +34 John W. Taylor, +35 Marriner W. Merrill, +36 Anthon H. Lund, +37 Abraham H. Cannon, +38 Matthias F. Cowley, +39 Abraham O. Woodruff, +40 Rudger Clawson, +41 Reed Smoot, +42 Hyrum M. Smith, +43 Geo. Albert Smith, +44 Chas. W. Penrose, +45 George F. Richards, +46 Orson F. Whitney, +47 David O. McKay, +48 Anthony W. Ivins, +49 Joseph F. Smith. Jun., +50 James E. Talmage. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[Footnote 1: Not.--If we say that the Father and the Son came to Joseph +because of his prayer, we might conclude that every boy who prayed should +receive such a visit. No; the time had come for the ushering in of a new +dispensation, etc. To bring out this thought is the idea of this question.] + +[Footnote 2: Jensen's Historical Record, page 838. Whitney's History of +Utah. Vol. I, page 274.] + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A Young Folks' History of the Church +of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, by Nephi Anderson + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A YOUNG FOLKS' HISTORY *** + +***** This file should be named 16534.txt or 16534.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/5/3/16534/ + +Produced by Kevin Handy, Josephine Paolucci and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/16534.zip b/16534.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c09956c --- /dev/null +++ b/16534.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7b08d81 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #16534 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/16534) |
